S4 S6 Guide v19.9 PDF

Avid S4/S6 Guide
Software Version 19.9

Legal Notices
© 2019 Avid Technology, Inc., (“Avid”), all rights reserved. This guide may not be duplicated in whole or in part without the written consent of Avid.
For a current and complete list of Avid trademarks visit: http://www.avid.com/legal/trademarks-and-other-notices
Bonjour, the Bonjour logo, and the Bonjour symbol are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.
Thunderbolt and the Thunderbolt logo are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.
This product may be protected by one or more U.S. and non-U.S. patents. Details are available at www.avid.com/patents.
Product features, specifications, system requirements, and availability are subject to change without notice.
Guide Part Number 9329-66057-00 REV A 09/19

Contents
Part I Introduction
Chapter 1. Introduction to Avid | S6 and S4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
System Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
System Requirements and Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Activation and Registration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
About This Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Part II Getting Started
Chapter 2. First Time Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Starting Up the System for the First Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Software Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Logging in as Administrator and Updating Master Module Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Connecting S4/S6 to a Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Starting Up and Shutting Down the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Configuring S4/S6 the First Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Enabling EUCON Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Control App Compatibility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Part III Touchscreen
Chapter 3. Master Module Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Chapter 4. Home Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

The Attention Track Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Meter Scroller and Track Scroller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Home Screen Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Chapter 5. Tracks Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Displaying Tracks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Track Matrix Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Track Scroller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Track Selector Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Chapter 6. Monitoring Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Assigning Monitor Sources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Monitoring Screen Local Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Enable EUCON Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
S6 Guide iii
Chapter 7. Settings Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Workstations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Soft Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
User and System Preferences. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
About . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Chapter 8. Soft Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Overview of Soft Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Saving and Loading Soft Key Appsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Using Soft Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Soft Keys Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Creating Soft Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Special Soft Key Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Workstations, Layouts, and Tracks Soft Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Soft Keys on the Master Post Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Chapter 9. Using the S4 Channel Strip Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Part IV Using S4/S6
Chapter 10. Common Tasks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Nudging and Banking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Changing Display Module Views From the Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Selecting Tracks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Attentioning Tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Assigning Track Input and Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Adjusting Track Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Using the Transport and Jog/Shuttle Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Working with Track Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Pro Tools Commands Using the Track Color / Modifier Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Chapter 11. Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Record Enabling Tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Configuring Record Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Soft Keys for Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Chapter 12. Using the Master Post Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Master Post Module Top Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Assigning Tracks to MPM Strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Track Monitoring and Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Linking and Locking Strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Using the Speaker Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Using the Soft Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Chapter 13. Using Master Display Meter Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Chapter 14. Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Editing from the Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Editing with the Wheel, Locate Switches, and Soft Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
S4/S6 Guide iv
Chapter 15. Plug-ins and Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Plug-ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Chapter 16. Automation and Mixing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Using Automation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Mixing with VCAs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Surround Panning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Dolby Atmos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Chapter 17. Using the Master Joystick Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Assigning Tracks to the Joysticks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Writing Automation with the Joysticks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Constraining the Joysticks to X or Y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Advanced Pan Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Assigning Other Parameters to the Joysticks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Joysticks and Layouts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
MJM Features for Dolby Atmos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Chapter 18. Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Accessing Layout Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Layout Screen Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Virtual Strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Creating Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Recalling Layouts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Spilling Selected Tracks to a Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Renaming, Rearranging, and Deleting Layouts in a Set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Saving and Loading Layout Sets (Titles) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Chapter 19. Spill Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

QuickStart for Using Spill Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Configuring Spill Zones. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Spilling Layouts, Tracks, and Workstations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Chapter 20. Expand. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Strip Expand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Attention Expand Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Part V Preferences
Chapter 21. User Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Saving and Loading User Preferences. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Workstation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Display Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Chapter 22. System Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Workstation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
S4/S6 Guide v
Part VI S4/S6 Modules
Chapter 23. S4/S6 Master Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Master Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Automation Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Master Joystick Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Master Post Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Chapter 24. Channel Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Fader Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Process Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Knob Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Channel Strip Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Display Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Part VII Appendix
Appendix A. GPIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Advanced GPI and Fader Glide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Example GPI Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Appendix B. EQ and DYN Parameters in Expand Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Appendix C. Touchscreen Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Appendix D. Troubleshooting and Utility Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Diagnosing Module Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Fader Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
LED Calibration and Brightness Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Calibrating the Joysticks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Calibrating the Master Module Touchscreen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Utility Test Mode for Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
S4/S6 Guide vi
Part I: Introduction
Chapter 1: Introduction to Avid | S6 and S4
Avid™ S6 and S4 are modular, ergonomically designed control surfaces for Pro Tools® Software and EUCON™-compatible
digital audio workstations (DAWs), and use the EUCON Ethernet protocol to provide fast, reliable data transmission.
S6 and S4 are tightly integrated with all EUCON-compatible DAWs, providing access to many key commands, menu items, and
controls. The Master Module and Automation Module each have editable Soft Keys that offer single-switch access to automation,
editing, session management, and other commands. Both control surfaces provide substantial visual feedback to let you quickly
identify tracks and their functions. Each strip inherits its color from the audio application, and module controls light in different col-
ors for each function. Display Modules can display high-resolution, multichannel colored meters, waveforms, automation data, and
functions. You can also use the Pro Tools | Control app simultaneously with S6 for additional control and display.
S6
S4
Chapter 1: Introduction to Avid | S6 and S4 1

Modules
S6 and S4 systems can include the following modules (not all modules are supported on all systems, as noted):
Master Module
(All Systems)
This is the central hub for S6 and S4 operations. It uses a touchscreen and other controls to let you se-
lect, mute, solo, enable record and input, and edit track functions. All configurations must have one
Master Module.
The Master Module displays the Home, Tracks, Monitoring, and Settings Screens, and provides
knobs, switches, and a touchscreen that let you configure and manage your system, navigate through
your session’s tracks, create and store track Layouts, and perform many recording, monitoring, rout-
ing, and mixing tasks.
Automation Module
(All Systems)
This module includes Transport Controls, Jog/Shuttle Wheel, Attention Track Fader, Soft Keys, Navi-
gation, and other controls.
Display Module
(Optional for S6, S4 and S6 M10Plus Systems)
Each of its eight strips can display metering, editable waveforms, and other functions. Display Mod-
ules can also be configured as Master Meter Modules.
Knob Module
(S6, Optional for S4 Systems)
Each of its eight strips has four knob sections with displays. Knob Modules can also be configured as
Attention Expand Zones.
Process Module
(S6 Only)
Each of its eight strips has one knob section with a display, and multiple function switches.
Fader Module
(S6 Only)
Each of its eight strips has a motorized fader, meter, mute, solo, automation and other switches, an At-
tention key, and a display. One Fader Module can be configured as an Expand Fader zone.
Master Joystick Module

(Optional for All Systems)
The optional Master Joystick Module provides two touch-sensitive joysticks, a central pan display,
dedicated panning mode switches, and other displays and controls.
Master Post Module

(Optional for All Systems)
The optional Master Post Module provides monitor and punch paddles like a traditional PEC/DIR
panel, along with other track controls, a monitoring section, and a bank of Soft Keys.
Channel Strip Module

(S4 Only)
The Channel Strip Module provides a lower fader section, central function select section, and upper
knob section.

System Configurations
S6 and S4 systems offer different capabilities, letting them be scaled for different installation sizes and requirements:
S6 M40 Built around the Master Module Universal (previously called the M40), are suitable for larger configurations up to 64 or
more fader strips, are expandable, support up to eight connected workstations, and support Display Modules.
S6 M10 Plus Built around the Master Module M10 with M10 Plus License, are suitable for smaller configurations that desire Dis-
play Modules. S6 M10 Plus systems accommodate 8 to 24 fader strips per frame and can control up to two connected workstations.
S6 M10 Built around the Master Module M10, are suitable for smaller configurations, accommodating 8 to 24 fader strips per frame,
and supporting up to two connected workstations. M10-based systems do not support Display Modules.
S4 Built around the Master Module Universal, are ideal for medium-sized configurations. S4 systems are available in 8–, 16–, and
24–fader pre-assembled frames with up to three Channel Strip Modules, and support Display Modules. S4 systems can control up
to two connected workstations.
S6 systems are described by their processor (M10 or M40), the number of fader strips in the system, and the number of knobs per
strip. For example, an M40 24-9 D system includes 24 fader strips, 9 knobs per strip, and Display Modules.
S4 systems are described by their number of fader strips (8, 16, or 24) and frame width (3, 4, or 5). For example, an S4 16-4 includes
16 fader strips in a 4-foot wide frame.
S6 Surface Configurations
Modules can be arranged in many different ways.
Figure 1 shows three arrangements for an S6 M10 16-5 configuration: Two Fader Modules (16 strips), two Process Modules (each
providing 1 knob per strip), and two Knob Modules (each providing 4 knobs per strip), for a total 5 knobs per strip.
Figure 1. Three 16-strip S6 M10 arrangements with Master Modules to the left, in the center, and to the right of the Channel Modules
Figure 2 shows one possible arrangement for an S6 M40 32-9-D configuration: Four Fader Modules (32 strips), four Process Modules
(1 knob per strip), eight Knob Modules (8 knobs per strip), and four Display Modules (D), for a total 9 knobs per strip.
Figure 2. 32-strip S6 M40 arrangement with Display Modules

S4 Surface Configurations
Figure 3 shows two possible arrangements of modules in an S4 system: Three Channel Strip Modules (24 strips), one each optional
Master Joystick Module, Master Post Module, and Attention Knob Module, and three Display Modules.
Figure 3. Two 24-strip S4 arrangements with optional Joystick, Post, and Attention modules and Display Modules
Frames and Hardware Options

(S6 Only)
S6 systems can be assembled as desktop systems or mounted onto a Leg Frame, and support any of the following hardware options:
Keyboard Tray
A tray that fits into the Bolster to provide a movable platform for a computer keyboard.
SpeakerDeck
A platform that can be assembled in short (shown) or tall configuration to place speakers.
Script Tray
A tray for scripts, notes, and cue sheets that rolls above Knob Modules.
VESA Mount
Consisting of a mounting post and adjustable VESA arm, the VESA Mount lets you mount a computer dis-
play and position it as close to the operator as desired.
Fill Panels
Standard Fill Panels (Large or Small) fill empty slots in a chassis. Additional Fill Panels are available for
custom configurations, including the Frame Panel Large Center (for configurations in which the Master
Module is in slot 1 above the Bolster), and the Mini Fill Panel (to put a Process, Knob, Master Joystick or
similarly sized module in slot 1).
Producers Desk
The Producers Desk option consists of two chassis that include a special Inlay panel that spans both chassis.
The inlay provides space for you to position computer displays and a keyboard. You can also add modules
to either or both chassis of the Producers Desk.
Leg Frames, Leg Frame Extension, and Leg Frame Join Modules
Leg Frames provide a sturdy, ergonomic stand for S6 systems that are five or more chassis in width. Leg
Frame systems include “L” in their name (such as S6 M40 32-9-D-L). The Leg Frame Extension is a sin-
gle-chassis wide shelf that lets you expand a Leg Frame by one or two chassis. Leg Frame Join Modules let
you attach two or more Leg Frames together to form a larger frame.
Instructions for installing a Keyboard Tray, SpeakerDeck, Script Tray, VESA Mount, Frame Panel Large Center, Mini Fill Panel,
Leg Frame Extension and Leg Frame Join Module are included with the hardware option. Leg Frames options and Producers Desks
are explained in the S6 Installation Guide.

System Requirements and Compatibility
S6 and S4 utilize the same EUCON software, which requires a compatible version of Pro Tools and is also compatible with other
EUCON™-aware applications. For a list of supported applications, system requirements, and other compatibility information, visit:
www.avid.com/compatibility
Activation and Registration

Activate your S4/S6 system software on-line as instructed later in this guide. You must use the System ID on the included S6 System
Software Activation Card to activate and download all S6 system software and documentation. You will also need to activate your
S4/S6 software license after installing the software.
If you are upgrading a system, check your Avid account for the latest S4/S6 system software.
About This Guide

This guide provides an overview of S4/S6 features and functionality. For complete instructions on connecting and configuring your
system, see the S4/S6 Installation Guide.
Conventions Used in This Guide

All of our guides use the following conventions to indicate menu choices and key commands:
:
Convention Action
Settings > Surface From the touchscreen Settings screen, navigate to the Surface page
Control+N Hold down the Control key and press the N key
Control-click Hold down the Control key and click the mouse button
• The names of Commands, Options, and Settings that appear on-screen are in a different font.
• The names of physical controls on the surface are shown in bold.
The following symbols are used to highlight important information:
User Tips are helpful hints for getting the most from your system.
Important Notices include information that could affect your data or the performance of your system.
Shortcuts show you useful keyboard or mouse shortcuts.
Cross References point to related sections in this guide and other Avid guides.
How to Use this PDF Guide

These are some useful features of this PDF:
• The Bookmarks on the left serve as a continuously visible table of contents. Click on a subject heading to jump to that page.
• Click a + symbol to expand that heading to show subheadings. Click the – symbol to collapse a subheading.
• The Table of Contents provides active links to their pages. Select the hand cursor, allow it to hover over the heading until it turns
into a finger. Then click to locate to that subject and page.
• All cross references in blue are active links. Click to follow the reference.
• Use Acrobat shortcuts to navigate back to the previous view (Option+Left Arrow (Mac)/Alt+Left Arrow (Windows))
• Select Find from the Edit menu to search for a subject.

Resources
The Avid website (www.avid.com) is your best online source for information to help you get the most out of your S6
system. The following are just a few of the services and features available.
Account Activation, Product Registration, and License Activation

Activate your product to access downloads in your Avid account (or quickly create an account if you don’t have one). Register your
purchase online, download software, updates, documentation, and other resources. Activate your software license.
https://www.avid.com/account
Support and Downloads

Contact Avid Customer Success (technical support); download software updates and the latest online manuals; browse the Com-
patibility documents for system requirements; search the online Knowledge Base or join the worldwide Avid user community on
the User Conference.
For S6 support, contact us using the Audio Annual Contract Support line for your geography listed here:
http://www.avid.com/Support/Contact/audio-support
For S6 support, troubleshooting, and downloads, visit:

http://avid.force.com/pkb/articles/faq/Avid-S6-Support
Training and Education

Study on your own using courses available online or find out how you can learn in a classroom setting at an Avid-certified training
center.
Videos on YouTube
Check out the Avid Pro Tools | S6 Workflows and original Get Started Fast with S6 video tutorials, available on YouTube.
Most of the features described in these videos are applicable to both S6 and S4.
Products and Developers

Learn about Avid products; download demo software or learn about our Development Partners and their plug-ins, applications, and
hardware.
https://www.avid.com/Products/index.html
News and Events

Get the latest news from Avid or sign up for a product demo.

Part II: Getting Started
Chapter 2: First Time Setup
S4 and S6 modules communicate with digital audio workstations over an IP Ethernet network. All modules and one or more work-
stations must connect to the supplied Ethernet switch.
Before connecting any workstations to S4/S6, you must do the following:

• Start up the system for the first time to confirm basic installation.
• Activate your Avid account for S4/S6 by logging into your Avid account (or creating a new one, if necessary).
• Download and install the most recent Master Module software.
• Download (but do not yet install) the most recent Workstation software.
• Activate your Master Module software.
• Install Workstation software (Mac and/or Windows) on all workstations you plan to connect to S4/S6.
• Make Ethernet connections between your S4/S6 and workstations.
• Configure S4/S6.
Important!
The EUCON performance improvements introduced in v3.5 make it and all later versions incompatible with v3.4.x and previous
versions of EUCON and EuControl.
Starting Up the System for the First Time

To start up the system for the first time:
1 Do the following:
• S6: Make sure you have connected the S6 Power Strip to a UPS, power conditioner, or other switchable power source, then
turn on power to S6 from the power device.
• S4: Make sure you have connected S4 to a power source using one of the included IEC power cables, then turn on the S4 by
putting its back panel Power switch to the On position.
2 When the system is fully started, if the touchscreen displays an End User License Agreement and the following message, you
must install updated software before you can continue:
Welcome to your Avid Control Surface
A critical software update is available! Before continuing, please follow the instructions on the Software Activation card in-
cluded in the front of the Installation Guide to activate your purchase on-line so that you can download and install important
software updates before using your Control Surface.
3 Press (or tap) Logout.
4 Proceed to Software Activation.
Be sure to Activate your purchase using the included Activation card so you can receive your software license and software up-
dates directly in your Avid account.
Chapter 2: First Time Setup 8

Software Activation
You must activate your S4/S6 to be able to download required Master Module software, as described below (and as described in
this article on our Knowledge Base: http://avid.force.com/pkb/articles/how_to/S6-Activation-Card).
1 (Required) Use the System ID on the included S4/S6 System Software Activation Card to activate your Avid account for S4/S6:
• Go to https://my.avid.com/products/Hardware/Console and log into your Avid
Account (or create a new one, if necessary).
• Enter the System ID from the S4/S6 System Software Activation Card (shown at
Avid ® S4/S6
right) included in the Master Module package. SYST E M I D CA R D
Your System ID can be found on the S4/S6 System Software Activation Card included
in the pouch of the Installation Guide. Activating deposits your software Activation ID
number into your account, which you will use later to acquire your S4/S6 software li-
cense, as well as software downloads and documentation.
Avid ® S4/S6
2 (Required) Acquire your S4/S6 Software License: SYST E M I D CA R D
• Make sure you are still logged into your Avid Master Account at
https://my.avid.com.
For instructions, visit www.avid.com/activationcard
• Retrieve your Activation ID number (My Products and Subscriptions > Avid S6 Please enter this code exactly as written
(letters are case-sensitive)
M40/M10 Software and Support or Avid S4 Software and Support). Printed in USA 7020-71508-00_A
• You will use this number later to activate your new software license.
• Navigate to the My Products and Subscriptions page where software updates, Workstation software, documentation, and
other resources are available. Download the latest versions of the S4/S6 Master Module Software, Workstation software (Mac
or Windows), and documentation from your Avid account to your computer.
• Insert a USB flash drive into an available USB port on your computer.
Do not use the System Restore USB drive! Use a separate USB flash drive.
• If necessary, extract (decompress) the .ZIP file containing the Master Module software to unzip it.
• Copy the resulting file (.exe) to the top (root) level of your USB drive, then remove (eject) the USB drive.
3 (Optional) Register your hardware.
Follow the instructions on the Registration Information Card.
Logging in as Administrator and Updating Master Module Software

To install and update S6 Master Module software:
1 If you have not already done so, navigate the touchscreen to the Settings > About page and press Logout.
2 Select Administrator. When prompted enter the following default password: password
3 Click the File Explorer tile.
4 Plug the USB flash drive with the downloaded S4/S6 Master Module installer into one of the available USB ports on the back
of the Master Module. The USB drive appears in the left hand column under Computer.
5 Tap on the USB flash drive to see the contents.
6 Launch (run) the S4S6MasterModuleInstall software from the flash drive by double-tapping on the icon.
Follow the instructions on-screen. After the installer has completed you will be prompted to restart the system.
7 Tap Yes to restart the system immediately.
• If after restarting the Software License Activation screen appears, proceed to Activating Your Software License.
• If not, proceed to Installing S4/S6 Supporting Software.
8 Proceed to Activating Your Software License.

Activating Your Software License
Master Module software must be activated when prompted after installation or upgrade. If the Software License Activation screen
appears, do the following to perform an Offline Activation. Offline activation requires a separate internet-connected computer and
USB flash drive. You can use the same USB flash drive on which you copied the MasterModuleInstall software.
Do not use the System Restore USB drive! Use a separate USB flash drive.
About Online Activation Online Activation should only be performed while in direct contact with Avid Customer Support.
Offline Activation
Make sure you have the System ID number and software Activation ID (from your S4/S6 product in your Avid account), a installed
the new software, and restarted your system.
To activate Master Module software using offline activation:

1 After the system has restarted, the Software License Activation screen appears. Help text appears in the lower half of the screen.
Figure 4. S6 Software License Activation screen for offline activation
2 Make sure Offline is selected for the Activation Type. If not, tap the selector and choose Offline.
3 On a separate internet-connected computer go to http://www.avid.com/license to see the Software License Activation page.
Figure 5. Software License Activation page
4 Enter the following information, making sure to enter all characters and numbers correctly (fields are not case-sensitive):
• Enter your Activation ID into the Activation ID field. Once entered, a System ID field appears. Press Tab to go to the next field.
• Enter your System ID into the System ID field. Press Tab to go to the next field.
• Enter your Device ID (shown on the S4 Software License Activation screen) into the Device ID field.
When a valid ID number is entered into each field, a green check mark appears. If any characters are incorrect, and until the cor-
rect number of characters has been entered, an error message appears.
• (Optional) Enter the email address associated with your Avid account to receive an email with a copy of your license file.
5 Click Submit, then follow the instructions on-screen to do the following:
• Download the license file to your computer, then transfer the license file to a USB flash drive.
Do not use the System Restore drive. Use a separate USB flash drive (not included), formatted as FAT or FAT32.
• Remove the USB drive from your computer, then insert it into one of the USB ports on the back of the Master Module.

6 On the Master Module touchscreen, tap Activate. A standard Windows Open dialog appears.
7 Navigate the dialog to the USB drive, select the downloaded license file (S6xxx...bin) and tap Open.
After a few moments your software will be activated.
8 After activating your software, if you are prompted to update module firmware after the system restarts do the following:
• In the Settings > Surface page, press Update, then press Update.
If no Update option is displayed either the system hasn't completely booted yet, or a module is selected on that screen. Wait for
the system to finish starting up, and be sure no module is selected on-screen (indicated by a lit rectangle surrounding that module).
• When prompted, confirm the update and then wait until all modules have updated (which can take several minutes). Do not
turn off any modules during this process. The screen displays a message confirming that the update has completed.
9 Proceed to Installing S4/S6 Supporting Software.
Installing S4/S6 Supporting Software

Your Avid Master Account also provides workstation software for Windows and Mac, and S4/S6 documentation. XMON EUCON
is also included in these installers.
Whenever you update Master Module software you must also update workstation software on all connected workstations.
EUCON installs into a default directory for all EUCON devices (including the Control app, Dock, S3, and S6). This lets you co-in-
stall all software for these devices.
After updating Master Module software, do the following:

1 Log in to your Avid Master Account and download EUCON_WorkstationUnifiedInstall software for your workstation (Mac or
Windows), documentation, and other resources from the My Products and Subscriptions section.
You can download these components directly to the workstation(s) you plan to use with S4/S6, or to a USB flash drive.
2 If necessary, insert the USB drive containing the downloaded EUCON_WorkstationUnifiedInstall into a USB port on your
workstation.
Do not use the included System Restore USB drive! Use a separate USB flash drive.
To install WSControl (workstation) software:
3 Double-click EUCON_WorkstationUnifiedInstall, then double-click the installer to launch it.

4 Follow the instructions on-screen (select each option you want to install):
• To only install S4/S6 Workstation software, click to select S4/S6 Workstation.
S4/S6 Workstation
Installing S4 Workstation software
• If you will be using S4/S6 and the Avid Control app simultaneously, select both S3/Dock/Artist/Control and S4/S6 Worksta-
tion. (Other combinations are allowed (such as S4/S6 Workstation and EUCON Workstation software) but once installed
cannot be run simultaneously.)
5 After installation is complete you can configure Workstation Control (aka WSControl) software to auto-launch by clicking the
S4/S6 icon in the Tool bar (Mac) or system tray (Windows) and selecting WSControl from the Auto Launch sub-menu).

To uninstall items:
1 Launch the installer.
Items that are currently installed are selected (checked) and indicated as Installed.
2 Do the following:
• To uninstall specific component, make sure it is not selected (no check mark).
• To uninstall all EUCON applications, select Uninstall all applications.
• To uninstall all User Preferences, select Uninstall User Preferences (your appsets will not be removed).
3 Click Continue (Mac) or Next (Windows).
4 Proceed to Connecting S4/S6 to a Network.
Connecting S4/S6 to a Network

Each S4/S6 module and workstation requires a valid and unique IP address in the same range. This IP address can be created from ei-
ther of the following:
• The DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server in the Master Module
• An external, third-party DHCP device, such as a standalone router
A Windows workstation name with any of the following characters will not be able to connect to S6: / \ [ ] " : ; |< > + = ,? * _ For
more information, visit Microsoft Support Naming Conventions
Make sure you have followed all instructions in Software Activation and installed the latest versions of S6 Workstation software
(Mac and/or Windows) before connecting S4/S6 to your workstations.
Recommended Setup
Since S4/S6 requires substantial bandwidth, and the network timing between modules is critical, we recommend installing S4/S6
and your workstation(s) on an isolated network/subnet using the Master Module’s internal DHCP server.
To connect S6 with your workstation(s) using the Master Module’s internal DHCP server:
1 Connect the Master Module from Ethernet port 2 on its back panel to the supplied Ethernet switch.
Figure 6. Master Module back panel Ethernet ports 1 (left) and 2 (right)
2 Connect all other modules and workstations to the same Ethernet switch. Do not connect any other equipment to this network.
3 Set your workstation network adapters to: Obtain IP addresses automatically by DHCP (default).
If you must connect your workstation to a Wide Area Network (WAN) to access the Internet or a corporate network, we recom-
mend using a workstation with two Ethernet ports.
To connect your workstation to a WAN:

1 Connect one port to the WAN.
2 Connect the other port to the S6 Ethernet switch or to S4.
3 On the workstation that will connect to this S4/S6 system, do either of the following:
•Mac: Click the WSControl icon in the Mac menu bar at the top-right of the screen.
•Windows: Right-click the WSControl icon in the system tray at the bottom-right of the screen.

4 Select Network Setup.
Figure 7. Setting the Desk ID in the Avid S6 WSControl Network Setup dialog
5 If your workstation has multiple networks attached, make sure the Network Interface selected is the one connected to your
S4/S6.
6 If you selected a new Network Interface, click Apply and Relaunch (Mac) or Apply and Restart (Windows) to reboot the
workstation and restart WSControl.
See “Configuring Multiple Systems on One Network” on page 22 to learn how to set the Desk ID for S6 and your
workstations.
The Master Module internal DHCP Server uses the following default settings:
IP Address
Master Module 192.168.2.1
Host(s) 192.168.2.2 to 192.168.2.199
Reserved for 192.168.2.200 to 192.168.2.254

Static use
Advanced Setup
To use a custom setup, you must have networking experience that may require accessing a WAN using a router, or installing the
entire S4/S6 network as part of a corporate network infrastructure.
If you will use a third-party DHCP device, Avid recommends the Cisco RV345 Dual WAN Gigabit VPN Router.
Other routers have not reliably met the timing requirements of the S6 modules.
To connect S4/S6 to a DHCP router or server:

1 Connect the Master Module from Ethernet port 1 on its back panel to the supplied S4/S6 network switch.
2 Connect all other S4/S6 modules to the same switch.
3 Connect the S4/S6 network switch to a LAN port on the third-party DHCP router.
4 Connect your workstation(s) to either the S4/S6 network switch or the LAN ports on the router.
If your workstation has multiple networks attached, make sure the Network Interface selected is the one connected to your S6.
See Configuring Multiple Systems on One Network to learn how to set the Desk ID for S4/S6 and your workstations.
To connect S4/S6 to a corporate network, consult your IT department for guidance.

Managing Network Connections
(Including Multiple, Selectable Network Connections)
The Master Module can be connected to one or two networks simultaneously and choose between them in order to utilize Ethernet
KVM switches, and/or to save Titles, User Preferences, custom Soft Key Appsets, and other S4/S6 data to a WAN.
The following instructions are recommended primarily for single operator systems and basic S6/network configurations. There are
many other options to configure systems without using the internal DHCP server. For more information and advanced configura-
tion instructions, see the document S6 Networking Guidelines, available from the S6 Support article on our Knowledge Base.
This information is updated frequently as more supported workflows are added so check back regularly.
http://avid.force.com/pkb/articles/faq/Avid-S6-Support
Network ports can be configured from the Settings > Surface, Local Options (Network Interface) screen of the Master Module.
These settings make it easier to maintain network connections by letting you do the following:
• Set the Master Module NIC to either static IP or DHCP.
• Specify which static NIC will use the DHCP server.
• Define the IP range the DHCP server will serve.
• Select which NIC is the S4/S6 network if both ports on the Master Module are connected.
Who Should Use These Settings
Do not use these settings if your system is working as expected, or if you do not have advanced network experience.
These settings are for advanced users with prior networking experience only. Incorrect settings could render your system inoper-
able. Consult your IT department for guidance if you are not sure of any of the required settings.
• If you have changed your network settings in any way it is likely that will not need to edit any of these settings.
• If you get a network error, however, use these settings to select the desired configuration.
To connect the Master Module to a different network in addition to the S6 EUCON network:
1 Make sure you are using the internal DHCP server for the S4/S6 Network (Ethernet port 2 on the back of the Master Module).
2 Connect the other port (Ethernet port 1 on the back of the Master Module) to your other network.
3 Navigate to Settings > About, and choose Shut Down. Wait until the Master Module has completely shut down.
4 Start the Master Module by pressing the switch on the top panel, behind the touchscreen (near the Talkback Thru port).
The following message should appear on the Master Module when it restarts.
Multiple Networks message
If it does not, make sure port 1 has a valid network connection and IP address, and restart the Master Module again.
5 Tap to dismiss the message, then go to Settings > Surface and tap the Local Options (gear) icon at the lower right of the screen.
Local Options (gear) icon in Settings > Surface

The Network Interface panel is displayed. The upper (Network Interface) section provides settings for a single S6 network
connection. The lower (Network Interfaces) section provides settings for multiple S4/S6 network connections.
Network Interface settings
6 Choose the correct adapter for the S6 using the Network Interface selector (the topmost settings).
• If the Internal DHCP settings haven’t been changed then this will be the network with 192.168.2.1 address as shown below.
• If the settings have been changed, or if you want to specify settings for the different adapters, continue reading.
Network interface configured for S6
To configure the Network Interface 1 and Network Interface 2 settings for multiple network connections:
1 Tap the Network Interface 1 IP Setting or Network Interface 2 IP Setting selector and choose an available setting.
Network interface selector

Choices include the following:
• Unknown (leave unchanged) Indicates a port that could not be determined at startup, such as if that port was not connected.
• Custom Static IP (leave unchanged) Indicates a port that was set to an IP outside the S4/S6 expected range through the OS.
This method is no longer recommended, and should only be used if for whatever reasons you need to continue using the pre-
viously available (pre-v3.5) method of editing the dhcpsvr.ini file manually.
• IP Address Assigned by External DHCP Server
• Range of supported IP addresses (192.168.2.0 – 192.168.10.3), with a fixed subnet mask of 255.255.255.0.
2 If desired, click to Enable DHCP Server on Interface 1 (or 2).
This setting is only available when you have set a static IP from the fixed range. It is unavailable if the NIC is set to DHCP or
the Custom/Unknown setting.
3 Once the settings are changed, the NICs are updated and then the DHCP server scripts updated. The Database file will be de-
leted and the system will shut down automatically.
4 Wait for the Master Module to completely shut down, and then power cycle the entire S6 system (all modules.
All modules and workstations must be power cycled after making changes to the NIC or DHCP settings. Failure to power cycle all
modules and workstations can result in some or all modules on the wrong network.
Desk ID
It is allowed, though not recommended, to change the Desk ID at the same time as changing other Network Interface settings. If
the Desk ID or selected interface is changed, the system will automatically shut down (the DHCP server/NIC IP change takes pre-
cedence). It is likely that you will have to reselect the interface once the system starts up again and after you power cycle all mod-
ules.
To revert to a single (EUCON) network:

1 Go to Settings > Surface, click the Network Interface selector, and choose First Available.
This selects which NIC is the S4/S6 network if both ports on the Master Module are connected.
Network Interface configured for just S6 (EUCON) network
2 Remove the network cable from Master Module port 1, then restart S4/S6.
If you remove the cable without restarting, the next time the system is restarted a warning message is displayed. Follow the
on-screen instructions to reset the Network Interface to First Available and restart.

Starting Up and Shutting Down the System
This section describes how to start up and shut down the system. If it is the first time you are starting up the system, be sure to follow
the instruction in Starting Up the System for the First Time.
Starting Up the System

To start up the system:
1 Do the following:
• S6: Make sure you have connected the S6 Power Strip to a UPS, power conditioner, or other switchable power source, then
turn on power to S6 from the power device.
• S4: Make sure you have connected S4 to a power source using one of the included IEC power cables, then turn on the S4 by
putting its back panel Power switch to the On position.
2 When the system is fully started, follow any instructions that appear on-screen to update firmware, or to activate your software
license. (For more information, see Software Activation).
3 Proceed to Configuring S4/S6 the First Time.
Shutting Down
Never power down the system while the Master Module is running. Always shut down the Master Module first.
To shut down the system:

1 Navigate the touchscreen to the Settings > About page and press Shut Down. Wait until the Master Module stops running.
Always shut down the Master Module before powering down the system!
2 Either press the round Power switch behind the touchscreen, or turn off power at the source device supplying power to the S6
Power Strip (UPS, power conditioner or other), or turn off S4 using its back panel Power switch.
LED Indication of Module Power and Connection Status on System Startup

After you have updated and activated system software and configured the surface (as described in Configuring S4/S6 the First
Time), specific switch LEDs indicate power and connection status for each module while the Master Module starts up. Use this sta-
tus indication to see whether a module belongs to a system or needs to be unclaimed before it can be attached to another system.
Power and Connection Status LEDs
Module Switch LED
Fader Modules Track Color, strip 1
Process Modules Back switch, strip 1
Knob Module Back switch, strip 1
Channel Strip Module (S4 Only) Track Color and Back switch, strip 1
Automation Module Track Color switch (Attention fader)
Master Module Back switch (lower left)
Master Joystick Module Back switch (lower left)
Master Post Module Track Color switch, strip 1
• When lit purple during system start up, the module is ready to use. This will only be the case after you have configured the surface
as described in Configuring S4/S6 the First Time.
• If lit yellow/orange, the module is powered but not claimed in the current Surface Configuration.
• Once the Master Module completes its startup, LEDs for all claimed modules clear. On unclaimed modules, the LED lights in
addition to the standard LED indicators for an unclaimed module.

Configuring S4/S6 the First Time
You must first assemble and connect your system according to the procedures in the Installation Guide. You must also install and
activate Master Module Software before configuring the surface. See Starting Up the System for the First Time.
This section shows you how to do the following:

• Configure your surface modules using the Surface page on the Master Module touchscreen
• Connect S4/S6 to your workstation(s) using the Workstation page on the touchscreen
• Enable EUCON connectivity in your audio application
Configuring the Surface

After installing or rearranging modules you must configure your surface using the Master Module Settings > Surface page.
To configure your surface:

1 Access the Settings pages by doing either of the following:
• Press the Settings switch on the Master Module.
WS Layout All Mon A

Mode
Tracks Type Flip Mon B
L Spill R Spill Clear Coms

Clip Setup
Mixer Close Clear Talk

Solo
Home End Setup

Display 1
Mon
Insert
Display 2
Alt 1
Spkrs
Settings
Sel
Alt 2
Spkrs
In Setup
Shift
Config
Main Dim Cut
Spkrs
Figure 8. Settings switch on the Master Module
2 Touch Surface along the top of the Settings screen to open the Surface page.
Figure 9. Top of Settings screen
3 Touch Config at the bottom-left of the Surface screen.

4 Touch Surface at the bottom-left of the screen.
Figure 10. Surface button in Config screen
Back, Next, Undo, Cancel, Clear, and Cancel appear at the bottom of the touchscreen during this process. The instructions refer
to touching these controls but you can also press their Master Module Main Menu switches below them.
After completing the instructions in this section, you can use the Expand command to designate Attention Expand modules.

5 Select your Frame Width and Frame Depth using their drop-down selectors.
• Select your Frame Width (the number of chassis assembled to form the system Frame).
• S6 Only: Select your Frame Depth. Select 4 if your frame uses Frame Chassis Small (supports one Knob Module per chassis)
and 5 if Frame Chassis Large (supports two Knob Modules per chassis).
Figure 11. Setting Frame Size in the Settings > Surface page (S6 shown)
Helpful instructions appear in the Info area at the bottom of the screen.
6 Touch Next at the bottom-left to continue to the Modules page.
Figure 12. Modules (S6 shown)

At the top of the screen, allowable module arrangements appear in columns. There are multiple pages of these columns, available
by swiping them to the left or right.
• Swipe the displayed module stacks to the left to show the available arrangements for modules. Available arrangements differ
for S4 and S6.
Figure 13. Columns of standard modules (left) and one example of other columns showing Expand Zones/Master Joystick Modules (right)
7 Drag module stacks to the frame diagram until it matches your physical arrangement of modules. To see additional stacks, swipe
the displayed stacks to the left (swipe to the right to return).
• To replace an existing module, drag a new module stack into that slot.
• To remove a module from your frame, drag the empty stack into that slot.
Figure 14. Surface modules in frame (S6 shown)
8 Touch Next to continue.

All controls on the surface illuminate. If the controls do not light, check your connections made during installation.
9 To confirm that the module flashing in the Surface page is connected and correctly positioned, touch or press any physical control
on that module. Its lights turn off, and the next module flashes. If a module’s lights do not turn off, check your assignments in the
Settings > Surface page. Touch Undo if you touch the wrong module.

10 When all modules are confirmed, touch Next.
Figure 15 shows all modules confirmed for an S6 configuration except the Knob Modules on the far right, which are light gray.
Figure 15. Confirming modules
11 Do either of the following:

• If you do not have Display Modules to assign, touch Done to accept the new arrangement and complete the process.
• If your system does include Display Modules, drag each numbered Display Module icon to the frame diagram so it matches
the number shown on the physical Display Module.
Figure 16. Assigning Display Modules
• To designate a Display Module as a Master Meter Module, drag a numbered Display Module onto an empty chassis or Options
chassis (such as an S4 chassis with an optional Attention Knob module but no faders).
You can have up to two Master Meter Modules on S6 systems, and a single Master Meter Module on S4 systems. You can des-
ignate existing Display Modules to be Master Meter Modules at any time after initial configuration by returning to Settings >
Surface, Config, then pressing Display and following the on-screen instructions.
12 When you are done, touch Next.

13 Touch Done to accept the new arrangement and complete the process.
Figure 17. Finished Surface Arrangement (S6 shown at left, S4 shown at right
Configuring Multiple Systems on One Network
Multiple S4/S6 systems can operate on one network, but each system and the workstation that controls it must be able to identify each
other. The Desk ID Surface option lets you assign a unique number for this S4/S6 surface. You then assign that same number to the
workstation that will control that S4/S6.
If your installation has just one S4/S6 system on a network, leave the Desk ID set to its default value of 1.
To set a unique Desk ID:

1 Touch the Local Options icon at the bottom-right of the Surface page. The Surface options open; Desk ID is the only entry.
Figure 18. Local Options icon (left) and Desk ID slider (right)
2 Drag the slider to set the desired number, which displays to the right of it.
A message box (outlined in yellow) appears at the top of the touchscreen to inform you that the Master Module must restart to
enact this change. Touching Cancel avoids restarting and leaves Desk ID with its previous setting.
When the Master Module reboots, the previous arrangement is cleared and you must create a new one.
3 On the workstation(s) that will connect to this S4/S6 system, make sure you have installed Workstation software, then do the fol-
lowing:
•Mac: Click the WSControl icon in the Mac menu bar at the top-right of the screen.
– or –
•Windows: Right-click the WSControl icon in the system tray at the bottom-right of the screen.
• Select Network Setup.

4 In the WSControl Network Setup dialog, set the Desk ID to the same number as in step 1.
Figure 19. Setting the Desk ID in the WSControl Network Setup dialog
5 If your workstation has multiple networks attached, make sure the Network Interface selected is the one connected to your
S4/S6.
6 If you only changed the Desk ID, click Apply to restart WSControl.
7 If you changed the Network Interface, click Apply and Relaunch (Mac) or Apply and Restart (Windows) to reboot the work-
station and restart WSControl.
Connecting S4/S6 to Workstations

In order to control an audio application with S4/S6, you must first install Mac or Windows Workstation software on the desired
computer. Then you connect that workstation to S4/S6 using the Settings > Workstations page.
For instructions to install Workstation software, see the What’s New in SS4/6 Software.pdf that accompanies all Master Module
software downloads.
Multiple workstations can be connected to S4/S6 at once, but only one is attentioned (or focused) at a time. The attentioned work-
station has exclusive focus of the S4/S6 surface. A workstation can be selected but not attentioned so you can derive information
about the workstation, its applications, and EUCON version. Custom names can be assigned to connected workstations. When mul-
tiple workstations are connected, you can choose to Show Workstation Number on S4/S6 displays (the number corresponds to
the order in which Workstations appear in the Connected list of Settings > Workstation).
To connect a workstation to S4/S6:

1 Navigate to the Workstations page by doing either of the following:
• On the Master Module, press Settings and then touch Workstations at the top of the Settings screen.
• Or press Shift + WS (hold down Shift and press WS).
The Workstations screen appears, with the Network column on the left and the Connected column on the right.
Figure 20. Top of Settings > Workstations page
2 Drag a workstation from the Network list over to a slot in the Connected list.
• The workstation name appears in the Connected slot, flashes as it connects, and then appears solid when it connects.
• The focused application (top-most application on that workstation) is listed on the lower right.
• If a previous workstation was connected to that slot, it is disconnected.
• The workstation is selected and attentioned, which is indicated by an orange (upper half) and blue (lower half) rectangular outline.

In Figure 21, the workstation in the Connected list is selected and attentioned, and Pro Tools is the focused application. (Note
that EUCON must be enabled within Pro Tools before it can connect, as explained in Enabling EUCON Connectivity).
Figure 21. Connected workstation
To connect additional workstations:
 Drag additional workstations from the Network list to the Connected list.
To change the attentioned workstation:
 Touch a workstation in the Connected list without a blue outline. In Figure 22, GW-TEST1-HP is attentioned (blue outline).
To select a workstation to display its information at the bottom of the page:
 Touch its entry in the Network list. In Figure 22, GWMAC-2-Mac-Pro is selected (orange outline).
To enter a custom name for a workstation:

1 Tap the Local Options (gear) icon at the bottom right of the Workstation page and make sure the setting Show Custom Name
in Available List is enabled.
2 Double-tap the blank area at the top of the Connected box for that workstation, then enter a name using the on-screen keyboard.
1
2
Figure 22. Attentioned workstation(1), selected workstation (2), and Info area (3)

Workstation Status
Connected A connected workstation is indicated by a gray rectangle (see Figure 23).
Offline A connected workstation can become offline if WSControl was shut down properly on that workstation (indicated by a red
rectangle as shown in Figure 24).
Unreachable A connected workstation can become unreachable if the workstation or WSControl crashed, or the workstation’s
Ethernet cable was disconnected (indicated with the “unreachable” icon shown in Figure 25).
Network Connection Interrupt A connection to a workstation is experiencing either a dropped network packet, CPU or memory
overload (indicated with the “interrupt” icon shown in Figure 26). Press the Graphs option at the bottom of the screen to see the
issue.
Figure 23. Workstation connected
Figure 24. Workstation offline
Figure 25. Workstation unreachable
Figure 26. Workstation network connection interrupted
Show Workstation Alerts

S4/S6 can alert you to network errors, should they occur. These alert messages can help identify network problems (without having
to look through log files) and give you the opportunity to minimize any possible problems by restarting the S4/S6.
Workstation Alerts are enabled by default, but you can disable them in the Workstation section of Settings > System.
When enabled, any Workstation Alert messages appear only once and can be easily dismissed, letting you decide whether you want
to continue or restart.

Progress Indicators for Session Load and Workstation Connect
Progress indicators appear on the touchscreen when loading sessions and connecting to workstations. The Workstation page also
provides status graphs to monitor system activity.
System Status Graphs
The Settings > Workstations page provides a Graphs button, which lets you see status and data for CPU, Memory, and Network
activity. Network errors are also logged. Whenever the system detects a network interrupt, the status graphs are outlined in orange.
To see Status graphs for Workstations:

1 Navigate to Settings > Workstations, then tap Graphs (or press its Soft Key).
2 Tap to select a different Workstation (if available) to see graphs for that workstation.
Figure 27. Workstations > Graphs display
3 To exit, tap Info or navigate to any other page.
Enabling EUCON Connectivity

You must enable EUCON connectivity in your audio application to work with S4/S6. The following instructions show how to en-
able EUCON in Pro Tools. (For other applications, refer to its documentation.)
To enable EUCON connectivity in Pro Tools:

1 Make sure you have connected S4/S6 to your Pro Tools computer via Ethernet as explained in Connecting S4/S6 to a Net-
work.
2 Launch Pro Tools, choose Setup > Peripherals, and click the Ethernet Controllers page.
3 Select Enable EUCON.
Figure 28. Pro Tools Setup > Peripherals > Ethernet Controllers
4 Click OK. After a quick scan, S6 is ready to use with Pro Tools. You do not need to configure any other settings.
5 Connect the workstation running Pro Tools to S6. If you did not yet connect it, see Connecting S4/S6 to Workstations.
6 Open a Pro Tools session if one is not already open.
7 Click in any Pro Tools window to bring it into focus.
8 Verify that the Mix window displays a blue border around Pro Tools track names, and that S4/S6 shows track names and other session
data.
Do not disable EUCON in Pro Tools while a surface is connected.

Control App Compatibility
You can use the free Pro Tools | Control app for iPad simultaneously with S4/S6, letting you control Pro Tools (or other compatible
DAWs) without having to leave the couch. When used with S4/S6, only one instance of the Control app can be added to the
My Surfaces list in the Settings tab of EuControl. Other EuControl devices (S3, Dock, or Artist Series) can be added only when
S4/S6 is not attached to that workstation.
To install the Pro Tools | Control app:

1 On your iPad, open the App Store.
2 In the Search box, enter “Pro Tools Control” then tap Search, locate the app on-screen, tap Get, then tap Install.
3 When installation is complete, tap Open.
4 Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the registration process and log in to your Master Avid account (required for ob-
taining EuControl software and other resources).
5 Once you have registered using the Control app, on your workstation visit www.avid.com/account, log into your Avid ac-
count (or create one; it’s free) and download the EUCON_WorkstationUnifiedInstall Installer for your workstation’s operating
system (Mac or Windows). While in your Avid account, be sure to also download the Pro Tools | Control.pdf.
6 After the download is complete, double-click the EUCON_WorkstationUnifiedInstall.dmg to extract it, then double-click the
installer to launch it.
7 Follow the instructions on-screen (select each option to install). For a description of each option, click to select it (Mac) or
hover the mouse over it (Windows).
Installing S4/S6 Workstation and EuControl software
• If you will be using S4/S6 and the Control app simultaneously, select both S3/Dock/Artist/Control and S4/S6 Workstation.
8 Follow the instructions in the Pro Tools | Control.pdf to configure EuControl software:
• After installing EuControl software on your workstation, go to the Surfaces tab in EuControl Settings to add
Pro Tools | Control to your My Surfaces list.
• While an S4/S6 is also connected to that workstation (via Settings > Workstation) you cannot attach an S3, Dock, or any Art-
ist Series media controller in EuControl.
• Use the Auto Launch commands to configure how you want EuControl (for Pro Tools | Control), WSControl (for S4/S6),
MTRX (for Pro Tools | MTRX), and XMON to launch. These commands are available from the EuControl and S4/S6 icons
in the Tool Bar (Mac) and System Tray (Windows).
About EuControl and S4/S6 Preferences When the Control app and S6 are simultaneously connected to a workstation, Preference
settings in EuControl are ignored (only S6 settings apply). Conversely, when only the Control app (and/or S3, Dock or Artist Se-
ries) is connected but S6 is not connected to the workstation, only EuControl Preference settings apply.

Part III: Touchscreen
Chapter 3: Master Module Screens
There are four primary Master Module screens: Home, Tracks, Monitoring, and Settings.
The Master Module screens are navigated and controlled using standard touch gestures. To learn more, see Appendix C,
“Touchscreen Basics.”
Home Screen Lets you select and edit Attention Track functions. Includes the Track and Meter Scrollers.
Parts of the Home screen may appear blank without an Attention Track assigned.
Tracks Screen Lets you quickly select tracks, attention a track to the Home screen, create and recall Layouts, and enable track re-
cord, input, mute, and solo functions. Displays categorized and color-coded tracks in the Track Matrix (if supported by the audio
application).
Monitoring Screen Lets you assign monitor controls, name speakers and name monitor labels.
Settings Screen Let you set up the control surface, manage workstations, create and edit Soft Keys, and set System and User Pref-
erences. The About page displays software version information and lets you activate your software license, Logout and Shutdown.
Figure 29. The four Master Module Screens: Home, Tracks, Monitoring, and Settings
To display the Home screen from any other screen:
 Press Home (5 on left of Figure 30) on the Master Module.
To display other Screens from the Home screen:
 Touch Tracks, Meters, Monitoring, or Settings or press their corresponding Main Menu switches.
Chapter 3: Master Module Screens 29

Chapter 4: Home Screen
The Home screen provides the following main sections:
Meter Scroller Displays track metering and other information, assists track navigation, and can attention tracks.
Track Scroller Displays status indicators for each track, assists track navigation, and can select and attention tracks.
Attention Track Editor Central area for selecting and editing Attention Track functions.
Sel Sel
In In
Sel Sel
In In
Sel Sel
In In
Sel Sel
In In
5 6
Home Swap Config
Figure 30. Home screen
1 - Meter Scroller 2 - Attention Track Editor
3 - Attention Track Knobs 4 - Track Scroller
5 - Home Switch 6 - Back Switch
To display the Home screen from any other screen:
 Press Home (5 in Figure 30) on the Master Module.
To display other Screens from the Home screen:
 Touch Tracks, Meters, Monitoring, or Settings or press their corresponding Main Menu switches.
Meters is only available when one or more Master Meter Modules are present.
Chapter 4: Home Screen 30

The Attention Track Editor
In the Attention Track Editor, you select a function from the Function Scroller to display and edit in the Function Editor using the
Attention Track Knobs. Each function has its own color so their parameters are easy to distinguish.
Function Scroller
Figure 31. Attention Track Editor with Function Scroller
Function Colors
S4/S6 displays different functions in unique colors, shown in the table, below. These colors are displayed in the Attention Track
Editor, Function Scroller, and on knobs in channel strips.
Switch Parameter Color Additional
Input Input Red Red
Ins Inserts Teal Teal S6 Only: Press and hold Ins to access HEAT (Pro Tools)
Dyn Dynamics Green Green
EQ EQ Magenta Magenta
User Instrument Blue Blue To access virtual instrument parameters
Sends Sends Yellow Yellow
Pan Pan Blue Dark Blue
Bus Output Orange Orange On VCA Masters, spills level for VCA members
HEAT HEAT Pink Pink
When more than one plug-in of the same type or category is inserted on a single track, the Master Module knobs light in slightly
different colors to differentiate plug-in controls. For example, multiple EQ plug-ins are shown in different shades of magenta.

Function Scroller
The Function Scroller shows the Attention Track functions.
While the selected function’s parameters take precedence, the Function Editor can display parameters from additional functions,
depending on the number of parameters and a preference setting. You can also set default function views and knob focus for the
Home screen (see Home Screen Options).
You can select one function at a time to edit in the Function Editor.
Figure 32. Function Scroller with Pan selected
To select a function from the Function Scroller to edit in the Function Editor:
 Touch a function in the Function Scroller.

The selected function has an orange outline.
Function Editor
The Function Editor can display up to eight columns of eight parameters each. The four parameters in the top or bottom half of each
column can be assigned to the left or right Attention Track Knobs.
Figure 33. Function Editor

Assigning New Parameters to the Attention Track Knobs
The left and right Attention Track Knobs can each control four parameters from any single function.
You can assign different function parameters to the left and right Attention Track Knobs (see Locking the Knobs).
To assign a new bank of four parameters to the Attention Track Knobs:

1 Touch a function in the Function Scroller.
2 Touch a group of four parameters in the Function Editor. Two brackets flash slowly around the selected parameters.
3 Before the brackets stop flashing, touch or turn any Attention Track Knob. The four selected parameters are assigned to that
side’s Attention Track Knobs, and the Function Editor provides the following visual feedback:
• The parameter name, knob state, and value appear beside each Attention Track Knob.
• A left bracket (green in Figure 33) indicates the parameters to its right are assigned to the left Attention Track Knobs.
• A right bracket (purple in Figure 33) indicates the parameters to its left are assigned to the right Attention Track Knobs.
Using Page Switches to Navigate Attention Track Knobs

When the Master Module Shift switch is held down, you can use the four switches at the bottom left and right of the touchscreen
to page functions and focus the touchscreen knobs on different parameters. A focused knob group can page even if the knobs are
locked. When in Page mode, the switch LEDs light purple.
Home Swap Config
WS Layout All Mon A

Mode
L Spill R Spill Clear Coms

Clip Setup

Solo
Home End Setup

Display 1
Mon
Insert
Display 2
Alt 1
Spkrs
Settings
Sel
Alt 2
Spkrs
In Setup
Shift
Config
Main Dim Cut
Spkrs
Figure 34. Shift and Page switches on the Master Module
When in Page mode:

• The Home and Swap switches assign the Left knobs to their previous or next pages, respectively.
• The Back ( )and Config switches assign Right knobs to their previous or next pages, respectively.
• If the Left and Right knobs are from the same function, each set of Page switches operates on both knob groups.
Using the Attention Track Knobs

Each Attention Track Knob section provides a dual-function knob with In and Sel switches, and automation indicator LEDs. The
knob lights when active, and in certain contexts it can also be pushed.
1 2
Attention Track Knob (2) with Sel and In switches (1)
In Toggles a parameter in and out, or between two values (as available in the current application); it lights when active.
Sel Toggles the knob function or a secondary parameter value (such as Q and Frequency for an EQ plug-in).

Function Editor Knob Types
Four virtual knob types are used to represent different kinds of parameters in the Function Editor. Figure 35 shows an EQ plug-in
that demonstrates each type.
1 – Typically represents Q but can be used for other parameters that pertain to width. This knob type has two white marks at each
end that move symmetrically as Q changes.
2 – Typically represents parametric filter gain but can be used for other parameters that boost and cut level from a center position.
This knob type has an outer ring that moves right or left from the top-center as the parameter boosts or cuts; its white mark shows
the level of boost or cut.
3 – This knob type does not have an outer ring. The white mark denotes position within a range of values not level.
4 – This knob type has an outer ring, which emphasizes that the white mark denotes level not position.
Figure 35. Knob types used in the Function Editor
Locking the Knobs
When a new function is selected in the Function Scroller, its first parameter bank is assigned to the Attention Track Knobs. You
can prevent this by locking the Attention Track Knobs (left, right, or both) to their current parameters (see Figure 36).
Locked knobs are maintained per track. Attentioning different tracks and returning to a track with locked knobs restores the locked
assignments.
Figure 36. The right Attention Track Knobs are locked

To lock the Attention Track Knobs:
 Touch an unlit Lock icon (above the Attention Track knob indicators in the Function Editor). The Lock icon lights, and selecting
new functions will not change these knob assignments.
To unlock the Attention Track Knobs:
 Touch a lit Lock icon. The Lock icon dims, and selecting new functions will change these knob assignments.
If both the left and right Attention Track Knobs are locked, touching blocks of parameters in the Function Editor will not activate
the brackets used for knob reassignment.
Functions with Additional Editing Features

The EQ, Dyn, Pan, Inserts, and Fader functions have additional features.
EQ, Dyn, and Pan

 Drag EQ, Dyn, or Pan down into the Function Editor to display them graphically.
• You can touch Pan and drag its indicator(s) with one or two fingers, depending on the pan format.
• You cannot touch to edit the EQ or Dyn curves, but you can get graphical feedback as you adjust the Attention Track Knobs.
Graphs can be displayed for a variable length of time. For more information, see Expand Knob and Expand Fader Function
Settings.
EQ (left), Dyn (center), and Pan (right) graphs in the Function Editor
Inserts
Plug-in inserts can collapse into one Inserts function or expand to individual plug-ins in the Function Scroller.
For an overview of touchscreen gestures used in the following instructions, see Appendix C, “Touchscreen Basics”
To expand collapsed plug-in inserts, do either of the following:
 Use the two-finger stretch gesture anywhere in the Function Scroller.

 Select Inserts from the Function Scroller, and press the Attention Track Knob beside the plug-in you want to edit.
To collapse expanded plug-in inserts:
 Use the two-finger pinch gesture anywhere in the Function Scroller.
Function Scroller with Inserts collapsed (left) and expanded (right)

Fader
The Fader function shows the fader position of the Attention Track, and provides the following indicators (top to bottom):
Record Lights or flashes red to indicate record enable or record status (depends on audio application)
Input Lights green
Solo Lights yellow
Mute Lights orange
Meter Scroller and Track Scroller

The Meter Scroller displays detailed metering, and the Track Scroller provides status information for each track. You can attention
a track from the Meter or Track Scroller.
To scroll the Track and Meter Scrollers by swiping:
 Swipe the meters or tracks horizontally.

• Swiping scrolls at a speed proportional to the speed swiped, then gradually slows down.
• Touching while scrolling stops scrolling at that point, but does not attention the track.
Both the Meter and Track Scrollers use the Universe View. The Universe bar is the rectangular scroll indicator (see Figure 38).
To scroll using the Universe View:
 Touch in the Universe View to scroll to that location.

• In the Track Scroller, you can touch a colored indicator in the Universe View to scroll to that track group (if supported by the
audio application).
• The size of the Universe bar is inversely proportional to the number of tracks in the focused audio application.
Universe View Indication of Currently Attentioned Track

Whenever a currently attentioned track is scrolled out of view on the Master Module (Universe, Meter, or Track scrollers), a blue
box appears in the Universe strip.
Indication of currently attentioned track in Universe view
When the currently attentioned track is within the currently scrolled view, the blue box is not shown (attention is indicated in the
Track and Strip scrollers).
Linking the Meter Scroller to the Track Scroller
You can link the scrollers so they respond in unison to scrolling. Note that linking also affects optional display of Track and/or
Workstation numbers in the Meter Scroller. See Link Meter Scroller to Track Scroller.

Meter Scroller
The Meter Scroller uses the following indicators:
• The Attention Track has a blue outline.
• Selected tracks can have an orange outline (see Home Screen Options).
• A selected Attention Track has an orange (top half) and blue (lower half) outline.
• Tracks that are record enabled or are actively recording flash or light solid red in Pro Tools (depends on audio application).
Figure 37. Meter Scroller with Universe bar; Audio 6 is the Attention Track
Track Scroller
The Track Scroller uses the following indicators:
• The Attention Track has a blue outline.
• Selected tracks have an orange outline.
• A selected Attention Track has an orange (top half) and blue (lower half) outline.
• Tracks that are record enabled or are actively recording flash or light solid red in Pro Tools (depends on audio application).
• Each track has a small level meter.
• Tracks dim when muted.
Figure 38. Track Scroller with Universe bar; Bass is record enabled, muted, and attentioned
The top of each track provides the following indicators (left to right):
Record Tracks that are record enabled or are actively recording flash or light solid red in Pro Tools (depends on audio application).
Input Lights green
Solo Lights yellow
Mute Lights orange
Attentioning a Track From the Meter and Track Scrollers

To attention a track from the Meter and Track Scrollers:
• Tap a track or meter.
The track is assigned to the Attention Track Editor and the Attention Track Fader on the Automation Module.
See Home Screen Options to enable parameters that interact with the Meter Scroller.

Home Screen Options
To open the Home Screen Options:
 Touch the Local Options icon on the bottom-right of the Home screen (see Figure 39).
To close it, touch the Local Options icon again or touch outside the Home Screen Options page.
Figure 39. Home Screen Options with Local Options icon on the right
Attention Tracks from Meter Scroller

This option toggles whether or not a track can be attentioned from the Meter Scroller.
Display Selection/Attentioned Track Border on Meter Scroller

This option lets you toggle whether or not selected and attentioned tracks are outlined in the Meter Scroller.
Track Scroller Follows Attentioned Track

The Track Scroller shows the Attention Track at its left border.

Link Meter Scroller to Track Scroller
Scrolling the Track Scroller scrolls the Meter Scroller so they show the same track, and vice versa.
In addition, this setting controls whether Track and/or Workstation numbers are shown in track blocks in the Meter Scroller.
• When enabled/linked, track blocks in the Meter Scroller do not show Track and/or Workstation number (even if Show Track
Number and/or Show Workstation Number are enabled in Settings > User).
• When disabled/unlinked, track blocks in the Meter Scroller show Track or Workstation number (when those settings are en-
abled).
Knob View
All Functions The Function Editor displays all functions. Swiping the Function Editor horizontally scrolls to other functions.
Selected Function The Function Editor displays just the selected function.
Enable Expand Knob Zone

Toggles the Attention Expand Knob Zone (if any) on or off. Being able to toggle Expand Knob Zones on or off lets you quickly
place Knob Modules into whichever mode (Attention Expand or standard mode) best suits the current task, without having to re-
configure the Surface page. For more information, see Attention Expand Zones.
Enable Expand Fader Zone

Toggles the Attention Expand Fader Zone (if any) on or off. When the Expand Fader Zone is toggled off, the Fader Module con-
tinues to show volume, pan, or other track parameters when their corresponding Knob Module is in use as an Expand Knob Zone.
When the Expand Fader Zone is toggled on you are able to map custom parameters to strips on the Expand Fader Zone, and store
the mappings for later recall. (Note that you can only recall existing Expand Fader maps; you cannot create fader maps from the
Home Screen Local Options.) For more information, see Attention Expand Zones.
Open Windows on Workstation When Knobs Assigned

The new Home screen Local Options setting Open Windows on Workstation When Knobs Assigned option lets you restrict the
opening of plug-in windows to actions taken on a specific module.
• Attentioning a track opens the plug-in window that corresponds to the Primary or Backup Function for that module.
• Manually or automatically assigning a plug-in or its parameters to controls on the selected module (only) opens the corre-
sponding plug-in window.
To optimize plug-in window display for S6:

1 Go to Settings > User, and make sure Open Windows on Workstation When Editing Mode is enabled.
• When enabled, plug-in windows open when selecting a plug-in function from a strip (Process Module), or from the module
specified in the Open Plug-Ins on Workstation When Knobs Assigned selector.
• When disabled, plug-in windows do not open in response to any S6 actions.
2 Navigate to the Home screen, then open the Local Options page (tap the gear icon).
3 Tap the Open Plug-Ins on Workstation When Knobs Assigned selector and choose one of the following:
• Off
• Master Module
• Expand Fader Module
• 1st Expand Knob Module
• 2nd Expand Knob Module

Expand Knob and Expand Fader Function Settings
The Home screen Local Options settings for Expand Knob Function and Backup Function Selected on Attention Change let you
configure functions to display on Attention Expand Knob Zones when a track is attentioned. Two pairs of selectors set primary and
backup functions for each of up to two Knob Modules. A similar pair of selectors is available for Expand Fader Function and
Backup Function Selected on Attention Change (Expand Fader Zones are available on S6 only).
The Display Knobs From Most Recently Clicked DAW Area setting lets you specify where you want clicked DAW controls to
appear (such as only on the Master Module, on an Expand Knob Module, or on both the Master and Expand Fader).
Beginning with Master Module software 19.7, Expand Modules use the Primary and Backup Functions when clicked DAW con-
trols do not have a corresponding knob type (such as clicking on Track Name or in the timeline). In addition to extending the use-
fulness of the Primary and Backup Function settings, this also prevents Attention Expand Zones from going blank in certain atten-
tion-via-click scenarios.
S6 M40/Master Module Universal-based systems support up to two Attention Expand Knob zones and one Attention Expand
Fader Zone. S6 M10 and M10 Plus systems support a single Attention Expand Knob zone and one Attention Expand Fader Zone.
S4 systems support up to two Attention Expand Knob Zones but do not support Attention Expand Fader Zones. All systems sup-
port a single strip Expand Fader zone.
To configure Expand Knob and Expand Fader function preferences:

1 Navigate to the Home Screen, then tap its Local Options (gear) icon.
Two sets of selectors (1st and 2nd Expand Knob Function....) are provided for Expand Knob functions, which correspond to
Knob Modules configured as Expand Knobs in Settings > Surface. One set of selectors is provided for Expand Fader Function
and Backup Function Selected on Attention Change.
The left selector sets the primary function, and the selector to the right sets the backup function for the corresponding module.
2 Tap to display the first (left-most) drop down menu for the desired zone (Knob or Fader).
• To keep the Expand zone focused on the most recently edited function, choose Last Selected.
• To specify a function, select a function such as EQ, or an Insert slot (1–10). Not all functions are available in all applications.
3 Repeat for the second (right-most) “backup” drop down menu. This lets you define a function to display whenever you attention
a track that does not contain the same function as the previously attentioned track.
4 Repeat for the second Expand Knob module, if any, or for Expand Fader Zones.
Function and Knob Page on Attention Change Settings

The Home screen Local Options settings for Function and Knob Page Selected on Attention Change let you configure which
function and page of controls the Home screen displays when a track is attentioned.
To configure default Home screen function and knob page settings:

1 Tap to display the first (left-most) drop down menu for Function and Knob Page Selected on Attention Change.
• To keep the Home screen focused on the most recently edited function, choose Last Selected.
• To specify a function, select a function such as EQ, or an Insert slot (1–10). Not all functions are available in all applications.
2 Tap to display the second (right-most) drop down menu.
• To have the Attention Track knobs maintain their current or previous focus, choose Last Selected.
• To specify a page of knobs to be focused, choose a page (such as 1st, 2nd, and so on).

In Figure 40, below, the settings for Function and Knob Page are EQ and 2nd, respectively. When a track is attentioned, the
Home screen displays the EQ function with the Assignable Track knobs focused on page 2 of EQ controls.
Figure 40. Home screen showing default function (EQ) and Knob Page (2nd) as defined in Home screen Local Options (shown at right)
Backup Function and Knob Page Settings
These settings let you define a default function view and knob focus to display whenever you attention a track that does not contain
the same function as the previously attentioned track.
To configure backup function and knob page view settings:

1 Navigate to the Home screen and tap the Local Options (gear) icon.
2 Tap to display the first (left-most) drop down menu for Backup Function and Knob Page Selected on Attention Change.
• To have the Home screen stay focused on whichever function was most recently edited, choose Last Selected.
• To specify a function, select a function such as Pan, Bus, EQ, or Dynamics from the drop down menu.
3 To specify a knob page to be automatically focused when that function is displayed, tap to select a page from the second
(right-most) drop down menu.
• To have the Attention Track knobs maintain their previous focus, choose Last Selected.
• To specify a page of knobs to be focused, choose a page (such as 1st, 2nd, and so on).
Auto Show Function Graph on Selection

When enabled, attentioning a track automatically shows the EQ, Dyn, or Pan graph for that track on the touchscreen.
Auto Show Function Graph on Knob Touch

When set to any value other than 0 secs (Off), adjusting a function that has a graph display automatically displays the graph in the
Home screen, temporarily replacing the current view. The graph stays on-screen after you let go of the knob for the length of time
specified in the Auto Show Function Graph on Knob Touch slider (between 0.0 and 5.0 seconds).

Chapter 5: Tracks Screen
The Tracks screen lets you:

• Display different track types (if supported by your audio application).
• Select tracks, and Attention tracks to the Home screen and Attention Track Fader.
• Enable record, input, solo, and mute, and assign tracks to Layouts.
Figure 41. Tracks screen
1 - Track Matrix
2 - Attention, Select, Assign, Record, Input, Solo, and Mute controls
3 - Universe view, Track Scroller and Local Options icon
Chapter 5: Tracks Screen 42

Displaying Tracks
If your audio application supports track types, you can choose which types to display in the Track Matrix.
To change the track type displayed:
 Touch a track type from the tabs at the top of the Tracks screen. Only tracks of the chosen type are displayed. You can also swipe
the Track Matrix horizontally to scroll between track types.
If your audio application also supports track colors, you can configure the Track Matrix to display track rows by color as shown
in Figure 41 (for more information, see Display Breaks On Track Color).
Displaying Hidden Tracks

If your audio application supports hidden tracks, you can choose whether or not they are shown on the S4/S6 surface and touch-
screen. Display of hidden tracks can be configured separately for the Banking, Layouts, and VCAs modes in the Settings > User.
For more information, see Bank Around Locked Strips.
Track Matrix Controls

The Attention, Select, Assign, Record, Input, Solo, and Mute controls (2 in Figure 41) are exclusive: One is always active, and
only one can be active at a time.
Attention
To attention a track:
 Touch Attention, then touch a track.

• This track is assigned to the Attention Track Editor and the Automation Module’s Attention Track Fader.
• If the Tracks screen Local Option setting Show Home Screen on Track Attention is enabled, the Home screen is shown.
• The Attention Track has a blue outline in the Track Matrix, Track Scroller, and Meter Scroller.
A selected Attention Track has an orange (top half) and blue (lower half) outline.
Select, Assign, Record, Solo, Input, and Mute

To select tracks or enable them for recording, input, mute, or solo:
1 Touch Select, Record, Solo, Input, or Mute to enable that control.
2 Touch one or more tracks.
3 Touch a selected or enabled track to deselect or disable it.
To quickly select or enable multiple tracks:

1 Touch Select, Record, Solo, Input, or Mute to enable that control.
2 Do one of the following:
Touch and hold a track, then touch others to add to the group.
– or –
Touch a track and drag over a row or column.
For more information about Sum and Intercancel, see Position.
Selected tracks have an orange outline in the Track Matrix, Track Scroller, and Meter Scroller (see Home Screen Options).

When tracks are record enabled:
• They are armed for recording.
• Rec flashes red on their Fader Module strips.
• Tracks that are record enabled flash red in Pro Tools (depends on audio application).
• Fader in the Function Scroller and entire track in the Meter Scroller flash red in Pro Tools.
Pro Tools indicators that flash red when record enabled, light solid red during recording.
Record indications are controlled by each audio application and may vary between applications.
When tracks are enabled for input monitoring:

• Their track audio is routed directly from input to output, bypassing track plug-ins and functions.
• Input lights on their Fader Module strips.
• Their track Input indicators light green in the Track Matrix, Track Scroller, and Fader in the Function Scroller.
When tracks are soloed:

• Those tracks are audible, all others are muted.
• Solo lights yellow on Fader Module strips with soloed tracks, and Mute lights orange on other strips.
• The track Solo indicator lights yellow in the Track Matrix, Track Scroller, and Fader in the Function Scroller.
When tracks are muted:

• Mute lights orange on their Fader Module strips.
• The Mute indicator lights orange and the track dims in the Track Matrix, Track Scroller, Fader in the Function Scroller, and on
the Display Module (if any).
To assign tracks to a standard Track layout:

1 Touch Assign. The Tracks screen switches to Layout mode.
2 Touch one or more tracks.
You can also double tap Assign to create or edit a layout based on currently banked tracks. For more information, see
Chapter 18, “Layouts”
When Master Post or Master Meter Modules are present, tracks can also be assigned to Post Layouts and Meter Layouts.
Clear
Touch Clear to clear any tracks that have been enabled for record or input, muted, or soloed. This control appears only when Record,
Input, Solo, or Mute is selected.
Track Scroller
See Meter Scroller and Track Scroller to learn about Track Scroller displays and behavior. Note that attentioning a track from
the Track Scroller in the Tracks screen keeps the display on the Tracks screen, unless the Track local option for Show Home Screen
on Track Attention is enabled. (see Track Selector Options).

Track Selector Options
Figure 42. Track Scroller with Local Options icon at far right
To display the Track Selector Options:
 Touch the Local Options icon at the lower right of the Tracks screen.
To close it, touch the Local Options icon again or touch outside the Track Selector Options screen.
Track Selector Options
Position
These settings determine which track to display at the top-left of the Tracks screen.
Always Start With Channel 1 on All Page Displays track 1 at top left in the Track Matrix.
Last Position of Track Selector Displays the Track Matrix as it appeared most recently.
Attentioned Track Displays the attentioned track at the top-left of the Track Matrix.

Display Breaks On Track Color
When selected, tracks with assigned colors appear in separate rows.
Auto-Bank to Attentioned Track

When selected, each track attentioned automatically banks the surface according to the current Banking Justification Mode setting
(see Bank and Spill Zone Justification Settings). The display remains on the Tracks screen.
Show Home Screen on Track Attention

When selected, attentioning a track in the Tracks screen automatically displays that track in the Home screen. When unselected, the
Home screen is not automatically displayed when a track is attentioned in the Tracks screen.
Auto Select Joystick Strips when Storing Layouts

The new Tracks Local Option setting Auto Select Joystick Strips when Storing Layouts determines the initial state of the joystick
blocks when storing Layouts. The default setting is off.
This setting only affects the initial state of the Joystick strip blocks.
When not enabled Joy 1 and Joy 2 blocks are unlit (no green highlight) when storing a Layout, meaning their assignments will not
be stored and recalled with the current Layout. You can override this default state by tapping Joy 1 or Joy 2 so that they light green.
When enabled Joy 1 and Joy 2 blocks are automatically lit (green highlight) when storing a Layout, meaning their assignments will
be stored and recalled with the current Layout. You can override this state by tapping so they become unlit.
Store Hidden Virtual Strips in Layouts

This setting lets you show or hide “virtual” strips in Layouts that exceed the current setting for Number of Strips in Layout, and
for Number of Post Strips in Post Layout.
For example, if the current Number of Strips Per Layout setting is 24, and you load a Title (Layouts) file that was saved with 64
strips per Layout, the first 24 strips will be available but the remaining 48 will not. By enabling Store Hidden Virtual Strips in Lay-
outs, the additional 48 virtual strips will be retained in the Title (though not visible). When this setting is not enabled, additional
strips will not be saved.
Double Tap Assign to Copy Tracks from Banking Mode into Current Layout
When selected, double-tapping the Assign button (Tracks screen) places all currently banked tracks onto blocks in the lower strip
scroller to quickly update or create a layout. For more information, see Chapter 18, “Layouts”
Number of Strips in Layout

You can specify the number of strips available for track assignment in Layouts from the Tracks Local Options screen. Using the
Number of Strips in Layout setting, Layouts can include more tracks than available physical strips.
When a Layout that includes virtual strips is recalled, all surface banking controls are available to bank and nudge. If the Layout
was saved on a system with more strips than the current system, increase the Number of Strips in Layout setting to access the ad-
ditional Layout members.
To configure virtual strips:

1 Navigate the touchscreen to the Tracks screen, and tap the Local Options (gear) icon.
2 In the Tracks Local Options screen, adjust the Number of Strips in Layout slider to the desired value between 8 and 256 strips.

Number of Post Strips in Post Layout
You can specify the number of Master Post Module strips available for assignment in Post Layouts from the Tracks Local Options
screen. Using the Number of Post Strips in Layout setting, Post Layouts can include more tracks than available Master Post Mod-
ule strips.
When a Post Layout that includes virtual strips is recalled to a Master Post Module, banking and nudging controls are available to
bring different member tracks to the strips on the Master Post Module.
Mirror Post Strips on Multiple Post Modules

When enabled on systems with more than one Master Post Module, all Master Post Modules are linked to act as a single, mirrored
unit. Track assignments are mirrored (identical) on all Master Post Modules. In the Strip scroller (Layouts), a single set of Master
Post Module strips is displayed.
When disabled, each Master Post Module has their own set of tracks. In the Strip scroller (Layouts), unique Master Post Module
strips are displayed for each module. Different tracks can be assigned, recalled, and controlled to or from each module.
Meter Layouts
The controls in the Meter Layouts section of the Tracks > Local Options screen lets you configure the layout of MMM displays.
• The Layout selector sets whether MMMs show Large Meters, Large Waveforms, or Meters and Waveforms. When viewing
a Meter Layout on an MMM you can adjust waveform zoom by pressing Display 1 or 2 on the Master Module. You can cycle
through the available views by pressing Shift + Display 1 or 2 (see also Additional Master Meter Display Settings).
• The Number of Meter Rows slider configures the MMMs to display tracks in 1, 2, 3 or 4 rows (each row can show 8 tracks).
Meter Layouts settings in Tracks > Local Options
Both of these settings are stored per Meter Layout.

Chapter 6: Monitoring Screen
The Monitoring screen lets you configure S4/S6 monitoring features.
To display the Monitoring screen, do either of the following:
 From the Home screen, touch Monitoring or press its corresponding Main Menu switch on the Master Module.
 Press the lower-right Setup switch on the Master Module.
The Monitoring screen and S4/S6 monitoring controls automatically lock to the first focused EUCON monitoring application (such
as DADman and XMON). S4/S6 can also be locked to any other current audio application using the Setup switch on the Master
Module. Source Select and other choices are determined by the focused monitoring application (such as XMON EUCON). For in-
formation on how to use the monitoring controls, see Monitor Select Controls and Display.
Figure 43. Monitoring screen with Sources on and off
To toggle a Source on and off:
 In the Source row, touch the rectangular area below the source name.
Blue sources are on, dimmed sources are off. In Figure 43 Surround, Stereo 1, and Listenback are on.
Chapter 6: Monitoring Screen 48

Assigning Monitor Sources
You can assign up to 24 sources in the Monitoring screen. (S4/S6 also supports up to 16 Folddowns and 22 Speakers.)
To access additional sources:

1 Navigate to the Monitoring screen.
2 At the top of the screen, swipe the row of Sources to the left to display sources 9–16 (as available).
If you are using XMON the list of available sources is automatically generated. If you are using DADman with a Pro Tools | MTRX
(or AX32), see next.
Configuring Sources for Pro Tools | MTRX or AX32

If you are using a Pro Tools | MTRX (or AX32) with S4/S6, you need to first configure DADman software and then configure
sources in the S4/S6 Monitoring page.
To configure DADman:
1 Launch DADman and make sure you to do each of the following before proceeding:
• Choose Settings > Monitor Profile, then enable and create a monitor profile.
Monitor profile enabled in DADman
• Enable EUCON by selecting it from the Settings menu.
EUCON enabled in DADman
• Right-click on any monitor in the profile and assign the EUCON mode to what you want to define as Control Room, Monitor
A, Monitor B, Monitor C, and Monitor D by selecting it from the sub-menu.
Assigning EUCON mode in DADman

To configure sources on S4/S6:
1 Navigate the touchscreen to the Monitoring page (from the Home screen press Monitoring, or press the Setup 2 switch in the
Monitor Controls section of the Master Module).
All available sources are listed in the Source Select section in the center of the Monitoring screen. Available sources are dark
until they are assigned.
Available Sources in the Source Select list
2 In the upper Source row, touch the small arrow along the top of
2
the first input source.
The selected input source is outline in yellow, and the items in the
Source Select list become lit (available).
3 Tap an available source in the Source Select list to assign it to the
selected input source.
When first assigned, input sources are inactive (as shown in the
image to the right). After assigning all your input sources you can
activate them as desired by tapping in the lower third of their block
in the upper Source row.
4 Repeat the previous steps to assign additional input sources.
Sources can be duplicated and put in any order.
5 To see additional available sources, scroll the Source Select list
up or down. To see additional input source slots (such as 9–16) in
3
the Source row, scroll it left or right.
Additional Monitor Soft Keys
Monitoring Cue Speaker Sources and Cut (mute) are available as Soft Keys. In the default Pro Tools appset, Monitor cue Speaker
Cut and Sources appear in the Master Post Module Soft Keys, and in the Monitoring Soft Keys access from the Extras page > Con-
trol Room on the top level page (right) of the Automation Module. Because these commands are also available in the Soft Keys Ed-
itor, you can create custom Soft Key assignments for monitor control.

Monitoring Screen Local Options
The Monitoring screen provides its own Local Options, accessed by touching the Local Options (gear) icon.
Figure 44. Monitoring Local Options
To set Monitoring Local Options:

1 Press Setup in the Monitoring section of the Automation Module to go to the Monitoring screen.
2 Tap the Local Options icon (or press its Soft Key, below the icon), and set the following preferences as desired.
Auto Listenback
When enabled, Listenback sources mute during playback and recording, and unmute when stopped. When disabled, Listenback
must be muted and unmuted manually using the Coms switch.
Enable Surface Listenback Latching

When enabled, the Listenback switch operates in Latching mode if held down for less than 1/2 second (it stays in its current state
until the switch is pressed again).
Soft Keys for Listenback
Listenback controls are available in the Soft Key Editor.

Listenback Soft Keys
Command Command Type Category 1 Category 2
Auto Listenback Surface > Monitoring Options > Auto Listenback
Enable Surface Listenback Latching Surface > Monitoring Options > Enable Srfc Lstnbck Ltchng
Auto Talkback
When enabled, the Talkback mic automatically shuts off when the Transport is playing or recording. When the Transport is
stopped, in shuttle, rewind or any mode other than play or record, Talkback turns on. Pressing the Talkback switch overrides this
setting.
Enable Surface Talkback Latching

When enabled, the Talkback switch operates in Latching mode if held down for less than 1/2 second (it stays in its current state until
the switch is pressed again).

Enable GPI Talkback Latching
When enabled, GPI-triggered Talkback operates in Latching mode if engaged for less than half a second (it stays in its current state
until the switch is triggered or pressed again).
For more information on GPI, see Appendix A, “GPIO.”
Enable Speaker Label Editing

You can enter custom names for some or all speaker outputs and monitor labels directly from the Touchscreen. Names and labels
are stored with User Preferences. (See Saving and Loading User Preferences). Custom naming is enabled (or disabled) from the
Monitoring Local Options screen.
To enable speaker and monitor naming:

1 Make sure S4/S6 is focused on (or locked to) DADman or XMON EUCON.
2 Navigate the Touchscreen to the Monitoring screen (from the Home screen, press Monitoring).
3 Tap the Local Options (gear) icon.
4 Click to enable the option Enable Speaker Label Editing.
5 Tap the Local Options (gear) icon again to hide the Monitoring Local Options settings.
To enter custom speaker names or monitor labels:

1 In the Monitoring screen, double-tap a monitor label (A–D) next to the knobs, or a speaker tile along the bottom of the screen.
The tapped tile becomes highlighted, and the on-screen keyboard appears.
Monitor labels and Speaker names in the Monitoring screen.
2 Enter a name, then tap Enter to hide the keyboard.

3 Repeat to enter custom names for other speakers and monitors.
4 To prevent items from being renamed unintentionally (such as when selecting speakers to mute), open the Monitoring Local
Options screen and disable the option to Enable Speaker Label Editing. Custom names persist.
To reset names to their default names:

1 In the Monitoring screen, double-tap a speaker tile along the bottom of the screen.
2 Delete the name for the speaker, then tap Enter to hide the keyboard.
The speaker is renamed to its default name as provided by the monitoring application (such as XMON).
3 Repeat to clear custom names for other speakers.

Sum and Intercancel Modes for Source and Speaker Switches
Sources and Speaker selection can be configured to operate in Sum or Intercancel mode.
To configure Source and Speaker selection:

1 Navigate the touchscreen to the Monitoring screen (from the Home screen, press Monitoring).
2 Tap the Local Options (gear) icon to open the Monitoring settings.
3 Tap to enable the desired mode for Source Mode and Speaker Cut Mode.
Sum Selected Sources or Speaker cuts are added to those currently selected.
Intercancel Selecting a Source or Speaker cut deselects any currently selected sources or speakers.
These and other Monitoring settings are also available as Soft Keys in the Soft Key Editor (via Surface commands), and from the
Master Post Module.
Enable EUCON Monitor

(Pro Tools Only)
Pro Tools lets you designate a Master Fader to act as a Monitor Path that can be controlled from S4/S6 (and other EUCON control
surfaces even when there is no MTRX, XMON, or similar outboard monitoring solution.
To enable a Master Fader for EUCON Monitoring:

1 Ensure that Enable EUCON is selected in Setup > Peripherals > Ethernet Controllers.
2 Create a Master Fader track and assign it to any path being used for monitoring (can be your main Monitor Path, or other).
3 Right-click the name of the Master Fader and select EUCON Monitor.
Talk
Setup
Mon
Insert 11.00
+ Main
Alt 1
Spkrs
Alt 2
Spkrs
Setup
Main Dim Cut

Spkrs
Enabling a Master Fader as EUCON Monitor in Pro Tools (shown at left) and S6 Studio/Talk level knob (shown at right)
The Control Room/Monitor knob on your EUCON control surface controls that Master Fader track for monitoring. For example:
On S4/S6 with a Pro Tools Master Fader assigned to EUCON Monitor:

• Rotating the level knob in the Studio/Talk section raises and lowers the Master Fader level.
• Pressing the knob sets the Master Fader level to –INF. Pressing again returns it to its previous level.
Designation of a Master Fader as a EUCON Monitor path is stored in the Pro Tools session, letting it persist when a session is
moved from a system with an S4/S6 to one with a Dock, or similar.

Chapter 7: Settings Screen
The Settings screen lets you connect workstations, configure your surface, create and edit Soft Keys, and set S4/S6 preferences.
Figure 45. Settings screen with Workstations page selected
To go to the Settings pages:

1 Press the Settings switch on the Master Module (or from the Home screen, touch Settings at the lower-right).
2 To display different Settings pages, do either of the following:
• Touch Workstations, Surface, Soft Keys, User and System Preferences, or Workstations at the top of the Settings
screen.
• Swipe the Settings screen horizontally.
3 To return to the previous view and exit Settings, press Tracks on the Master Module.
Workstations
To open the Workstations page:
 Press Shift + WS on the Master Module (or navigate to the Settings screen and touch Workstations at the top of the screen).
Multiple workstations can be connected to S4/S6 at once, but only one is attentioned at a time. The attentioned workstation has ex-
clusive access to the S4/S6 surface.
For more information, see Connecting S4/S6 to Workstations.
You can attention different workstations by tapping to select them in the Connected list of the Workstations screen, using the Mas-
ter Module Soft Keys (see Workstations, Layouts, and Tracks Soft Keys), or by attentioning tracks (see Focus Workstation
of Most Recently Selected Track).
Switching KVM Source Independent of Workstation Focus

By default, changing focus to a different workstation also switches the KVM (if any, see KVM Switch). You can instead switch
only the KVM without changing workstation focus.
To switch the KVM without changing workstation focus:

1 Navigate to either the Settings > Workstation screen, or press the Master Module WS switch to list available workstations on
the Master Module Soft Keys.
2 On the Master Module hold the Shift switch (in the Navigation switch section) then do either of the following:
• Tap to select a workstation on the Workstation screen.
• Press the Soft Key for a different workstation.
The attached KVM switches to the selected workstation but does not focus that workstation. On-screen, a KVM icon appears
next to the current KVM source.
Chapter 7: Settings Screen 54

Surface
The Surface page lets you configure the S6 surface arrangement, define Spill Zones, designate Knob Modules for Attention Track
Expand mode, initiate firmware updates, and calibrate modules after the arrangement is configured.
Configuring the Surface You need to configure the surface only when you first set up or modify S4/S6. The Surface page also
lets you define Spill Zones, designate up to two Knob Modules for Attention Track Expand mode.
To configure the surface arrangement for the first time, see Configuring the Surface. To configure spill and expand zones, see
Chapter 19, “Spill Zones.”
Calibrating Modules You can calibrate faders (see Fader Calibration), the joysticks on Master Joystick Modules (if any, see As-
signing Tracks to the Joysticks), and calibrate LEDs on individual modules (see LED Calibration and Brightness Control).
Update and Update All (Firmware)

In the Settings > Surface, Config page, you can choose to update firmware only on specific modules by first selecting them and
then pressing Update. To update firmware on all modules, press Update All.
Soft Keys
S4/S6 provides a Soft Key Editor for creating and managing Soft Keys on the Master, Automation, and Master Post Modules.
See Chapter 8, “Soft Keys.”
User and System Preferences

The User and System Preferences let you optimize many characteristics of the system.
• User Preferences include settings for banking, display, behavior of strips and knobs, and other settings. User preferences can
be saved and loaded to/from disk for transfer to other systems and for archiving.
• System Preferences set system-specific settings such as brightness, GPIO, and KVM. System preferences stay with the sys-
tem on which they are configured.
User and System Settings Views

The different sections of preference settings in both the User and System pages can be expanded and collapsed, letting you show
or hide settings. View settings (expanded or collapsed states) are maintained and persist. By default, all views are expanded.
To expand or collapse preference settings views:

1 Navigate to Settings > User or Settings > System.
2 Tap the expand/collapse icon next to the desired heading or section.
For example, to expand or collapse all Surface sections in the User page, tap the icon next to the heading Surface. To expand
or collapse only the Banking settings, tap the icon next to Banking.
Expand/collapse icons in Settings > User

About
The About page displays system and software version information, and provides the Log Out and Shut Down controls. Log Out
lets you access the Master Module desktop to perform software updates or system maintenance. Shut Down lets you shut down the
Master Module prior to powering down the system.
Always shut down the Master Module using the Shut Down command in the About screen before powering down the system. Wait
for the Master Module to completely shut down before powering off.

Chapter 8: Soft Keys
The Master Module, Automation Module, and Master Post Module Soft Keys are pre-configured to provide convenient access to
many of the most used features and commands in your DAW. (Not all manufacturers supply Soft Keys for S4/S6, but you can create
your own.)
Check out the Avid Pro Tools | S6 Workflows on YouTube for in-depth explorations of how to use S6, including Layouts, Spill
Zones, Expand Zones, and more. Check back frequently for updates to this ongoing series.
Overview of Soft Keys

Soft Keys are organized into pages arranged on the different Soft Key banks.
• Two banks of Soft Keys, each with 15 Soft Keys surrounding its own display, are provided on both the Master and Automation
Modules.
• The Master Post Module provides a single bank of 15 Soft Keys.
Each page can provide keys to execute one or more DAW commands, page jumps to other Soft Key pages, S6 surface commands,
and alpha-numeric keys and commands. The Automation Module Wheel switches, Locate switches, Numeric Keypad, and Trans-
port switches are also editable Soft Keys, as are the switches in the Monitoring section on the Master Post Module.
Default Soft Key assignments (known as an Appset, or Application Set) are provided for Pro Tools, DADMan (for
Pro Tools | MTRX), Nuendo 7, Cubase 8, Pyramix, and other applications (for other DAWs, contact the manufacturer). To get
started utilizing the factory-assigned Soft Keys for Pro Tools, see Using Soft Keys.
The available Soft Keys on your system may differ from those shown in this document, depending on which version of S6 software
is installed, whether an S6 appset is available for your DAW, and whether you have customized your Soft Keys.
Soft Keys can be customized to add or rearrange commands, and custom assignments can be saved and loaded. S6 provides a Soft
Key Editor in the Settings screen for creating and managing Soft Keys. You can add, delete, rename, color, save and load Soft Keys.
Multiple layers of assignments are available via modifier keys. Full-color icons can be assigned to both the active and inactive
states, and background colors and names can be changed.
Soft Key assignments can include multiple EUCON commands in addition to combinations of Key, Page, and Surface commands.
You can also configure Soft Keys to apply to multiple DAWs.
To learn how to create and edit Soft Keys, see Soft Keys Editor.
Check out the EuconLayouter app from our friends at Sonicmonk to simplify customizing and managing appsets.
About Appsets and Software Updates
S6 software uses a default Appset installed at the factory. If you have customized any Soft Key assignments, S6 creates and main-
tains those in a custom Appset and uses that set instead of the factory default set. Installing new S6 Master Module software will
not install the default Appsets if you have customized the Appset from a previous version in any way. To access the new factory
Appset provided in the most recent Master Module software, first save your custom Appset (see Saving and Loading Soft Key
Appsets). After updating the system press Factory at the bottom of the Soft Key Editor (any custom Soft Keys will be lost and will
need to be reassigned).
Location of AppSet Files on the Master Module
If you ever need to locate an appset file you can find them at the following location on the Master Module C: drive:
C:\ProgramData\Avid\S6\AppSets\
Chapter 8: Soft Keys 57

Saving and Loading Soft Key Appsets
The Soft Keys screen (Settings > Soft Keys) provides Save and Load buttons to store and load appset files.
• Use Save to save custom Soft Key assignments for archiving and transfer.
• Use Load to recall saved Appsets for a specific project or when you move to a different system. You can also load Appsets
from earlier versions of the current DAW.
• Use Factory to replace the currently loaded Soft Key assignments with the default assignments for your DAW. (If you have
customized any Soft Keys, be sure to save your assignments before resetting to Factory.)
Factory, Load, and Save commands in Settings > Soft Keys
Location of Custom Appsets
The ability to save and load Appsets lets you backup and transfer Soft Key assignment.
S6 Appset files are stored in the following default location:

C:\ProgramData\Avid\S6\Appsets
If the ProgramData folder is hidden, do the following to show it:

1 Navigate the touchscreen to the Settings > About page and press Logout.
2 Select Administrator. When prompted enter the following default password: password
3 Click the File Explorer tile.
4 In Explorer, tap View, then tap Options.
5 In the Folder Options dialog, tap to select the View tab, then tap to enable Show Hidden folders, files, and drives.

Using Soft Keys
Take a few minutes to explore the default Soft Key assignments for Pro Tools to familiarize yourself with what is available, how
the pages and keys are organized, and how to navigate among them. The following sections include examples that highlight some
of the features provided in the default Pro Tools appset.
If you have customized your Soft Keys, use the Save and Load feature in the Soft Key editor to ensure your custom appset is saved.
Then restore the Factory appset to see the new assignments for Pro Tools. To restore your custom appset, use the Load command.
Navigating Soft Keys

To begin, look at the default first page on the pair of Master Module Soft Key banks. These banks are labeled Automation 1 and
Session Management 1. Most banks are color coded to make it easier to recognize their function. For example, session manage-
ment pages have a blue banner, while automation pages are red, editing pages are green, and so on.
Navigation keys are provided along the bottom of each bank.
Navigation switches along the bottom of the left Soft Key bank on the Master Module (default Pro Tools appset)
 Pressing the Menu switch jumps to the Page Menu keys, which list numerous other available pages. Similarly, pressing Playlists
or Show/Hide jumps to those corresponding pages.
 Pressing Home (when available) jumps back to the first page in that bank.
Quick View of Layer 2
Hold down the Ctrl switch on any Fader Module to access alternate functions (layer 2) on some Soft Key pages.

Navigating Soft Key Banks from the Numeric Keypad
By holding Shift on a Fader Module, you can press the numeric keys on the Numeric Keypad to navigate Soft Key banks on the
Master and/or Automation Module to different pages, as described in the following table.
Fader Module Shift + Numpad Assignments for the Numeric Keypad in the default Pro Tools appset
Numeric Keypad Switch

Function Description
(Hold Shift while Pressing)
Access all control room Sources and Speakers, toggle Sum/Intercancel modes,
. (decimal) Control Room
access Folddowns, Talkback and Listenback, and access Monitoring Preferences
The default Soft Key pages (Automation 1, Session Management 1, Automation 2,

0 Default
and Extras) are shown in all banks
1 Automation All four banks of Soft Keys display Automation pages
Automation pages 1 and 2 appear on the Automation Module Soft Key banks (use-
2 Automation Alt 1
ful when Layouts are shown in both the Master Module left and right Soft Keys)
Automation page 1 appears on the right Master Module Soft Key bank (useful when
3 Automation Alt 2
Layouts are shown on the left bank)
4 Management Session management pages appear on all banks
Satellites & Dsplays pages for Satellites, Machine Control, Solo (SIP/AFL/PFL, and switch
5
Machines behavior), along with Automation 1 (in the Master Module left bank)
Editor Interface, Tools and Setup, Session Management 1, and Counters & Scroll-
6 Configuration
ing pages appear on the four banks
Pages and commands to edit Clips, Clip Gain, Clip FX, Selections, and Tracks.
Playlist menu includes Target, Recent, Cycle, +/- 5, First, Last, etc. Editing addi-
7 Editing
tions include Save Track Preset, Make Active/Inactive, Duplicate + Extend & Hide
& Deactivate.
MIDI composition, creation, and editing command, as well as access to Windows,

8 MIDI
Editing, and Workflow functions.
9 Recording Commands for recording, tracking, and Playlists
Enter Spill Zones Bank, Nudge, Home, and End for each Spill Zone (Left and Right)
/ User Pages User 1, 2, and 3 provide many frequently used commands
* Preferences Access all of the Console Preferences on Soft Keys
Memory Access to Memory Locations on the left Soft Keys, and essential Automation func-
–
Locations tions on the right Soft Keys.
Monitoring and Access to Monitoring Sources on the left Soft Keys, and essential Automation func-
+
Automation tions on the right Soft Keys.

Automation Example using the Master Module Soft Keys
The first page of the left bank of Soft Keys on the Master Module is the Automation 1 page,
providing many of the most frequently used automation commands. The following example
shows you how you can use Soft Keys to set Pro Tools track automation modes.
To set track automation mode using the Soft Keys:

1 Make sure the Master Module Soft Key left bank is showing the Automation 1 page.
The left column of track Automation modes indicate currently assigned modes with lit
switch LEDs. For example, if the Read switch LED is lit, it indicates that all tracks are in
Read mode.
2 Press and hold the Soft Key for the desired track automation mode (such as Latch).
3 On the Fader Module strip for the desired track, press Select (or press that strips F
switch.
The F switch lights red, the strip display shows Latch, and the Soft Key for Latch mode lights.
Extras Page
In the default Pro Tools assignments, the right-side bank of Soft Keys on the Automation
Module shows the Extras page. This page provides access to other Soft Key pages includ-
ing Snapshots, Satellites, Groups, and Control Room, and commands including Link
Track and Edit Selection, Insertion Follows Playback, Scrolling Modes, Expand Zone
toggles, and more. At the bottom of this window are keys to take you to pages for Record-
ing, and for Workflow.
Hold down Ctrl (on any Fader Module) to reveal previous commands such as Pre-Roll,
Post-Roll and Click.
Workflow Pages
Be sure to explore the Workflow pages in the default Soft Key assignments for Pro Tools.
These provide Soft Keys for many of the most useful Pro Tools commands including Ren-
dered Workflow functions Freeze Track(s), Commit Track(s), and Bounce Track(s), as
well as Clip functions (Loop Clip(s), Lock Clip(s), and Mute Clip(s).

Pro Tools Appset Reference
The factory Pro Tools appsets for S6 version 18.3 and 19.3 include many enhancements for Pro Tools, new assignments for DAD-
man software (for Pro Tools | MTRX) and numerous additional enhancements. To learn more about the newest appset for
Pro Tools, see the S6 Operations.pdf (available for download from your Avid account).
Appset for Pro Tools 2019.3
Here are a few of the enhancements made to the default Pro Tools 2019.2 appset:
Highlights of changes in Pro Tools 2019.3 appset
Description
Shift + * Access all of the Console Preferences on Soft Keys
Shift + – Access to Memory Locations on the left Soft Keys, and essential Automation functions on the right Soft Keys.
Shift + “+” Access to Monitoring Sources on the left Soft Keys, and essential Automation functions on the right Soft Keys.
Significant updates to Editing and Playlist menus. Playlist menu includes Target, Recent, Cycle, +/- 5, First, Last, etc.
Shift + 7
Editing additions include Save Track Preset, Make Active/Inactive, Duplicate + Extend & Hide & Deactivate.
Shift + 8 Updated MIDI QuickJump with access to Windows, Editing, and Workflow functions.
Alt Paths Many menus now have alternate variations which are revealed when holding down the Control modifier.
Shift + / Quick Access to the first set of Track and Meter Layouts.
Extras Quick Access to Insertion Follows Playback, Link Edit & Track Selection, Scrolling Modes, and so on.
Appset for Pro Tools 2018.3
The factory appset for S6 version 18.3 included many enhancements for Pro Tools, new assignments for DADman software (for
Pro Tools | MTRX) and numerous additional enhancements. To learn more, see the S6 Operations.pdf (available for download
from your Avid account).
Here are a few of the changes and improvements that were included with S6 18.3. Modifier switches (Ctrl and Shift) refer to those
switches on Fader Modules. “/” and “7” refer to switches on the Automation Module.
Highlights of changes in Pro Tools 2018.3 appset
Description
Ctrl Access alternate functions (layer 2) on some Soft Key pages
Quick Jump to User Pages:

• User Page 1 provides often-used commands including zoom, navigation, and similar
Shift + /
• User Page 2 provide pre-configured commands to access Track and Meter Layouts.
• User Page 3 provides pre-configured multi-DAW commands including automation Punch, Preview, and more.
Access commands for Target Playlist workflows introduced in Pro Tools 2018.1:
Shift + 7 • Playlist Soft Keys for Target Playlist and track-comping workflows on Automation Module Left Soft Keys
• Updated Edit 1 page with common editing fuctions such as cut, copy, paste, plus Save Track Preset, and more

Soft Keys Editor
The Soft Keys Editor screen lets you create and customize Soft Keys.
To access the Soft Key Editor:
 Navigate the touchscreen to Settings > Softkeys. The default Soft Keys Editor screen provides the following main sections.
F
Figure 46. Soft Key Editor default screen
A – Module Selector Touch to choose to target Master Soft Keys or GPIO, or Soft Keys on the Automation Module or Master Post
Module
B – Soft Key Banks and Commands Displays Soft Key banks and assignments for the selected module, and provides commands
to edit bank name and color, Insert, Add, Clear, or Delete banks.
C – Soft Key Editor Command to Insert, Add, Clear, and Delete Soft Key blocks that make up the Soft Key definition.
D – Modifier Locks Modifier keys to define and access additional commands from a Soft Key.
E – Help Text Instructions for how to use the Soft Key Editor.
F – Soft Key Commands Provides the Factory button to reset the Soft Key Editor to its default set of Soft Keys (any custom Soft
Keys will be deleted), and Soft Key Load and Save commands. This area of the Soft Key Editor changes to different views de-
pending on the current task.

To exit the Soft Keys page at any time:
 Press Home on the Master Module or select another Settings screen from the top of the touchscreen.
Custom Soft Keys are automatically saved on the Master Module.
To reset the Soft Keys to their factory (default) assignments:
 In the Soft Keys Editor, press Factory.
Creating Soft Keys

This section gives examples of the following:
• Customizing a Soft Key in a User Bank
• Creating a New Soft Key Bank
• Adding Navigation Keys to a Bank
See also Special Soft Key Functions to learn about special features available in the Soft Key Editor, including modifier key
locks (Soft Key layers), drag-and-drop, key commands, multi-DAW commands, and more.
Customizing a Soft Key in a User Bank

The default factory Pro Tools appset includes the User Page, which are pre-built, consecutive pages of Soft Keys with pre-config-
ured navigation keys. We will use one these pages to quickly create a custom Soft Key assignment to solo all tracks with a selection.
To customize a User Soft Key:

1 Make sure the Automation Module right bank of Soft Keys is displaying the Extras page (its default first page).
2 (Optional) Press the Soft Key for User Pages.
User Pages Soft Key on the Automation Module
The right bank of Automation Module Soft Keys jumps to the first User Page.
You do not have to navigate the soft keys to the desired page before opening the Soft Key Editor, you can instead use the on-screen
bank selector and navigation controls available in the Soft Key Editor screen.
3 Navigate the touchscreen to Settings > Softkeys.

4 In the Soft Key Editor, select the module on which you want to create a new Soft Key by tapping the Module Selector at the top
of the page and choosing Automation Module Soft Keys.
Figure 47. Module Selector (1) and page navigation/editing commands (2)
The Soft Key Editor shows the Automation Module Soft Keys, with the currently banked page (User Page 1) displayed in the
right bank. (To select a different page, tap at the top of the displayed page to select that bank, then use the < and > buttons to nav-
igate to the desired page.)
This page provides 12 undefined Soft Keys labeled User, along with pre-defined navigation keys (User 1, Extras, and User 3)
across the bottom.
5 Tap to select a Soft Key to customize.
When a key is selected it becomes highlighted in yellow. The lower half of the Soft Key Editor displays commends for defining
the Soft Key.
Figure 48. A selected Soft Key
You can also create new Soft Keys in secondary layers for existing Soft Keys. For more information, see Modifier Locks.
6 Tap Add in the Soft Key Editor section. A Soft Key block appears in the center of the Editor section, and the commands EU-
CON, Page, Key, Surface, Options, and Done appear across the bottom.
7 Tap the Soft Key block to select it. It becomes highlighted in yellow.

8 Tap EUCON, Page, Key or Surface at the bottom of the screen.
The block becomes highlighted and displays choices and commands for the selected command type. For example, if you tap EU-
CON, the hierarchical listing of EUCON commands appears below. If you tap Page, Soft Key navigation choices appear, and
similarly for Key Strokes and Surface Soft Keys.
Figure 49. Soft Key Editor with one block added
9 Use the hierarchical EUCON command lists to navigate to and select the desired command. For example, scroll to and then tap
Mixing, then scroll to and tap Solo Tracks w/ Sel as shown in Figure 50.
Figure 50. Selecting a EUCON command
10 Tap Done (or tap the Soft Key block) to close the EUCON command menus.
Soft Key assignments can include multiple EUCON commands in addition to combinations of Key, Page, and Surface commands.
To optimize multi-command Soft Keys, see Soft Key Options.

11 Tap the Text/Icon Display Mode selector and select how you want text and/or icons displayed for the Soft Key. Choices include
Not Used (no text or icon), Icon Only, and other options for Soft Key text and icon appearance.
Figure 51. Text/Icon Display Modes
12 Under State, do the following:

• Tap the Inactive/Active selector to choose which state you want to define first. (Some commands only have an inactive state.)
• Tap the Icon display below the Inactive/Active selector (the Icon display will be blank for newly created Soft Keys), then use
the displayed library to choose an icon for the current state. The Icon palette can be filtered to show All icons or Pro Tools
icons, and can be scrolled up, down, left, and right. Tap Done (or tap outside the Icon palette) to return to the Soft Key Editor.
• Double-tap the text field (directly below the Icon display) and enter a text label for the Soft Key using the on-screen touch key-
board. Tap Enter to close the on-screen keyboard. When assigning a command to a new (blank) Soft Key, the text label is au-
tomatically filled in with the text of the assigned command. When editing an existing Soft Key (such as any of the
pre-configured User keys), rename the text label manually.
• Tap the Color Picker and tap to select a color for the text and its background to appear in the currently selected state. Tap Done
(or tap outside the Color Picker) to close it and return to the Soft Key Editor.
You can save custom colors by dragging the modified color box onto the palette.
• Repeat for the other state (if you defined display characteristics for the Inactive state, now choose Active and choose an icon,
enter a name and choose a color).

In the example Soft Key we created, we defined text for both the Inactive and Active states as “Solo Tks w/Sel” and chose a cus-
tom icon as shown in Figure 52.
Figure 52. Custom Soft Key defined with text and icon
13 To exit the Soft Keys page, press Tracks on the Master Module, or select another Settings screen from the top of the touch-
screen. Soft Keys are saved automatically.

Creating a New Soft Key Bank
This section describes how to create a new, empty Soft Key bank.
To create a new Soft Key:

1 In the Soft Key Editor, select the module on which you want to create a new Soft Key by tapping the Module Selector at the top
of the page and choosing one of the available sets of Soft Keys.
Figure 53. Module Selector
2 Tap the image of the Soft Key bank you want to edit. The selected set is outlined in yellow and its name is displayed below in
the Bank commands section.
Figure 54. Automation Module Soft Keys, Right set, selected (Add command, below)
3 Tap Add in the Bank commands section to create a new, empty bank after the last existing bank. New banks are automatically
numbered.
• To create a new bank between existing banks, tap Insert; the new bank will be inserted before the currently selected bank.
4 Name the bank and choose a text color by doing the following:
• Double-tap the name field (to the left of the Color Picker) and enter a name for the bank using the on-screen touch keyboard.
Tap Enter to close the on-screen keyboard.
• Tap the Color Picker and tap to select a color for the bank name text and for the background color displayed behind the text.
Tap Done (or tap anywhere outside the Color Picker) to close it and return to the Soft Key Editor.

Adding Navigation Keys to a Bank
Navigation keys use the Page commands to navigate among banks of Soft Keys. In this example, we will define keys to navigate
to the previous and next page of banks.
To add navigation keys to a bank:

1 In the three keys across the bottom of the bank, tap to select the left key as shown in Figure 55.
Figure 55. Selecting a key for page navigation
2 Tap Add in the Soft Key Editor section.

3 Tap the newly created Soft Key block to select it (the block is highlighted in yellow).
Figure 56. Soft Key Editor after a command block has been added

4 Tap Page at the Bottom of the screen. The command block you just added displays Page, and the Page commands appear.
Figure 57. Page commands
Make sure the Section to Change selector shows the correct set of Soft Keys (such as Automation Module Right Soft Keys).
If necessary, tap and choose a different set.
5 Tap the Action selector and choose the desired action (for the “left” key selected in Figure 55, you would typically choose Go
to Previous Page). If you choose Jump to Specified Page, the Available Pages list to the right lets you select the desired page.
6 Tap Done to close the Page commands.

7 Double-tap the name field and enter a text label for the Soft Key (such as “Left”) using the on-screen touch keyboard. Tap
Enter to close the on-screen keyboard.
8 Repeat the previous steps for the “right” navigation key of the new bank, defining it to Go to Next Page as shown in Figure 58.
Figure 58. Left and Right navigation keys defined for a Soft Key bank
9 To assign Soft Keys to the new bank, follow the instructions in Customizing a Soft Key in a User Bank.
10 To exit the Soft Keys page, press Tracks on the Master Module, or select another Settings screen from the top of the touch-
screen. Soft Keys are saved automatically.

Special Soft Key Functions
The Soft Key Editor also lets you add Key Strokes and Surface Soft Keys, configure Soft Key Options, utilize Modifier Locks
for Soft Key layers, Drag and Drop Transport Switches, and customize Wheel Shift Functions.
Key Strokes
Alpha, numeric, Function, arrow, and other keys from the computer keyboard (including OS modifier keys and other unique func-
tions such as Pause) can be included in a Soft Key definition. Selecting Key provides the following controls:
Key Command Double-tap to access the on-screen keyboard to assign letters or numbers from the computer keyboard to the
Soft Key definition.
Insert Special Key Tap to display the Special Key menu, where you can choose special keys to include in the Soft Key definition
such as numeric keys (Keypad 0–9), Function keys, arrow keys, Return, Enter, and other.
Key Command Modifier Tap to include one or more modifier keys in the Soft Key definition. This lets you create Soft Keys that
execute keyboard shortcuts with a single press (such as Shift + Tab).
Figure 59. Key Command settings in the Soft Key Editor
Surface Soft Keys

The Soft Key Editor now lets you assign Surface commands to Soft Keys, letting you control more aspects of the S6 surface from
customizable Soft Keys. Surface commands let you define Soft Keys for surface banking, talkback and other monitoring controls,
Layouts, workstations, and many other common surface functions.
To access Surface Soft Key commands:

1 Navigate the touchscreen to Settings > Soft Keys.
2 Select a module and key to create or edit its Soft Key assignment as explained in the S6 Guide.
3 In the lower half of the Soft Key Editor, tap Add.
Choices for EUCON, Page, Key, and Surface (as well as Done) appear across the bottom.
4 Tap Surface to add a Surface command.
Surface command in the Soft Key Editor
The Editor shows the top level of Surface commands, such as Monitoring, Navigation, Titles, Surface Options, and others.

5 Tap to select a category and reveal associated choices.
Take a few minutes to explore the available Surface commands. The following table lists the choices available in each category.
Surface Soft Key
Category Commands Notes
Dim, Cut, Main, Alt1, Alt2, Speaker Cuts (mode, and select
CR Monitoring 1–24), Folddowns (select), Monitor Insert, Talkback, Listen-
back, and Sources (mode, and select 1–24)
For monitor control from Soft Keys on the Master
Mon A Monitoring Dim, Cut, and Source select 1–24 Post Module or other modules. (To add these to
your DAW appset, focus and lock your monitoring
Mon B Monitoring Dim, Cut, and Source select 1–24
application first.)
Mon C Monitoring Dim, Cut, and Source select 1–24
Mon D Monitoring Dim, Cut, and Source select 1–24
Banking, Layouts, Spill Zone Left, and Spill Zone Right

Navigation Surface and spill zone banking from Soft Keys
select/collapse
Titles Layout Recall and Post Layout Recall select Recall any currently loaded layouts
Attention, Strips, Knobs, Soft Keys, Brightness (including

Surface Options Control preferences in the Settings screen
Activate/Deactivate Screening Mode), and GPIO
Workstation Show Custom Names, General (such as Follows Knob Set

Options Changes, and Open/Close Plug-Ins), KVM switch (enable)
Display Module
Show Automation, and Reverse Automation Lanes
Options
General Options Preferences Autoload from Titles and Sessions settings
Attention Clicked Track Name/Fader/Edit Win-

dow/Plug-In/Pan/Sends/Edit Sel Move, Attention from Meter
Attention Track
Scroller, Show Borders Meter Scroller, Track Scroller follows
Options
Attention, Link Scrollers, Enable Attention Knob/Fader Zones,
and Auto Show Sel Function Graph
Display Breaks on Color, Auto Bank to Attention, Show Home

Assign any of these commands to Soft Keys to be
Track Selector on Attention, Auto Select Joystick in Layouts, Store Virtual
able to control their settings without leaving the
Options Hidden Strips in Layouts, Auto Store PEC/Dir in Layouts,
current Track Selector view
Double Tap to Assign in Banking, and Mirror Post Strips
Auto Listenback, Enable Surface Listenback Latching, Auto

Monitoring For monitor control from Soft Keys on the Master
Talkback, Enable Surface Talkback Latching, Enable GPI
Options Post Module or other modules
Talkback Latching, and Enable Speaker Label Editing
Soft Key Options

When any command is added to a Soft Key assignment, a new Options command appears along the bottom of the Soft Key Editor.
Options command in the Soft Key Editor
Pressing Options lets you define the following two aspects of Soft Key behavior for single-DAW commands. (For other Options,
see Multi-DAW Commands).
Command Options in the Soft Key Editor

Initial Delay Enter a value (in milliseconds) for the system to pause before executing the command.
Display Feedback This setting determines which commands of a multi-EUCON Soft Key is indicated on the surface. When en-
abled, S4/S6 displays status indication of the corresponding EUCON command. When not enabled, status indication or other feed-
back from the corresponding DAW is not displayed. Availability and status of this option varies depending on the associated com-
mand. This setting is useful for optimizing system response to multi-EUCON Soft Key assignments.
After entering a value for Initial Delay and configuring Display Feedback if available, press Done to save the Command Option
settings with the selected command. Or press Cancel to close the Command Options without changing the command definition.
Multi-DAW Commands
You can configure Soft Keys to apply to multiple DAWs. Use this to enable automation Preview or Match Out across multiple
DAWs from a single Soft Key. Feedback (LED indication of function state) and a Delay (“wait”) time can be specified as needed.
For pre-configured examples, see Default Multi-DAW Commands.
To configure a multi-DAW Soft Key command:

1 Make sure all desired workstations are connected in Settings > Workstation.
2 Go to Settings > Soft Keys, and select an existing Soft Key command or create a new one. Multi-DAW Soft Keys can include
EUCON, Key, and Surface commands.
When a command is assigned to a Soft Key, or its command block (such as EUCON) is selected in the Soft Key Editor, the Op-
tions menu appears at the bottom of the Soft Keys page.
You can include multiple commands in a single Soft Key assignment, including multi-DAW and single DAW commands. Each
multi-DAW command can have unique Command Options for delay, feedback, and workstations.
3 Press Options to display the Command Options window.
Command Options window for a multi-DAW EUCON command
Initial Delay (milliseconds) Enter a value (in milliseconds) for the system to pause before executing the command.
Display Feedback When enabled, S6 displays status indication of the corresponding EUCON command. Availability and status of
this option varies depending on the associated command.
Attached Workstations These blocks select which workstations to control with the current multi-DAW command. The order of
workstations in the Connected list (Settings > Workstations) from top to bottom determines their workstation number.
• Enable Focus to limit the command to only the currently focused workstation.
• Enable All to apply the command to all connected workstations.
• Enable one or more workstation numbers to apply the command to those specific workstations.
4 Press Done to save the Command Option settings. Or press Cancel to close without changing the command definition.

The command block for multi-DAW commands displays Multi, the Delay value (if other than 0), and the Feedback status.
Command block indicating Multi, Delay, and Feedback status
Default Multi-DAW Commands
The default Pro Tools 2018.3 appset includes many pre-configured multi-DAW commands for some of the most frequently re-
quested automation tasks. These include Write to All, Preview, Punch, Auto-Match, and Save. Even if you do not expect to need
these specific commands, you can look at them in the Soft Key Editor to see examples of how multi-DAW commands are defined.
To access these new Soft Keys:

1 Make sure you have loaded the default (factory) appset for Pro Tools 2018.3.
2 On the Automation Module > right Soft Keys bank > Home page, press the Soft Key for User Pages, then press User 3.
The commands on the User 3 page are all pre-configured to apply to All workstations. To distinguish them from other, single-DAW
commands an asterisk (*) has been added at the end of their command names.
Modifier Locks
Soft Keys can be created in modifier-driven layers for existing Soft Keys.
The Modifier Locks section lets you “lock” modifier keys on (pressed) to create Soft Keys that become available while a modifier
key is pressed. This lets you create new Soft Keys in the same position as an existing Soft Key but which only becomes available
when holding down the associated modifier switch on the Fader Module.
Once defined, you can toggle the Soft Key view between modifier “layers” by holding down the associated modifier key(s).
Drag and Drop Transport Switches

The Automation Module Transport Soft Keys can be rearranged via drag-drop. Drag a key onto another Transport switch and the
two will swap locations.
On the Automation Module, Transport switch caps can be removed and re-installed to match custom Transport Key arrangement.
Wheel Shift Functions

The Wheel section offers a dedicated Shift switch (lower right of the wheel) which can be included in a custom Soft Key to assign
additional functions to the Wheel switches. This additional layer is in addition to other OS modifier key layers.
To include the Wheel section Shift switch in a Wheel Soft Key, tap the on-screen Shift switch (see Figure 60) before selecting a
Wheel switch to edit.
Figure 60. Wheel Shift

Preference Settings for Soft Keys
Soft Key Preference settings let you turn Soft Key switch LEDs on or off, choose how Workstation choices appear in the Soft Keys,
and set the Workstation Soft Key pages to automatically close after selecting a workstation. For more information, see Soft Keys.
Workstations, Layouts, and Tracks Soft Keys

The Master Module Soft Key banks provide special functionality for workstations, Layouts, and track types.
Workstations, Layouts, and Track keys are not defined, and cannot be edited like standard Soft Keys.
Workstations
When multiple workstations are attached to S6, you can use the Soft Keys to focus them. If you use a supported KVM switch, mon-
itor and keyboard focus follows workstation selection.
To attention Workstations from the Soft Keys:

1 Make sure all Workstations are connected (Settings > Workstations).
2 Press WS on the Master Module. The left bank Soft Keys on the Master Module displays the available workstations, and the
right bank displays all EUCON-aware applications on the selected workstation.
3 Press the corresponding Soft Key switches to attention the corresponding Workstation and/or application.
You can configure S6 to include or exclude system icons from Workstation Soft Keys. See System Soft Key Icons.
4 To exit, press Close at the bottom of the Soft Key bank.
You can configure S6 to automatically close the workstation Soft Key displays. See Auto Close Surface Recall Soft Keys.
Layouts
You can also recall Layouts from the Soft Keys. For more information, see Recalling Layouts from Soft Keys.
Track Types
You can spill tracks by type from the Soft Keys. For more information, see Chapter 19, “Spill Zones.”
Soft Keys on the Master Post Module

The Master Post Module (MPM) provides a single Soft Key bank similar to those on the Master and Automation Modules, and a
set of Monitoring switches, all of which can be customized in the Soft Key Editor.

Chapter 9: Using the S4 Channel Strip Module
Channel Strip Modules (CSMs) provide the fader strips for S4 systems. Each CSM provides eight fader strips with a lower fader
section and upper knob section, and central function select section.
Knob section
Function Select
Fader section
CSMs provide the same functionality on S4 as Fader, Process, and Knob Modules on S6. The primary differences are:
• The CSM provides a single set of Function Select switches for the eight fader strips, unlike the S6 Process Module which pro-
vides Function switches for each fader strip. Function Select switches include EQ, Dyn, Exp, and more.
• The CSM fader Focus switch determines the fader strip to which the Function Select switches apply. Focus is only available
on the S4 CSM, not on S6 Fader Modules.
Throughout this guide, references to switches on S6 Fader, Process, and Knob modules also apply to the equivalent switches on
CSMs.
Chapter 9: Using the S4 Channel Strip Module 77

Function Switches
The Function switches select the function displayed on the Knobs. They operate similarly to the Function switches on S6 Process
Modules, except that on the CSM they apply to the currently Focused strip.
Function switches
The Function Select switches Shift and X are not yet implemented.
Expand
Expand mode maps parameters beyond the current strip, expanding (or “spilling”) EQ, dynamics, or other functions across mul-
tiple controls on the upper Knob section, or to the lower Fader section, on the same CSM as the track. Attention Expand mode uses
up to two optional Knob Modules as Attention Expand zones.
For complete instructions for using strip Expand and Attention Expand Zones, see Expand.
Clear (Reset to Default)
You can quickly reset faders, individual parameters, functions, Expand Fader maps, or entire tracks to their default values using the
Clear switch, located at left of the CSM Function select section, and on the top of each strip on the S6 Process Module.
To clear:
1 Press Clear on the desired strip. Its LED flashes red, and switches for all functions available to be reset are lit.
2 While Clear is engaged (flashing) do any of the following:
• To reset a fader unity (0 dB on the strip), press F in the CSM Fader section, or on the S6 Fader Module, or touch the fader.
• To reset an individual parameter, press its knob top.
• To reset a function, press the desired function switch in that strip (such as EQ, Dyn, or Pan). Not all functions support Clear.
• To reset an entire strip, press the strip Select switch (in the CSM Fader section, or on the S6 Fader Module).
The parameter or function resets and the Clear switch stops flashing and remains unlit.
Func (Enable All Plug-In Automation)
Pressing the Func switch on a CSM (or S6 Process Module) enables automation for all controls in that strip’s currently focused EQ,
Dyn, or Insert function.
To protect automation data, pressing the Func switch only enables (it does not toggle automation off).
Function Select Switches
The function select switches let you assign different functions to the Knob Module (S6) or upper knob section of the CSM (S4). One
function can be selected at a time, and its function select switch lights.
Ins, Dyn, EQ, and User switches each have a corresponding In switch.On the S6 Process Module, In switches are next to their
function select switches. On the S4 CSM, In switches are below their function select switches.
Input
To assign the Input function to the Knob Module:
 Press Input.
For more information, see Assigning Track Input and Output.

Inserts, Dynamics, EQ, and User (Instrument)
To toggle Ins, Dyn, EQ, and User in and out:
 Press In for the desired function select switch. The In switches for Ins, Dyn, EQ, and User light when active.
To access Inserts:
 Press Ins.
To access Dynamics:
 Press Dyn. When more than one Dynamics plug-in is on a track, double-press its Dyn switch to cycle through each plug-in.
To access EQ:
 Press EQ. When more than one EQ plug-in is on a track, double-press its EQ switch to cycle through each plug-in.
To access Instrument plug-ins:
 Press User.
If you press an EQ or Dynamics Function select switch for a track without these plug-ins already inserted, some audio applications
can insert a default plug-in automatically. In Pro Tools, you can select EQ and Dynamics defaults in Setup > Preferences > Mixing.
Sends, Pan, Edit, Grp, Bus, and HEAT
To access Sends on the Knob Module:
 Press Sends.
To access Pan on the Knob Module:
 Press Pan.
To access Edit functions:
 Press Edit on any strip assigned to an audio track. (See Editing.)
To access Groups on the Knob Module:
 Press Grp.
To access Buses (outputs) on the Knob Module:
Press Bus.
To access HEAT controls (Pro Tools Only):
 Press HEAT.
Focus
At the top of each CSM fader strip is a Focus switch. When a strip is focused (its Focus switch is lit blue) the central Function
Select section on the same CSM lets you choose a function to display in the Knob section for that strip (4 knobs). You can also Ex-
pand a function to have the entire Knob section provide parameters for that function for the currently focused strip (up to 32 knobs).
Note that the Focus switch is associated with the fader strip, not any track assigned to the strip.
Select Focus
Touch/Ltch
4 DX ADR4
Input Rec
Focus switch (shown lit)

Examples of CSM Focus
The following examples show how to use the Focus switch for per-strip and Expand parameter access, as well as how to use the
All switch to access parameters across all strips.
Example 1: Per-Strip (Accessing a Function for a Single Strip)
The strip Focus switches let you target a strip for Function selection. In this mode, the selected function will be displayed on the
four knobs for the Focus strip only (other knobs continue to display their current function). For example, pressing strip 4 Focus
and then the Pan Function switch displays Pan parameters in the Knob section for strip 4 while leaving EQ parameters on all other
strips.
To focus a strip and select a function:

1 Press the Focus switch on the desired strip. The Focus switch lights.
2 Press a Function switch (such as Pan).
Pan in strip 4
EQ (page 1) for
unfocused strips
Pan selected
Strip 4 Focused
Pan for the currently focused strip (strip 4)

Example 2: Expand Mode
Expand mode spills parameters for the currently selected function and focused strip across the entire Knob section (up to 32 knobs).
To access Expand mode on a CSM:

1 Press Expand to enable Expand mode.
2 Focus a strip.
3 Select a function (such as EQ).
EQ expanded for focused strip
Expand EQ
enabled selected
Strip 1
Focused
Pan for the currently focused strip (strip 4)

Example 3: All
To assign the same function to all strips on a CSM:

1 Press All on the Master Module.
2 Press a Function switch on any CSM.
For example, pressing All + EQ displays the same EQ parameters across the upper Knob section for every strip.
EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ
strip 1 strip 2 strip 3 strip 4
1 strip 5 strip 6 strip 7 strip 8
Previous, Home, Next
EQ for each strip when no strip is focused
Layouts let you store and recall custom arrangements of tracks as well as their knob assignments.
Adjusting Parameters Using the Knobs Section
To adjust track parameters using the knobs and switches of the CSM upper Knob section:
1 Bank the track so it appears on a strip.
2 Use the Function Select, Focus, and/or Expand switches to display parameters for the desired function on the upper Knob sec-
tion.
3 Do the following:
• To select from multiple choices (such as specifying a plug-in when Ins is enabled), press the knob for the desired function to
have its parameters appear. The next level of parameters appear on the knobs.
• To see additional parameters for the selected function, press the > switch in that strip (below the knobs).
• To toggle parameters, use the Sel and In switches next to the corresponding knob. For example, when Sends are shown press
that knob’s In switch to toggle the send on or off, or press Sel to toggle pre- and post-fader.
• To adjust parameters, rotate the corresponding knob.
Navigating CSM Knobs

• To navigate any strip’s column to other pages of parameters, use the lit Previous/Home/Next switches (<, , or >) at
the bottom of the column of knobs for the desired strip.

Functions and Colors
The following table describes Function Select switches, their LEDs, and their functions.
Input Input Red Red
HEAT HEAT Pink Pink
Pressing Bus on the strip for a VCA master lets you adjust output level for tracks assigned to that VCA. On S6 (only) pressing and
holding Ins lets you adjust HEAT controls (when HEAT is available).

Part IV: Using S4/S6
Chapter 10: Common Tasks
This chapter shows you how to perform the following tasks using S4 and S6:
• Nudging and Banking
• Changing Display Module Views From the Surface
• Selecting Tracks
• Attentioning Tracks
• Assigning Track Input and Output
• Adjusting Track Parameters
• Using the Transport and Jog/Shuttle Controls
• Working with Track Groups
• Pro Tools Commands Using the Track Color / Modifier Keys
References to switches and displays on S6 Fader, Process, and Knob Modules also apply to S4 CSMs unless noted otherwise.
Zones, Expand Zones, and more. Most of these videos are also relevant to S4, so check back frequently for updates.
Nudging and Banking

You can nudge and bank tracks assigned to the surface using switches on the Master Module, or from any Fader Module or CSM.
The switches described in this section let you nudge and bank tracks in standard Banking mode, Layouts mode, and within spill
zones. You can also lock strips to make them unaffected by banking (see Locking Strips).
For additional ways to arrange tracks on the surface, see Chapter 18, “Layouts.”
Nuding and Banking Using the Master Module

Switches in the Navigation section of the Master Module let you nudge and bank tracks in banking mode, spill zones and Layouts.
L Spill R Spill Clear

Clip
Mixer Close Clear

1 Solo 2
3 Home End
Display 1 4
Display 2
Settings
Sel
In
5
Shift
Figure 1. Nudge left (1), Nudge right (2), Bank left (3), Bank right (4), and Shift (5) switches
Chapter 10: Common Tasks 85

Nudging
To nudge left by one track:
 Press ◄/Mixer.
To nudge right by one track:
 Press ►/Close.
Banking
The number of tracks to bank, bank justification and other useful options are set in the Settings > Preferences page (see Banking).
To bank left:
 Press ◄◄/Home.
To bank right:
 Press ►►/End.
The following refer to the Shift Navigation Switch (5 in Figure 1), not Shift on the Fader Module/CSM or computer keyboard.
To bank so the first track appears on the first (left-most) strip:
 Press Shift + ◄◄/Home.
To bank so the last track displays on the last (right-most) strip:
 Press Shift + ►►/End.
Bank and Nudge Switch LEDs
The Bank and Nudge switch LEDs light in different colors that correspond to the element focused for banking or nudging. For ex-
ample, when the system is in standard Banking mode, one or more of the Bank and/or Nudge switches light blue to indicate that
pressing them will bank or nudge tracks.
Tracks Type Flip

Clip
Mixer Close Clear

Solo
Home End
Display 1
Bank and Nudge switches
Whenever an element is spilled into a Spill Zone, pressing the corresponding L Spill or R Spill switch so that it lights white enables
that zone for banking and nudging. In this state, the Bank/Nudge switches light in the same color as the spilled element.
Color indication of Bank and Nudge switch LEDs
L Spill / R Spill Bank/Nudge

Indicates
LEDs LEDs
Off Light Blue Banking mode
Dark Green VCA spilled to zone
Dark Blue Layout spilled to zone

White
Light Blue Workstation spilled to zone
Pink Track Type spilled to zone

You can also spill tracks by type (such as All, Audio, Aux, and Master) across as many strips as needed.
To spill tracks by type across the surface:

1 On the Master Module, make sure neither spill switch is enabled (L Spill or R Spill).
2 Press Type, then press a Master Module Soft Key to spill all tracks of the corresponding type across as many strips as required.
3 To exit, recall a Layout or Workstation, or repeat the previous steps and press the Soft Key for All.
Pressing any Type key while in Layout mode enables Banking Mode, exiting Layout mode.
Banking from the Fader Module or CSM

The User 1 and User 2 switches on Fader Modules and CSMs bank the surface left and right, respectively. User 1 and 2 also bank
Spill Zones if the zone is on that module. If the module contains both the left and right spill zones, the left zone is banked.
User 1 and User 2 switches on a Fader Module
Configuring Pro Tools to Follow Surface Banking

Banking the surface also banks tracks on-screen. In Pro Tools, this is enabled using the Preference settings for Edit or Mix Window
Follows Bank Selection. For other applications, refer to its documentation.
To have on-screen banking follow surface banking:
4 In Pro Tools, go to Setup > Preferences, and click to open the Mixing tab.
5 In the Controllers section, click to enable either or both of the following:
• Edit Window Follows Bank Selection
• Mix Window Follows Bank Selection
6 Click OK to close the Preferences dialog.
7 With either of these settings enabled, the corresponding Pro Tools window follows surface banking.
With either of these settings enabled, the corresponding Pro Tools window follows surface banking (as determined by the S4/S6
Banking settings).
Surface banking can also be configured to follow track or strip selection, attention, or both.
Spill Zones
Spill zones provide additional ways to arrange tracks on the surface. For more information, see Chapter 19, “Spill Zones.”
Banking from Pro Tools

(Scroll to Track and Scroll Into View)
EUCON surfaces fully support ICON-style Scroll to Track and Scroll into View to scroll Pro Tools windows so that the selected
track is at the far left in the Mix window and at the top of the Edit window. On S4/S6, strips bank so that the selected track is on
strip 1 (or other, as determined by the current setting for Banking Justification Mode).
• Scroll to Track lets you search for and scroll/bank to tracks by name. The searched track becomes selected.
• Scroll into View lets you scroll and bank without selecting the desired track by clicking on their on-screen name, or using their
strip Select switch.

Scroll to Track
To enable Scroll to Track:
 In Pro Tools, go to Preferences > Mixing and enable “Scroll to Track” Banks Controllers.
To utilize Scroll to Track:

1 Choose Track > Scroll to Track (or press Command-Option-F (Mac) or Control-Alt-F (Windows).
2 Enter the desired track name and click OK (you only need to type the first few letters and matches will be suggested).
Scroll into View
To scroll a track into view and bank it onto the surface without selecting it:
 Shift-Control-click (Mac) or Shift-Win-click (Windows) on the track Name on-screen.
To scroll a track into view that is off-screen but is already banked on the control surface:
 Hold Shift-Control (Mac) or Shift-Win (Windows) and do either of the following:

• Press Select on the strip for the desired track.
• Select the desired track in the Master Module Tracks screen.
To scroll a track into view and select it:

• Right-click the track name and choose Scroll Into View.
Locking Strips
You can lock strips to anchor them in their current location, unaffected by banking, nudging, spilling and Layout recall. Any chan-
nel strip can be locked in position using a Fader Module, CSM, or Master Joystick Module. You can also lock a strip on the Master
Post Module. You cannot lock strips to the Automation Module Attention Track fader.
You can optimize how banking handles locked strips in Banking mode and separately in Layouts mode using the Bank Around
Locked Strips settings.
To lock a strip on a Fader Module, CSM, or Master Joystick Module:

1 Bank or nudge, and/or recall a Layout so that the strip you want to lock is where you want
it.
Meter
2 On a Fader Module, CSM, or Master Joystick Module, press and hold Attention on the Lock
desired strip.
3
The strip Menu switch lights purple and the OLED displays Lock.
3 Press the lit Menu switch.
A lock icon appears on the Fader Module in the strip OLED to the right of the track name,
and on the corresponding Display Module strip (if present). If the Bank Around Locked
Strips setting is enabled, a duplicate appears immediately to its right, shuffling all subse-
quent strips to the right by the number of locked strips. 2
Locked strip
4 To unlock a strip, hold Attention and press Menu again.
If your system includes one or more Master Post Modules, see Locking MPM Strip 1.

Changing Display Module Views From the Surface
(Systems with Display Modules Only)
You can change the view (layout) of Display Module strips from the surface.
• Views can be changed globally across all Display Modules using switches in the Navigation section of the Master Module.
• Views can also be changed for individual strips using switches on the Fader Module for each strip. Strip views are stored in,
and recalled by, Layouts.
Both methods select previous or next views as they are listed in the Display Module Layout selector in Settings > User:
• Large Meters, Large Waveforms, Meters and Waveforms, Meters and Function, Waveforms and Function, Waveforms
and Dual Function, and Waveforms and Dual Function + Route.
To change Display Module views globally from the Master Module:
 In the Navigation switch section of the Master Module, hold Shift and do the following:
• Press Display 1 to select the previous Display Module view.
• Press Display 2 to select the next Display Module view.
WS Layout All
Mode
Tracks Type Flip

Clip
Mixer Close Clear

Solo
Home End
Display 1
Display 2
2
Settings
Sel
In
Config
Shift 1
Master Module Shift (1) and Display 1/Display 2 (2) switches
To change the Display Module view for an individual strip:
1 On a Fader Module press and hold Attention on the desired strip.

The strip Select switch lights and the OLED displays Meter below the Select switch.
2
Meter
Lock
1
Attention (1) and Select (2) on a Fader Module
2 Press the Select switch.
To reset the Display Module view for an individual strip to the current global view:
 On a Fader Module, hold Attention + Select on the desired strip for one second.
Changing Master Meter Module Views
When viewing a Meter Layout on an MMM you can adjust waveform zoom by pressing Display 1 or 2 on the Master Module. To
cycle through available MMM views, press Shift + Display 1 or 2 on the Master Module.

Selecting Tracks
You can select tracks from the Fader Module and the Master Module. Selected tracks have an orange outline in the Track Scroller
and Track Matrix.
Sum and Intercancel modes affect track selection on the Fader Module and Track Matrix. See Position for more information.
You can also set track Attention to follow Select, and vice versa. See Strips.
Selecting Tracks Using the Fader Module or CSM

To select a single track from the Fader Module or CSM:
 Press Select on the desired strip.
Select Swap
Read
9 DX ADR1
Input Rec
M S Menu LG
Solo
M
Mute
Select switch (S6 Fader Module shown)
The following steps refer to the Shift and Ctrl Track Color / Modifier keys at the bottom of Fader Module strips 1 and 2, respec-
tively. These keys execute Pro Tools commands only, and they are equivalent to the corresponding keys on the computer keyboard.
Fader Module Shift and Ctrl keys
To select sequential tracks:
1 Press Select on the desired track.

2 Press Shift + Select on the last track.
To select multiple discontiguous tracks:

1 Press Select on the desired track.
• In Sum mode, press Select on additional tracks.
• In Intercancel mode, press Command + Select (Mac) or Ctrl + Select (Windows) on additional tracks.
To select all Pro Tools tracks on the surface:
 Hold down Option (Mac) or Alt (Windows), and press Select on any track.

Selecting Tracks Using the Master Module
To select tracks using the Master Module:
1 Display the Tracks screen by pressing Tracks on the Master Module.
2 Touch Select.
Select tab on the Tracks screen
3 Touch a track in the Track Matrix to select it.
Track Matrix showing track 4 (“Mic Input”) selected
4 To select multiple tracks, do one of the following:

• In Sum mode, touch additional tracks to select them.
• In Intercancel mode, touch and hold a track and touch additional tracks to select them (also works in Sum mode).

Attentioning Tracks
One track at a time can be attentioned, letting you display, edit, and control the Attention Track using the Attention Track Editor
(Home screen) and Attention Track Fader (Automation Module). Tracks can be attentioned from Fader Modules, the Home or
Tracks Screens, and via on-screen actions in your DAW (see Surface Attention Follows DAW).
You can also set track Attention to follow Select, and vice versa. See Strips.
To attention a track from a Fader or Channel Strip Module:
 Press the desired track’s Attention key on the Fader Module.

The track appears on the Attention Track Fader.
M
Mute
12
Attention key on Fader Module strip
To attention a track from the Home screen on the Master Module:
 Tap a track in the Track Scroller or in the Meter Scroller (see Home Screen Options to set this preference).
To attention a track from the Tracks screen on the Master Module:

1 Navigate to the Tracks screen by touching Tracks at the bottom of the Home screen.
2 Select Attention.
Attention tab in the Tracks screen
3 Tap a track in the Track Matrix or the Track Scroller. The attentioned track has a blue outline.
Track Matrix showing track 4 (“Mic Input”) attentioned
If the track is also selected, it has a two-color outline: orange (upper half) and blue (lower half).
Disabling Attention on a Track
When a track is attentioned it automatically appears on the Attention Fader on the Automation Module. You can un-attention that
track by pressing the lit Automation Module Attention key.

Surface Attention Follows DAW
(Requires Pro Tools 2019.5 or Later)
You can optimize how S6 reacts to actions on-screen in your DAW using the Attention Most Recently Clicked DAW Area options
in the Attention section of Settings > User.
Attention Most Recently Clicked DAW Area settings, in Settings > User
Enable any available setting to control when a mouse click tells the surface to attention a track. For example, if Edit Window is en-
abled and you click in the time line or clicking/selecting a clip in your DAW, that track is automatically attentioned on your con-
troller. If Edit Window is not enabled, clicking in the time line or clicking/selecting a clip will not attention that track.
Similarly, if Pan Controls is enabled clicking on a track Pan control or Output window attentions that track on S6 (and on the Mas-
ter Joystick Module, if any).
Additional Information for Attention Triggers
Definitions for Attention Most Recently Clicked DAW Area Settings
Attention Setting Trigger Additional Information
Track Name Clicking a track name in Mix or Edit window
Fader Clicking a track volume fader in Mix window
Clicking in a track/playlist lane in the timeline When clicking, the attention trigger is only based
Keyboard shortcuts that move the insertion or section on the initial mouse click location. If you define a
Edit Window between tracks (such as Command Focus “p” and “;”). selection spanning multiple tracks, or bound an
See “Edit Selection Move Up / Down.” edit group, the attentioned track is based on the
first point of contact on the edit timeline.
Clicking to open a plug-in window

Plug-Ins Clicking anywhere in the plug-in window (including the
header with automation, Librarian and the Target icon)
Clicking a pan knob or puck in the Mix window
Note that clicking on a pan control n the I/O view of
Pan Controls Clicking anywhere within a floating Pan window
the Edit window will not trigger attention.
Clicking on a pan puck in the I/O view of the Edit window
Clicking to open a send window
Note that clicking a send control in any Expanded
Send Controls Clicking anywhere within an open send window (including
Sends view will not trigger attention.
the window Target)
Using the computer keyboard or EUCON key commands to

Edit Selection Move move the edit cursor or a selection up or down. For example, In Pro Tools make sure to enable
Up / Down pressing “p” to move up or “;” to move down will attention the Link Track and Edit Selection
last track in which the cursor lands.
You can specify where you want clicked DAW controls to appear on the surface by configuring Display Knobs from Most Re-
cently Clicked DAW Area.
When using a DAW that does not directly support these new features, the previously available “Attention most recently selected
track” setting remains available. When using a DAW that does directly support these new features, “Attention most recently se-
lected track” is not available.

Display Knobs from Most Recently Clicked DAW Area
Use this setting to specify where you want clicked DAW controls to appear on S4/S6 (such as only on the Master Module, on an
Expand Knob Module, or on both the Master and Expand Fader).
To configure this setting:

1 Go to Settings > User and scroll to the Attention section.
This setting is also available in Home screen Settings.
2 Choose a system element from the Display Knobs from Most Recently Clicked DAW Area selector.
Display Knobs from Most Recently Clicked DAW Area setting in Settings > User
When you click a DAW control that is enabled to Attention Most Recently Clicked DAW area, parameters for that control’s func-
tion are displayed on the chosen S4/S6 element. When the clicked control does not have a corresponding function (such as track
name) the current Primary and Backup Function will be displayed. For more information on the Primary and Backup Functions, see
Expand Knob and Expand Fader Function Settings.

Assigning Track Input and Output
You can assign track input and output from the Master Module and from channel strips. The exact steps will differ depending on
the version of Pro Tools (or other DAW) you are using:
• For Pro Tools 11.3 or earlier, available input sources or output destinations are displayed on as many Attention Track Knobs,
or channel strips knobs as required. Use the Master Module or channel strip Page switches to navigate to other available
choices, then press the knob top for the desired input or output.
• For Pro Tools 11.3.1 or later, see below.
Input Assignment
To assign track Input from the Master Module:
1 Attention a track to bring it to the Attention Track knobs.
2 Navigate to the Home screen and tap to select Input in the Function scroller. The upper left knob shows the currently assigned
input source. (See Figure 2, left image.)
3 Do any of the following:
• To exit without changing the current assignment, tap to select any other function in the Function scroller.
• To select a different source, press the upper left knob; the two upper left knobs display interface and bus sources. (See
Figure 2, right image.) Rotate the corresponding knob until the desired source is shown, then press that knob’s In switch.
• To return to the previous page of choices, press the Master Module Back switch ( ).
Sel Sel
In
In
Sel
Sel
In
In
Figure 2. Top level Input knob set ((at left) and interface/bus knob set (at right)
To assign track Input from a channel strip:

1 In the strip for the desired track (S6) or current Focus strip (S4 CSM), press Input on the Process module (see Figure 3, left im-
age) or CSM. The first knob in the Knob Module (or CSM) shows the current input assignment for the track (see Figure 3, right
image). On S6, if no Knob Module is present for that strip, the current assignment appears in the Process Module encoder dis-
play.
A-1
Figure 3. Input switch on Process Module (at left) and top level input knob set (at right

• To exit without changing the current assignment, press any other Function switch.
• To select a different input, press the knob top showing the current input assignment. The top two knobs now show interface
and bus choices. Rotate the corresponding knob until the desired source is displayed, then press the In switch for that knob.
• To return to the previous page of choices, press Back.

Output Assignment
To assign track output using the Master Module:
1 Attention a track to bring it to the Attention Track knobs.
2 Navigate to the Home screen and tap to select Bus in the Function scroller. The upper left knob displays the current output as-
signment.
• To exit without changing the current assignment, tap to select any other Function.
• To select a different output, press the knob showing the current assignment. The top two knobs show available interface and
bus outputs. Rotate the corresponding knob until the desired output is displayed, then press the In switch for that knob. This
assigns the selected output as the only output (removes any other assignments).
• To assign an additional output to the track, rotate the corresponding knob until the desired output is displayed and press the
Sel switch for the corresponding knob. This results in multiple output assignments (as indicated by the yellow Sel LED light-
ing, and on-screen in Pro Tools with a “+” in the Output assignment selector).
• To return to the previous page of choices, press the Master Module Back switch ( ).
To assign track output from a channel strip:

1 In the strip for the desired track (S6) or current Focus strip (S4 CSM), press Bus on the Process module (S6) or CSM (S4). The
top-most encoder in the Knob Module shows the current output assignment for the track (if no Knob Module is present for that
strip, the current assignment appears in the Process Module encoder display).
• To exit without changing the current assignment, press any other Function switch.
• To select a different output, press the knob showing the current assignment. The top two knobs show available interface and
bus outputs. Rotate the corresponding knob until the desired output is displayed, then press the In switch for that knob. This
assigns the selected output as the only output (removes any other assignments).
• To assign an additional output to the track, rotate the corresponding knob until the desired output is displayed and press the
Sel switch on the corresponding knob. This results in multiple output assignments (as indicated by the yellow Sel LED light-
ing, and on-screen in Pro Tools with a “+” in the Output assignment selector).
• To return to the previous page of choices, press Back.
Navigating Through Multiple Output Assignments
When there are multiple outputs assigned to a track, you can quickly navigate through assignments by pressing the corresponding
knob top. For example, if multiple bus outputs are assigned to a track you can press the bus knob to cycle through each currently
assigned output.

Adjusting Track Parameters
Many track parameters can be adjusted directly from the surface, such as track volume and pan. Other parameters are accessed by
enabling their corresponding Function switch on the Process Module, then adjusting the parameters on the Knob Module. Param-
eters assigned to a Knob Module can also be flipped to the faders.
To adjust track volume:

1 Bank the track so it appears on a strip.
2 Adjust the fader.
To adjust track pan:

• S6: Rotate the knob on the Process Module for the desired track. If Pan is not shown on the Process Module, hold down the
Back switch directly below the Process Module knob and then press the Pan switch.
• S4: Focus the desired strip, press the Pan function select switch on the same CSM, then rotate the desired Pan knob.
To adjust a plug-in parameter, send, or other parameter:

1 S4 Only: Focus the desired strip (bank the desired track to the surface then press its CSM Focus switch so it is lit).
2 On the Process Module or CSM for the desired track, press the corresponding Function switch:
Input Input Red Red
HEAT HEAT Pink Pink S4 Only
Pressing Bus on the strip for a VCA master lets you adjust output level for tracks assigned to that VCA. Pressing and holding Ins
lets you adjust HEAT controls (when HEAT is available).
3 Adjust parameters using the knobs and switches of the Knob Module or upper knob section on S4 CSMs.
• To select from multiple choices (such as specifying a plug-in when Ins is enabled), press the knob for the desired function to
have its parameters appear on the Knob Module. The next level of parameters appear on the knobs.
• To see additional parameters for the selected function, press the > switch in that strip on the Knob Module.
• To toggle parameters, use the Sel and In switches next to the corresponding knob. For example, when Sends are shown on a
Knob Module strip press that knob’s In switch to toggle the send on or off, or press Sel to toggle pre- and post-fader).
• To adjust parameters, rotate the corresponding knob.
• To have all available parameters appear across all controls of the S6 Knob Module or S4 CSM, press Exp on the Process Mod-
ule to enable Expand mode. You can also configure functions to automatically expand when selected. For more information,
see Expand.

Flip to Faders
The Flip switch on the Master Module lets you flip parameter control of certain functions from knobs onto faders across the entire
surface.
WS Layout All
Mode
Tracks Type Flip

Clip
Mixer Close Clear

Solo
Home End
Display 1
Display 2
Settings
Sel
In Shift
Config
Master Module Flip switch
To flip rows of parameters sequentially to faders:

1 Press Flip on the Master Module.
The LED lights white and the first row of knobs flip to the faders. Volume control flips to the corresponding row of knobs, which
also light white. On the Fader Module display, the currently flipped parameter name appears below the track name. Automation
Mode indicator LEDs follow parameters when in Flip mode.
2 Press Flip again.
The second row of parameters flips to the faders, and volume control moves to the newly flipped knobs.
3 To flip the next row of parameters, press Flip again.
4 To exit Flip mode, continue pressing Flip until no more rows of parameters are available (it automatically disables), or press
Shift + Flip.
Certain functions automatically cancel Flip mode, such as spilling tracks and enabling Expand on a flipped strip.
You can also adjust parameters from the faders using Expand.

Using the Transport and Jog/Shuttle Controls
The Automation Module provides a Transport section and Jog/Shuttle Wheel.
Using the Transport Controls
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Figure 4. Transport controls
This section describes the function of switches in the default Pro Tools appset. Transport switches can be customized in the Soft
Key Editor. For more information, see Chapter 8, “Soft Keys.”
The following table lists the primary and Shift functions of the Transport switches. Other functions require use of the modifier keys
on the Fader Module or computer keyboard.
Legend Switch Label Primary Function Shift Function Other Functions
1 ||< RTZ (Return to Zero) End of Session
2 |< Select Previous Clip Shift (Add to Selection) Previous Clip (Opt/Win)
3 >| Select Next Clip Shift (Add to Selection) Next Clip (Opt/Win)
4 Back + > Back and Play Forward and Play
5 R Mode Record Mode Abort Record
Zoom to Session (Opt/Win)

6 Loc Zoom Toggle Zoom to Selection
Previous Zoom (Cmd/Alt)
7 Back Back Forward
8 << Rewind
9 >> Fast Forward
10 Stop Retrospective MIDI
11 > Play Half Speed Playback
12 Record Half Speed Record
13 Loop Loop Playback Dynamic Transport

Setup (Transport Lock)
When the Transport Setup switch is enabled, the Transport switches lock to the currently focused application on the attentioned
workstation. Only the Transport switches lock; the Locate and Numeric Keypad sections always follow workstation switching.
Setup switch
Using the Jog/Shuttle Wheel

The Jog/Shuttle Wheel can be assigned to several functions by enabling one of its mode switches.
This section describes the function of switches in the default Pro Tools appset. Wheel switches can be customized using the Soft
Key Editor. For more information, see Chapter 8, “Soft Keys.”
1 3
Figure 5. Jog/Shuttle Wheel with Jog (1), Shuttle (2), and Shift (3) switches
The ring of LEDs surrounding the wheel are not implemented.
Jog
To Jog with the wheel:

1 Press Jog so it lights.
2 Spin the wheel clockwise to jog forward or counterclockwise to jog backward. The speed is proportional to the wheel movement,
and stops when you remove your finger from the wheel.
3 To exit Jog mode, press Jog again so it is unlit, or enable a different Wheel mode, or press any Transport switch.
Shuttle
To Shuttle with the wheel:

1 Press Shuttle so it lights.
2 Spin the wheel clockwise to shuttle forward or counterclockwise to shuttle backward. The speed is proportional to the wheel
movement. Shuttle continues after you remove your finger (and after the wheel stops) at the initiated speed.
3 To exit Shuttle mode, press Shuttle again so it is unlit, or enable a different Wheel mode, or press any Transport switch.

Shift
Hold down the Wheel Shift switch (3 in Figure 5) to access the secondary (purple) Wheel functions. This Shift switch only affects
switches surrounding the Wheel. The Shift switch on the Master Module and Fader Modules does not affect the Wheel switches.
Switch Label Primary Function Shift Function
Jog Jog (wheel)
Shuttle Shuttle (wheel)
Trim Move Selection (wheel)
– / Function Nudge Clip Gain Down Zoom Amplitude
+ / Move Selection Nudge Clip Gain Up Move Selection
Zoom Horizontal / Scroll Horizontal Zoom Horizontal Scroll Horizontal
Zoom Vertical / Scroll Vertical Zoom Track Height Scroll Vertical
Shift

Working with Track Groups
You can add or remove tracks from existing Groups, and suspend individual Groups, from the Master Module and Knob Module.
To add or remove tracks from a Group:

• Press Grp on a Process Module (S6) or CSM (S4). All existing Groups are assigned to the Knob Module(s) in that strip and
shown on the Display Module (if any, in a Function view).
• Navigate to the Home screen, then tap to select Group in the Function Scroller. All existing Groups are assigned to the At-
tention Track knobs, lit to indicate group membership of the currently attentioned track.
Figure 6. Groups selected in the Home screen
2 If there are more Groups than available knobs, press either of the lit Page (< >) keys on the Knob Module, or use the Master
Module Page switches to see more (see Using Page Switches to Navigate Attention Track Knobs).
Group membership for the track is indicated by a lit In switch for all Groups in which the track is a member. All currently enabled
Groups are indicated by a lit Sel switch.
3 To add or remove a track from the current Group, press its In switch (or its knob) on either the Knob Module or Master Module.
4 To suspend (or activate) a Group, press its Sel switch. When lit, the Groups is active; when unlit, it is suspended/inactive.
See also Momentary Group Suspend, and .

Pro Tools Commands Using the Track Color / Modifier Keys
This section lists a variety of Pro Tools commands that use the Track Color / Modifier keys at the bottom of the Fader Module S6)
and CSM (S4). Note that multiple keys can be held down together. The table lists each key’s function for Mac and Windows. The
commands refer to knobs, faders, and switches on the Fader Module.
Track Color / Modifier keys
Track Color / Modifier Key functions for Mac and Windows

Command/
Shift Ctrl Opt/Win User 1 User 2 Cancel OK
Alt
Mac Shift Control Option Command Expand Fader Zone Expand Fader Zone Cancel OK
Page 1 Page 2
Windows Shift Ctrl Win Alt
Do to All and Do to All Selected

To enable Do to All:
 Hold down Option (Mac) or Alt (Windows).
To enable Do to Selected:
 Hold down Option + Shift (Mac) or Alt + Shift (Windows).
The following commands apply to all or all selected tracks on the surface:
• Select, mute, solo, record, input, and automation modes
• Plug-in bypass, send mute
• Assigning I/O, plug-ins, and sends.
OK and Cancel
If there is a dialog window open in Pro Tools or other connected DAW, the OK and Cancel switches on the Fader Modules flash.
When the dialog is on the currently focused workstation they flash green; when on a workstation that is not focused, the switches
flash orange. Press OK to confirm or Cancel to cancel the dialog.
Selecting Tracks
To select contiguous tracks:
1 Press Select on a track.
2 Hold down Shift.
3 Press Select on another track. All tracks in between are selected.
To select non-contiguous tracks:

1 Press Select on a track.
2 Hold down Command (Mac) or Ctrl (Windows).
3 Press Select on another track to add to the selection(s).

Resetting Parameters
To set a parameter to its default value:
 Hold down Option (Mac) or Alt (Windows) and touch a fader or knob.
With Pro Tools, you can also press the knob on most functions to reset to default value (without holding down the modifier key).
Toggling Sends In/Out

To toggle sends in or out:
1 Hold down Control + Command (Mac) or Ctrl + Alt (Windows).
2 Press Select on a track displaying a top-level send to toggle it in and out.
Momentary Group Suspend

“Clutching” Control
 Hold down Control (Mac) or Win (Windows).

This temporarily disables Pro Tools track groups so any operation on a track in a group works only on the individual track.
Automation
To enable or disable plug-in controls for automation:
1 Hold down Control + Option + Command (Mac) or Ctrl + Win + Alt (Windows).
2 Click the mouse on the Plug-In automation enable button in the plug-in header.
This toggles the automation status for all controls in that plug-in.
To display track automation data on Display Modules:

1 Hold down Control + Command (Mac) or Ctrl + Win (Windows).
2 Touch a fader or knob.
On-screen in Pro Tools, the Track View for that track show the corresponding automation. On Display Modules (if any) when
set to any Waveform view, automation data is shown along with the waveform.

Chapter 11: Recording
This chapter shows you how to perform many recording tasks with S4/S6:
• Record Enabling Tracks
• Configuring Record Mode
• Soft Keys for Recording
If your system includes a Master Post Module, you can use it for PEC/DIR-style monitor switching and punch recording. For more
information, see Using the Master Post Module.
Record Enabling Tracks

To record in an audio application, the track must be record enabled and the Transport must be armed for recording.
To arm the Transport for recording:
 On the Automation Module, press Record on the Transport.
You can record enable tracks using the Fader Module and the Master Module.
Record Enabling Tracks Using the Fader Module

To record enable tracks from the Fader Module:
 Press Rec on the desired tracks.
To disable a record-enabled track from the Fader Module:
 Press a red flashing Rec switch.
Select Swap
Read
9 DX ADR1
Input Rec
M S Menu LG
Solo
M
Mute
Fader Module record switch
The following steps refer to the Shift and Ctrl Track Color / Modifier keys at the bottom of Fader Module/CSM strips 1 and 2, re-
spectively. These keys execute Pro Tools commands only, and are equivalent to the corresponding keys on the computer keyboard.
To record enable contiguous tracks from the Fader Module:

1 Press Rec on the first track.
2 Hold down Shift and press Rec on another strip.
Chapter 11: Recording 105

To record enable all Pro Tools tracks on the surface:
 Hold down Option (Mac) or Alt (Windows), and press Rec on any track.
To record enable all selected Pro Tools tracks on the surface:
 Hold down Option + Shift (Mac) or Alt + Shift (Windows), and press Rec on any track.
If the track you pressed Rec on was not selected, it is still record enabled.
Record Enabling Tracks Using the Master Module

To record enable tracks using the Master Module:
1 To display the Tracks screen, touch Tracks at the bottom of the Home screen.
2 Touch Record (above the Track Scroller).
Record tab in the Tracks screen
3 Touch the desired tracks in the Track Matrix.
Track Matrix with tracks enabled for recording (track tiles flash red)
To disable a record-enabled track using the Master Module:

1 Touch Record.
2 Touch a record-enabled track.
To disable all record-enabled tracks using the Master Module:

1 Touch Record.
2 Touch Clear.
Indication of Record Status

The following flash red when a track is record enabled:
• Rec switch on that Fader Module strip.
• Recording indicator in the Track Matrix, Track Scroller, and Fader in Function Scroller.
• The entire track in the Track and Meter Scrollers.
The indicators that flash red when record enabled light solid red during recording.
See also Use Pro Tools Track Record Mode Colors.

Configuring Record Mode
The Transport switch R Mode lets you cycle through all available recording modes on the current DAW.
You can specify the Record Mode and other recording-related functions from the Soft Keys. See Soft Keys for Recording.
To configure the current Record Mode:

1 On the Automation Module, press the R Mode switch. The next available record mode is enabled.
Figure 7. R Mode
2 Press R Mode again to cycle to the next available record mode.
Soft Keys for Recording

The Automation Module Soft Keys provide many frequently used commands related to recording. The following examples refer
to the default appset for Pro Tools.
To toggle Pre/Post roll, or Count Off on or off:

1 Make sure the right bank of Automation Module Soft Keys are on their default page 1 (Extras).
Figure 8. Automation Module Soft Keys default page 1 (“Extras” page at right)
2 Press the Soft Keys for Pre Roll or Post Roll to toggle them on/off.
3 Press the Soft Key for Count off to toggle it on/off.
To access more recording commands in the Soft Keys:
 Press the Recording Soft Key in the Automation Module right bank.

Chapter 12: Using the Master Post Module
The S4/S6 Master Post Module is a traditional film monitoring panel that lets you switch track monitoring between input sources
and punch tracks into and out of record. A comprehensive Speaker/Monitor Control section is provided, along with a bank of cus-
tomizable Soft Keys and strip Link and Lock controls.
Master Post Module (MPM) strips can have any type of DAW track assigned to them. Tracks are assigned to MPM strips from the
Tracks/Layouts page. These and all MPM operations are provided in the following sections.
• Master Post Module Top Panel
• Assigning Tracks to MPM Strips
• Track Monitoring and Recording
• Linking and Locking Strips
• Using the Speaker Controls
• Using the Soft Keys
Using Multiple Master Post Modules

When more than one MPM is installed in a system they can be configured to mirror each others tracks or to work independently.
• When the Tracks > Local Option setting Mirror Post Strips on Multiple Post Modules is enabled, all Master Post Modules’
tracks act as a single, mirrored unit. Track assignments are mirrored (identical) on all Master Post Modules.
• When disabled, each Master Post Module acts independently of other Master Post Modules. In the Strip scroller (Post Lay-
outs), unique Master Post Module strips are displayed for each module and numbered according to the current setting for
Number of Post Strips in Post Layout. Different tracks can be assigned, recalled, and controlled to or from each module.
Using MPMs in Multi-Operator Configurations
In systems with more than one MPM and only one recorder, make sure all MPMs are connected to the S6 that is connected to the
recorder. This includes multi-operator configurations. For more information, see the S6 Networking Guidelines.pdf, available for
download from your Avid account and from our Knowledge Base.
Recorder Playback
Workstation Ports Workstation Ports
1 1
WAN/Internet 2 2
S6 #1 S6 #2
Switch Switch
Port 2 Port 1
Ethernet connections for multiple Master Post Modules (dual-operator configuration shown)
Chapter 12: Using the Master Post Module 108

Master Post Module Top Panel
The Master Post Module provides five primary sections of controls and displays.
Link
Fold
Alt 1 Down User Layouts
3 4 Solo Solo Solo Solo Solo Solo Solo Solo Solo Solo
5
Alt 2 Spkr Insert Source
Auto
Mute Mute Mute Mute Mute Mute Mute Mute Mute Mute Main Dim Cut Match
Speaker Control
Ready Ready Ready Ready Ready Ready Ready Ready Ready Ready
Speakers
< > Master FLY BG’s FX DLX MX Atmos Music Spots Main
2 1
Rec On
Rec Off
6
Input
Sum All On
PB
Layouts Src 1-10 Fold
Master Post Module top panel
Master Post Module Main Sections
Section Description
10 identical channel strips, each with the following controls and displays (listed from the top down):
1 – Strips
Link, Solo, Mute, Ready, OLED, Record paddle, Input Monitor paddle, Track Color indicator
2–<> Bank left (<) and right (>) switches, to bank the MPM strips only.
3 – Attention Enables Link Master Assign mode, and Lock Strip 1 mode.
4 – Link Enables Link mode to select tracks for linked (ganged) control, and locks/unlocks strip 1 (only).
Switches for selecting monitor outputs (Alt 1, Alt 2, Main), modes (such as Dim and Cut), and other
5 – Monitoring essential monitoring functions. These switches can be customized and re-assigned to other func-
tions in the Soft Key Editor.
One bank of Soft Keys with 15 customizable assignments. Default assignments are provided in the
6 – Soft Keys
Factory appset. MPM Soft Key assignments are saved and loaded with other S6 Soft Key sets.

Assigning Tracks to MPM Strips
Tracks are assigned to MPM strips from the Tracks screen in Assign Post mode. MPM track assignments are managed in
Post Layouts, and are unaffected by standard surface banking or nudging.
To assign tracks to MPM strips:
 Recall a Post Layout containing MPM assignments. You can recall Post Layouts from the MPM Soft Keys or from the Master
Module Tracks screen in Assign Post mode (see next).
To assign tracks to a Post Layout:

1 Navigate the touchscreen to the Tracks screen.
2 In the Navigation Switch section of the Master Module, press and hold Shift.
On the Tracks screen, the Assign button becomes Assign Post.
Home End
Display 1
Display 2
Settings
Sel
In Shift
Config
Master Module Shift (left) and Assign Post mode (right)
3 While still holding Shift tap Assign Post.

The Assign Post button lights purple and the lower strip scroller shows Post strips (Post 1, Post 2 and so on).
Assign Post in the Tracks/Layouts screen
4 Assign tracks to MPM strips as you would in a standard Track layout.

• Tap Track blocks in the upper track matrix to select the tracks you want in the Layout, then tap a strip block at the bottom of
the screen to place the currently selected track(s) starting on that strip.
• Repeat to add and arrange other tracks in the Layout. To include tracks from a different application or workstation, focus that
application and then repeat the previous steps to add its tracks to the Layout.
• Swipe the lower strip scroller to the left to access additional MPM strips (if any, as determined by the Number of Post Strips
in Post Layout setting and/or the number of MPMs in your system).
• When you have selected and placed tracks onto strips, tap Store. The Store Post Layouts grid appears.
In the lower Strip scroller, all strips (scroller at the bottom of the screen) are outlined in bright green, indicating they will be
stored and recalled with the Layout. Tap to deselect the strip blocks for any strips you do not want stored in and recalled with
the Post Layout.
• Tap a block in the Store Post Layouts grid. The block highlights and is automatically numbered, and Store appears at the far
right of the Layouts Commands across the bottom of the screen. The Layout Name field also appears with a flashing cursor.
• To store the Layout with only its assigned number for its name, tap Store. To enter a custom name for the Post Layout tap the
Layout Name field, enter a name using the on-screen keyboard, then tap Enter.
For complete instructions on creating Layouts, see Layouts.
To exit Assign Post mode:
 Press Assign Post again, or press the Attention or Select buttons on the Tracks screen.
The lower Strip Scroller reverts to showing standard surface strips. On the MPM, the tracks you assigned in the Post Layout re-
main on their corresponding MPM strips.

Post Layouts
MPM track assignments are not stored in standard track Layouts but are instead managed in separate Post Layouts. Just like stan-
dard Layouts, Post Layouts are maintained in Titles and sessions, can be saved, loaded, renamed, and edited.
Post Layouts and Virtual Strips
The Number of Post Strips in Post Layout setting in the Tracks > Local Options screen lets you define how many virtual strips
to include in Post Layouts, so that Post Layouts are not limited in size to the number of physical MPM strips in a system. When
saved, Layouts save the maximum number of possible virtual strips. For example, with Post Layouts you can define up to 80 virtual
strips, so saved Post Layouts maintain 80 strips. This prevents Post Layouts from losing any assignments if transferred to and
loaded on a system with fewer MPMs or virtual strips than the original system.
Once you add virtual strips they are not removed or deleted; reducing the number of Post Strips merely hides the previously avail-
able strips and they are no longer visible. They are not editable but by default are saved to Titles and sessions. You can control
whether hidden virtual strips are retained using the Store Hidden Virtual Strips in Layouts setting.
Banking and Spilling Strips

The MPM provides bank left and right switches to bank tracks across MPM strips. These switches (< and >) become available when
the currently recalled Post Layout includes more than 10 strips, or when a VCA with more than nine member tracks is spilled.
MPMs bank independently of the rest of the surface.
To bank the MPM:

1 Recall a Post Layout with more than 10 tracks, or spill a VCA (assigned to an MPM strip) that has more than 10 member tracks.
2 On the MPM, press < to bank left or > to bank right.
To spill a VCA on the MPM:

1 Recall a Post Layout or bank the MPM so that a VCA appears on an MPM strip.
2 Make sure the MPM master Link switch (upper left corner) is off/disabled.
3 In the MPM strip for the VCA, press the Link switch (at the top of the strip controls).
The member tracks of the VCA spill across as many MPM strips as necessary. If there are more than ten, press < or > to bank
the MPM.
4 To unspill, press any strip Link switch.
VCA Spill on an MPM does not support nested VCAs. VCAs can only be spilled one layer deep.

Track Monitoring and Recording
Use the Monitoring and Record paddles to toggle track monitoring and to punch tracks in and out. Paddles can control individual
tracks, or multiple, linked tracks.
At the time of this writing, the MPM requires Pro Tools 12.5.2 or higher for basic functionality. Some features require
Pro Tools 12.6 or higher. For other DAWs, contact their manufacturer.
Configure Pro Tools

To configure Pro Tools for MPM monitor switching and punch recording:
1 In Pro Tools, choose Setup > Preferences, and click to navigate to the Operation tab.
2 In the Record section, do the following:
• Enable the Transport RecordLock setting.
• Enable the PEC/Direct Style Input Monitoring setting.
• Click OK.
Onscreen, TrackInput Monitor controls light green. On MPM strips the Monitoring paddles light green.
Monitoring
The MPM Monitor paddles toggle track monitoring between input and playback.
To toggle track monitoring:

1 For input monitoring, push the Input paddle up.
2 For playback (disc) monitoring, push the Input paddle down.
Solo and Mute
MPM strips also provide standard Solo and Mute switches.
Recording
The MPM Record paddles punch tracks in and out. The Record Ready switches on each strip arm the paddles for punch recording.
To punch in and out with the MPM:

1 Configure Pro Tools for the desired punch record mode (DestructivePunch, TrackPunch, or QuickPunch).
2 Configure other DAW settings as appropriate for the chosen punch record mode.
3 On the MPM, press the (record) Ready switch on each strip you want to punch so that its LED lights red.
Pro Tools indicates DestructivePunch- and TrackPunch-enabled status by flashing Record Enable LEDs in alternating red and
blue. You can configure the MPM to always indicate record status with Pro Tools colors or to use only red by enabling or disabling
the Use Pro Tools Track Record Mode Colors preference in the Settings > User page.
4 Begin playback.
5 To punch in, push the MPM Record paddle up (On).
6 To punch out, push the MPM Record paddle down (Off).

VCA Punch Recording
MPM Record Ready switches arm and disarm Pro Tools tracks including slaves of VCAs, and indicate Ready status of tracks,
VCAs, and slaves of VCAs, without requiring any modifier keys be engaged while toggling Record Ready status.
While the Transport is stopped:

• Pressing a Record Ready switch record enables the corresponding Pro Tools track; pressing again record disables the track.
• Pressing a Record Ready switch on a VCA places all its member tracks into Record Ready. When the VCA is in Record Ready
you can spill the VCA and disarm individual slaves. The Record Ready switch on any VCA arms and disarms all slaves.
The MPM Record Ready switch LEDs light red when the corresponding Pro Tools track Record Enable button is in any of the fol-
lowing states:
Pro Tools Record Enable State Mode and Status
Flashing Blue and Red TrackPunch/DestructivePunch Enabled and Record Enabled
Solid Blue TrackPunch/DestructivePunch Enabled but not Record Enabled
Flashing Red Record Enabled, but not TrackPunch/DestructivePunch Enabled
Solid Red Recording
Linking and Locking Strips

The MPM provides several types of strip Linking, to be able to control functions on multiple strips in unison. Linking is maintained
for as long as the current session is open. You can also lock strip 1 to its currently assigned track. All linking states are recallable
with Post Layouts in S4/S6 19.5 or later.
Basic Link
In this mode, all linked strips respond in unison when the following functions are engaged on any of the linked strips: Ready, Re-
cord paddles (punch in/out), Solo, and Mute.
To link strips:
1 Press the master Link switch (in the upper left corner so that it flashes yellow.
2 Select strips to link by pressing their individual Link switches so that they flash yellow.
3 Bank to other strips using the MPM < and > switches to select those tracks to include in the Link.
4 To exit Link setup mode, press the master Link switch again.
The master Link switch and all selected strip Link switches stop flashing and light yellow.
5 If you need to remove a strip from the Link, repeat the previous steps and deselect the strip to remove (press its Link switch so
it is unlit/not flashing.
Link Master
When a strip is designated as a Link Master, its controls affect all linked tracks but each individual (linked) track can still be
punched, soloed, and muted independently.
To designate a Link Master:

y
1 Press the MPM Attention and (master) Link switches simultaneously so that both switch LEDs flash.
2 Press the Link switch on the strip you want to designate as the Link Master.
Mai n
The Attention and (master) Link switches stop flashing, the (master) Link switch lights yellow, and the selected
Link Master strip Link switch also lights yellow. In the OLED for the Link Master, horizontal lines appear above
and below the track name.

Master Record
When strips are designated as Master Record tracks, they can be punched in unison while maintaining independent (unlinked) con-
trol of punch out, Record Ready, Solo and Mute. When punching in tracks on independent (non-mirrored) MPMs, Master Record
strips indicate record status of any track on any MPM.
To designate Master Record tracks:

y
1 Press and hold the (master) Link switch for at least two seconds, so that all strip Link LEDs flash quickly.
2 Press a flashing Link switch on one or more strips to select them as Master Record tracks.
Mai n
When selected, strip Link switches light yellow and stop flashing. In the OLED for each Master Record track,
vertical lines appear on either side of the track name.
3 To deselect a Master Record track, press its lit Link switch so it flashes.
4 To exit Master Record assign mode, press the (master) Link switch so it becomes unlit.
Link Master and Master Record

Strips can be designated as both a Link Master and a Master Record track. This state is indicated by the track name surrounded by
a yellow box.
Mai n
Indication of a track that is both a Link Master and Master Record
Locking MPM Strip 1

You can lock strip 1 on an MPM so that it remains available and is unaffected by MPM banking and spilling, or by recall of Post
Layouts. This is useful for configuring a strip as a traditional PEC/Dir master strip.
To lock an MPM strip:

1 Configure a Post Layout, or bank an MPM, so that the desired track is assigned to strip 1 on an MPM.
2 On that MPM, press and hold the Attention switch in the upper left corner.
3 While still holding Attention, press the strip 1 Link switch.
The track name display for strip 1 becomes highlighted in yellow. Strip lock remains in effect for as long as the current session
is open, or until you unlock it.
4 To unlock strip 1, hold Attention and press the strip 1 Link switch again.

Using the Speaker Controls
The MPM provides a set of Speaker and monitor control switches. The default assignments for these switches are labeled on the
switches, and include speaker select (such as Alt 1, Alt 2, and Main), modes (such as Cut, Dim, Fold Down and Insert), and spe-
cial purpose switches such as Auto Match. Auto Match lets you punch out of an automation write pass.
Fold
Auto
Main Dim Cut Match
Speaker Control
Speaker Control
All switches in the Speaker Control section are Soft Keys that can be re-assigned and customized in the Soft Key Editor by selecting
Post Module Soft Keys from the module selector.
Using the Soft Keys

Each MPM provides a bank of 15 Soft Keys below the Speaker Control switches. A default (factory) set of MPM Soft Key assign-
ments is provided to let you recall Post Layouts, control monitoring options, and perform other frequently used functions. Like all
Soft Keys, you can customize the MPM Soft Keys using the S6 Soft Key Editor.
Soft Keys
For complete instructions on using the Soft Key Editor, see Soft Keys.

Chapter 13: Using Master Display Meter Modules
Display Modules can be designated as Master Display Meter Modules (referred to in this document as MMMs) to provide dedi-
cated meter displays for important session elements. With S6 up to two MMMs can be used; S4 supports one MMM. When two
MMMs are designated, both mirror each other.
You can configure MMMs to show meters, waveforms, or meters and waveforms for 8 to 32 tracks (up to four rows of 8 tracks
each). You can select MMM views separately from Display Module views, store MMM views in Meter Layouts, and link Meters
Layouts to Track Layouts.
Views can be changed from the Tracks screen Local Options, using Soft Keys, or by pressing SHIFT + Display 1/Display 2 on
the Master Module while in Meters view.
Figure 9. Master Meter Module showing 2 rows in Meters and Waveforms view (upper) and 4 rows in Large Meters view (lower)
Chapter 13: Using Master Display Meter Modules 116

Designating Master Meter Modules
MMMs can be added to your surface configuration by designating already assigned Display Modules to become Master Meter
Modules, or by adding Display Modules to the surface configuration as Master Meter Modules.
To designate existing Display Modules to use as Master Meter Modules:

1 Go to Settings > Surface, then press Config.
2 Press Display.
Figure 10. Display command in Settings > Surface, Config
3 Follow the on-screen instructions to designate up to two (S6) or one (S4) Display Modules as Master Meter Modules.
Figure 11. Assign Master Display Meter Hardware screen in Settings > Surface, Config
To add new Display Modules as Master Meter Modules:

1 Edit your surface configuration by adding an empty chassis with no modules (see the S6 Guide.pdf for detailed instructions):
• Go to Settings > Surface, press Config, then press Surface.
• Enter your frame width (number of chassis with modules plus one or two empty chassis) and frame depth, then press Next.
• Drag module stacks to the frame diagram until it matches your physical arrangement of modules (leave MMM stacks empty).
• Press Next, touch to confirm the flashing modules, then press Next when all modules are confirmed.
2 Drag available (unused) numbered Display Module icons to the frame diagram above empty chassis, or chassis that only have
Master Post or Master Joystick modules.
Figure 12. Settings > Surface, Config showing how to add a Master Meter Module
3 Press Next, then press Done.

Meter Layouts
Assigning Tracks to MMM Meters
The Meters menu key on the Home page displays the Meters screen, where you assign tracks to meters, store and recall Meter Lay-
outs, and link Meter Layouts to standard Layouts.
To create and assign tracks to Meter Layouts:

1 Navigate to the Home screen and press Meters. Or press Shift + Tracks on the Master Module.
When showing the Meters screen, the Tracks switch lights orange.
Figure 13. Meters command in the Home screen
2 In the Meters screen, press to enable Assign and assign tracks to Meters Layouts.
Assigning tracks to Meter Layouts in the Meters screen is very similar to assigning tracks to other types of Layouts.
• Tap Track blocks in the upper track matrix to select tracks, then
tap a strip block at the bottom of the screen to place the currently
selected track(s) starting on that meter.
The number of available Meter rows can be configured between 1
and 4 rows (see Configuring MMM Display Settings).
• Repeat to add and arrange other tracks in the Meter Layout. To
include tracks from a different application or workstation, focus
that application and then repeat the previous steps to add its
tracks to the Meter Layout.
• When you have selected and placed tracks onto meters, tap
Store. The Store Meter Layouts grid appears.
In the lower Meter blocks (at the bottom of the screen) all meters
are outlined in bright green indicating they will be stored and re-
called with the Meter Layout. Tap to deselect the blocks for any
strips you do not want stored in/recalled with the Meter Layout.
• Tap a block in the Store Meter Layouts grid. The block high-
lights and is automatically numbered, and Store appears at the
far right of the commands across the bottom of the screen. The
Meter Layout Name field also appears with a flashing cursor.
• To link the current Meter Layout to an existing Layout, tap the
desired Layout in the upper area of the Store grid. The Meter
Layout number appears in the block for that Layout.
• To store the Meter Layout with only its assigned number for its
name, tap Store. To enter a custom name for the Meter Layout
tap the Meter Layout Name field, enter a name using the
on-screen keyboard, then tap Enter.
For complete instructions on creating track, Post, and Meter Layouts, see the S6 Guide.
Soft Keys for Meter Layouts
Like other types of Layouts, Meter Layouts are available in the Soft Key Editor for assigning to custom Soft Keys.
Soft Keys for Meter Layouts
Command Command Type Category 1 Category 2 Category 3
Meter Layout 1–n Surface > Titles > Meter Layout Recall > <Meter Layout 1–n>

Recalling Meter Layouts
You can recall stored Meter Layouts from the Master Module Soft Keys when in Meters view.
To recall Meter Layouts:

• Navigate to the Home screen and press Meters.
• Or press Shift + Tracks on the Master Module.
2 Press the Layout Mode switch on the Master Module.
The Master Module Soft Keys show available Meter Layouts. (Meter Layouts are only available when in Meters view.)
As previously described, you can also link Meter Layouts to standard Track Layouts so they recall together.
When recalling standard Layouts from the Soft Keys (Layout Mode), any Layouts that have linked Meter Layouts are indicated
with a unique icon:
Figure 14. Soft Key icon for a linked Meter Layout
Configuring MMM Display Settings

The controls in the Meter Layouts section of the Tracks > Local Options screen lets you configure the layout of MMM displays.
• The Layout selector sets whether MMMs show Large Meters, Large Waveforms, or Meters and Waveforms. When viewing
a Meter Layout on an MMM you can adjust waveform zoom by pressing Display 1 or 2 on the Master Module. While actively
assigning tracks to Meter Layouts, pressing Shift + Display 1 or 2 cycles through the available views (you can adjust MMM
zoom at any time from the Additional Master Meter Display Settings).
• The Number of Meter Rows slider configures the MMMs to display tracks in 1, 2, 3 or 4 rows (each row can show 8 tracks).
Figure 15. Meter Layouts settings in Tracks > Local Options
Both of these settings are stored per Meter Layout.
Additional Master Meter Display Settings
The Master Meter Display settings in Settings > User let you control the following aspects of Meter displays (these settings are
similar to those available for standard Display Module views):
Waveform Zoom Sets the size of displayed waveforms. When viewing a Meter preset on an MMM you can adjust the Waveform
Zoom by pressing Display 1 on the Master Module.
Figure 16. Master Meter Display section in Settings > User

The following settings affect both Master Meter Display Modules and standard Display Modules, and are located in the Common
section of Settings > User, Display Module.
Show Automation Enables display of automation on waveforms.
Reverse Automation Lanes Toggles the orientation of displayed automation left-to-right.
Automation Opacity Sets the opacity of displayed automation between 0 (fully transparent) and 100 (fully opaque).
Auto-Load Layouts and Meters

In Settings > System, the previously available choice for Layouts has been changed and is now Layouts and Meters. When en-
abled, S4/S6 loads all standard and Meter Layouts stored in a Title, session or project.

Chapter 14: Editing
This chapter shows you how you can edit Pro Tools audio tracks using S4/S6.
• On systems that include Display Modules, you can edit audio using Knob Modules or CSMs (see Editing from the Surface).
• All systems can use the Wheel and its surrounding switches, the Locate switches, and Soft Keys to select and edit clips (see
Editing with the Wheel, Locate Switches, and Soft Keys).
Editing from the Surface

(Display Module Systems with Pro Tools Only)
S4/S6 lets you edit clips using knobs and their Sel and In switches on Knob or Channel Strip Modules (or faders when Flip is en-
abled). You can move a clip, trim the head or tail, adjust Fade In and Fade Out, and adjust Clip Gain.
Clips are targeted for editing when they reach the playhead on the Display Modules when in any Waveform view as shown in
Figure 17. Resolution of edits and moves using the Sel and In switches is determined by the Pro Tools Nudge value, which can also
be adjusted directly from S4/S6. Edits made by rotating S6 knobs use the current Knob Preference settings (see Knob Speed and
Sensitivity).
Visual feedback is provided both in the Pro Tools Edit window and on the channel Display Modules by a variety of yellow outlines
that vary depending on the mode.
To move or edit a clip:

1 Make sure Display Modules are configured in one of the available Waveform views. If necessary, go to Settings > Preferences
and select one of these views in the Display Module section.
You can adjust the zoom resolution of the Waveform displays in Settings > Preferences, and quickly zoom out or in using the Dis-
play 1 and Display 2 switches on the Master Module. See Waveform Zoom.
2 On a Process Module or CSM, press Edit on the strip you want to edit. The Knob Module for that strip light in fuchsia and dis-
play edit parameters, the number and type of which vary depending on track type as follows:
Audio Tracks Clip Gain, Move, Trim Back, and Trim Front, Fade Out, Fade In, Nudge Amount, Undo and Redo.
Instrument and MID Tracks Move, Trim Back, Trim Front, Nudge Amount, Undo and Redo.
Systems with two Knob Modules available for the strip can access all parameters simultaneously. On other systems, press the lit
> or < switch on the Knob Module to navigate between pages of Edit controls.
You can also enable Expand mode on that strip to see all Edit parameters simultaneously. See .
Chapter 14: Editing 121

3 Cue the session so that a clip is in contact with the Display Module playhead. On the Display Module, a yellow border or bracket
appears around any clip that is in contact with the playhead on a strip in Edit mode (see Figure 17).
Once a clip is targeted for editing it will remain the Edit target until another clip on the same track crosses the playhead, or until
you enable Edit mode on a different track.
Figure 17. Indication of a clip targeted for editing
4 To adjust a value, do either of the following:

• Press the Sel switch next to the knob to increment (increase); press In to decrement (decrease).
• Turn the knob for that parameter clockwise to increment (extend or move later in the timeline), or counterclockwise to dec-
rement (shorten or move earlier in the timeline). Turn slowly for fine adjustment and fast for coarse.
On-screen in the Pro Tools Edit Window, the targeted clip is outlined in yellow as soon as you touch or adjust a knob, or press
an edit switch (see Figure 18). Brackets appear when trimming or adjusting fades.
Figure 18. Pro Tools indication of a clip targeted for editing from S6
Display Module Waveform views only show and edit audio clips, regardless of the current Pro Tools Track view (for example, you
cannot edit MIDI notes from the surface).
On Display Modules, the waveform or icon shown varies with the edit function being adjusted, as follows:
Clip Gain The waveform gets wider as Clip Gain is increased, and narrower as it is decreased. See “1” in Figure 19.
Move The entire clip remains highlighted and moves later in time (rotate encoder clockwise, or press Sel), or earlier
(counter-clockwise, or press In). See “2” in Figure 19.
Trim Back and Trim Front A bracket appears at the tail of the clip (Trim Back) or head of the clip (Trim Front). See “3” in
Figure 19.
Fade In A bracket appears at the head of the clip, and the Fade In length is indicated by a horizontal line that moves as you adjust
the Fade In value. See “4” in Figure 19.
Fade Out A bracket appears at the tail of the clip, while the Fade out length is indicated by a horizontal line that moves as you ad-
just the Fade Out value. See “5” in Figure 19.
Nudge Amount The Nudge value increases or decreases as you adjust the value. This Nudge Value is independent from the
Pro Tools Nudge Amount, and is stored with the session. The S4/S6 Nudge value only affects edits made using the S4/S6 Sel
and In switches. Edits made by rotating S4/S6 knobs use a fixed value and knob acceleration.

1 2 3 4 5
Figure 19. Clip editing indicators
5 To Undo or Redo an edit, press the corresponding Sel or In switch.

6 To take a track out of Edit mode, press any other function switch on that strip (such as EQ).
Editing with the Wheel, Locate Switches, and Soft Keys

The Jog/Shuttle wheel and its surrounding switches let you perform many editing functions from the Automation Module. The Lo-
cate switches provide additional functions, and the Soft Keys provide multiple pages of edit commands and functions.
This section describes the function of switches in the default Pro Tools appset. Wheel switches and all Soft Keys can be customized
in the Soft Key Editor. For more information, see Chapter 8, “Soft Keys.”
Editing with the Wheel and Wheel Switches

The Wheel and its surrounding switches are pre-configured to provide numerous editing functions. For a complete list of com-
mands assigned to the wheel and its switches in the default Pro Tools appset, see Using the Transport and Jog/Shuttle Controls.

Edit Commands on the Locate Switches
The Locate switches are assigned to several edit commands, including Undo and Redo.
Some of the switches in the Locate section have default assignments that no longer match their labels on the Automation Module.
Automation Module Locate switches
The following table lists the primary and Shift functions of the Locate switches. Shift Functions and Other Functions require use
of the modifier keys on the Fader Module.
Switch Label Primary Function Shift Function Other Functions
Mark In Mark In (wheel)
Show Memory Locations

Mem Loc on Automation Module
Soft Keys
Clear Selection / In Restore Last Selection
Mark Out Mark Out (wheel)
Trim + Mix/Edit Window
Trim - Faders Off
Store Current Trim Clip to Selection
Store Locate Consolidate Clip
Edit Edit Memory Location
Recall Undo Revert
Delete Redo
Save Copy In (Opt/Win)

Clear Save Save As
Save as Template (Cmd/Alt)
Edit Commands in the Soft Keys

The default Master Module Soft Keys include the Edit 1 and Edit 2 pages. Edit 1 provides some of the most frequently edit com-
mands such as Cut, Copy, Paste, Duplicate, and Loop Clip.
To show the Edit Soft Keys:

1 Make sure the Master Module left bank is at its default page 1 Automation 1.
2 Press the Menu switch (at the bottom, center of the left bank of Master Module Soft Keys).
The Page Menu bank opens, with jump switches for Edit 1 and Edit 2 at the bottom.
3 Press either Edit 1 or Edit 2.
4 Press the Soft Key for any available edit command.
The Automation Module Soft Keys Workflow page provides additional edit-related commands, including Freeze, Commit, and
Bounce.

Chapter 15: Plug-ins and Sends
This section explains how to edit plug-ins and adjust Sends.
Plug-ins
Plug-ins can be accessed and adjusted from the Master Module, Knob Module, Process Module, Channel Strip Module, or from a
Fader Module. Plug-in parameter mapping depends on the selected knob set or Expand mode, as follows:
Inserts Knob Set In the Inserts knob set, parameters are mapped according to the manufacturer’s specifications. Parameter map-
ping can vary between plug-ins, even of the same type.
EQ and Dyn Knob Sets In the EQ and Dyn knob sets (as well as EQ or Dyn Expand mode), parameter mappings are standardized
across types of plug-ins. For example, the threshold controls for two compressor plug-ins from different manufacturers appear on
the same encoder. For parameter mapping in Expand mode, see Appendix B, “EQ and DYN Parameters in Expand Mode.”
You can also adjust plug-ins using Expand mode, in which multiple parameters are “spilled” across one or more Knob Modules,
or mapped to faders on a Fader Module. For more information, see Expand.
You can configure S4/S6 to automatically open and close plug-in windows in the focused application. When the Open Windows
on Workstation When Editing Mode setting is enabled in Settings > User, you can also designate one module to Open Win-
dows on Workstation When Knobs Assigned.
Editing a Plug-in Using the Master Module

To edit a plug-in using the Master Module, you must first attention a track with a plug-in.
To attention a track, do one of the following:
 From the Fader Module or CSM, press Attention on the desired track.
 From the Home screen, touch a track in the Track Scroller or Meter Scroller (see Home Screen Options).
 From the Tracks screen, touch Attention, and touch a track in the Track Matrix. (Requires that the Track Selector option
Auto-Bank to Attentioned Track is enabled; see Track Selector Options.)
To edit the plug-in the Function Editor:
1 Touch Inserts in the Function Scroller.

The names of plug-ins inserted on the Attention Track appear on the Attention Track Knobs.
Inserts collapsed (left) and expanded (right)
2 Press a knob to enter that plug-in.

For tracks with two or more plug-ins, the following actions occur on the Master Module:
• The Back switch lights.
• The plug-in inserts expand in the Function Scroller.
Chapter 15: Plug-ins and Sends 125

3 Tap a different bank of four plug-in parameters to select them. Brackets flash slowly around them.
4 Before the brackets stop flashing, touch a left or right Attention Track Knob to assign the parameters to that side.
5 Use the Attention Track Knobs to adjust plug-in parameters.
Knob In and Sel switches control additional parameters. For example, in the EQ3 plug-in the In switch for gain controls toggle
that band in or out. Similarly, the Sel switch for frequency controls let you adjust Q (or slope, as available) using that knob.
6 For tracks with two or more plug-ins, press Back on the Master Module to exit the plug-in.
The plug-in inserts collapse back into the Inserts, and plug-in names appear on the Attention Track Knobs.
7 To navigate to parameters that are off-screen, hold Shift on the Master Module and then use the touchscreen Page controls (lit
in purple to the lower left and lower right of the touchscreen) to scroll the Function Editor to the left or right (see Using Page
Switches to Navigate Attention Track Knobs).
Bypassing Plug-ins on the Master Module
The In buttons next to the Lock icons in the Home page let you bypass plug-in inserts.
Plug-in bypass (In)
• When lit green, inserts are active (not bypassed). Tap either In control to bypasses its currently attentioned plug-in.
• When bypassed, In becomes gray, and so does the name of the bypassed plug-in(s) in the Function Scroller (whether expanded
or collapsed).
• When more than one plug-in is bypassed, In is highlighted in orange and the names of bypassed plug-ins are dimmed in the
Function Scroller. Tap IN again to bypass all plug-ins on the track (their names dim), and tap again to un-bypasses all.
Editing a Plug-in Using the S6 Knob Module or S4 CSM Knob Section

Plug-ins can be edited using the Knob Module or CSM Knob section in Inserts, EQ/DYN, or Expand mode.
Inserts Mode Parameters are displayed four at a time (on S4, or on S6 strips with one Knob Module) or eight at a time (S6 strips
with two Knob Modules).
EQ/DYN Parameter mappings are standardized across types of plug-ins. For example, the threshold controls for two compressor
plug-ins from different manufacturers appear on the same encoder.
Expand Mode Multiple parameters are “spilled” across one or more Knob Modules, or mapped to faders on a Fader Module. For
information on Expand mode and Auto Expand (which support many functions, not just plug-ins and sends) see Expand.
Insert Mode
To edit a plug-in using Insert Mode:

2 Press Ins on the S6 Process Module or S4 CSM on a track with at least one plug-in. The plug-in names inserted on this track ap-
pear on the knobs. The rest of these instructions pertain to the Knob Module’s controls.
Inserts switch on Process Module
The Ins switch can be configured to automatically enable strip Expand mode. In addition, you can Inserts Selection to Auto Ex-
pand. For more information, see Auto Expand Functions.

3 Press ► (if lit) to display additional plug-in names.
4 Press a knob to enter that plug-in. The plug-in’s first four parameters are assigned to the knobs, and Back lights.
5 Press ◄ or ► to navigate to additional plug-in parameters.
◄, Back, and ► on Knob Module
6 Use the knobs to adjust plug-in parameters.

7 On the Process Module or CSM, press In next to/below Ins to toggle all plug-in inserts in/out. In lights when the inserts are in.
Some parameters use their In switch to toggle in and out, others use it to toggle between different parameters. Each audio appli-
cation controls their own plug-ins, and some parameters do not include any In switch functionality.
8 To exit the plug-in, press Back or select another Function from the Process Module.
Plug-ins with parametric EQ filters sometimes use the Sel switch to toggle between Frequency and Q.
Function and Parameter View Options
You can optimize how inserts and sends are displayed, and how plug-in parameters are displayed, in Settings > Preferences. For
more information, see Knobs.
EQ and Dyn Mode
To edit a plug-in using EQ or Dyn Mode:

2 Press EQ or Dyn on the Process Module or CSM on a track with at least one plug-in.
The first EQ or Dyn (dynamics) plug-in inserted on this track appear on the knobs.
Dyn (1, shown lit) and EQ (2) switches on Process Module
You can configure Pro Tools to automatically insert a specified default EQ or Dyn plug-in when either of these switches is first
pressed on a strip controlling a track with no plug-ins of either type. (See also Specifying the Slot to Auto Insert Plug-Ins).
To be able to auto-insert a default EQ or Dynamics plug-in:

1 In Pro Tools choose Setup > Preferences, then go to the Mixing tab.
2 In the Setup section, select your desired plug-ins from the Default EQ and Default Dynamics selectors.
3 Enable Auto Insert Default Plug-Ins from EUCON Surfaces.
4 Click OK to close Preferences.

EQ and Dyn Cycling
(Requires Pro Tools 12.8.2 or Higher)
When EQ or Dyn is enabled on a Process Module or CSM, double-pressing the EQ or Dyn switch cycles to the next EQ or Dy-
namics plug-in (if any) on that track.
To cycle:
1 Configure the desired starting insert slot for EQ/Dyn cycling (see Specifying the Slot for EQ/Dyn Cycling).
2 Enable EQ or Dyn on the strip for a track with multiple EQ or Dynamics plug-ins.
The plug-in in the designated starting insert slot is displayed.
3 To cycle to other EQ or Dyn plug-ins use the EQ or Dyn switches as follows:
• If EQ or Dyn are pressed within the EQ/Dyn timeout (half a second) S4/S6 cycles to the next EQ or Dyn slot and stays there.
• If EQ or Dyn are pressed after the half second timeout S4/S6 remains on the current EQ or Dyn slot. To cycle to the next slot,
double-press EQ or Dyn.
The time out (500 ms) for EQ/Dyn cycling is unrelated to and unaffected by the Pro Tools Touch Timeout Preference setting.
If you change the Pro Tools Preference settings for EQ/Dyn cycling while a session is open you must close and re-open the session.
EQ and Dyn cycling is accessed on Process Modules and CSMs only, it is not available from the Master Module touchscreen. (See
also Specifying the Slot for EQ/Dyn Cycling).
Editing a Plug-in Using the S6 Process Module

Each strip on the Process Module has one knob section that can be used to edit plug-in parameters when in Insert mode.
When there are no Knob Modules in the same chassis as a Process Module, you can enable Expand mode to have all eight Process
Module knobs access insert parameters. For more information, see .
To edit a plug-in using the Process Module:

1 Assign a track with at least one plug-in to the surface.
2 On this track’s Process Module strip, hold down Back and press Ins. The name of the first plug-in inserted on this track appears
on the knob.
3 To display additional plug-ins, press ►.
4 Press the knob to enter the desired plug-in. Back and ► light.
5 Navigate to and adjust different parameters.
6 To toggle all plug-in inserts in and out, press In next to Ins on the Process Module.
Some parameters use their In switch to toggle in and out, others use it to toggle between different parameters. Each audio appli-
cation controls their own plug-ins, and some parameters do not include any In switch functionality.
7 To exit the plug-in, press Back. To return the Process Module knob to its default function (pan) hold Back and press Pan.
Dynamics Graphs
Dynamics plug-in graphs and “bouncing ball” indicators are displayed on the Attention Track screen and on Display Modules.
Func Switch to Enable All Plug-In Automation

Pressing the Func switch on a Process Module or CSM enables automation for all controls in that strip’s currently focused EQ,

Specifying the Slot to Auto Insert Plug-Ins
(Pro Tools 2018.1 or Higher)
You can designate a specific slot for Pro Tools to use when automatically inserting plug-ins using the Insert Slot selectors.
To designate the Insert Slot for auto-inserted EQ or Dynamics plug-ins:

1 In Pro Tools choose Setup > Preferences, then click the Mixing tab.
2 Make sure Auto Insert Default Plug-Ins from EUCON Surfaces is enabled.
3 Choose a default EQ and/or Dynamics plug-in from their selectors.
4 Use the Insert Slot selector to designate the slot (a–j) where you want the default plug-ins to be inserted when the EQ or Dyn
switch is pressed on a strip. If a plug-in is already inserted into the designated slot, Pro Tools uses the next available slot.
Choose <none> to have Pro Tools insert the default plug-in into the first available slot.
3
2
Pro Tools Preferences (Setup > Preferences), Mixing tab
Specifying the Slot for EQ/Dyn Cycling

(Pro Tools 2018.1 or Higher)
You can specify the starting slot for EQ/Dyn cycling for situations when there might be more than one EQ or Dyn plug-in on a
track. This lets you optimize EQ and Dyn cycling (via repeated pressing of the EQ or Dyn switches) to start from either a specific
slot, or from the most recently cycled slot.
To designate the starting slot for EQ/Dyn cycling:

1 In Pro Tools choose Setup > Preferences, then click the Mixing tab.
2 In the Controllers section, choose a slot (a–j) from the EUCON Surfaces EQ Dyn cycling Starting at Insert selector.
Choose <none> to have Pro Tools begin cycling from most recently cycled slot.
Pro Tools Preferences (Setup > Preferences), Mixing tab, Controllers section

Sends
Sends can be adjusted on the Master Module, Knob Module, and Process Module.
Adjusting Sends on the Master Module

To edit sends using the Master Module:
1 Attention a track with sends to the Attention Track Editor.
2 Press Sends in the Function Scroller. The first eight sends are assigned to the Attention Track Knobs.
3 Turn the knob to adjust the send level. In addition
• Press the knob In switch to mute (or unmute) the send. In the Function Scroller, the name of muted Sends dims.
• Press the knob Sel switch to toggle the send between pre- and post-fader.
• To adjust send pan, press the Level knob top. L (and R, if the send is stereo) appear in the lower-right of the touchscreen.
4 To access additional sends, touch a bank of four sends in the Function Editor. Left and right brackets flash slowly around them.
5 To assign the four new sends to that side, touch or adjust an Attention Track Knob.
6 To navigate to sends that are off-screen, hold Shift on the Master Module and then use the touchscreen Page controls (lit in pur-
ple) to scroll the Function Editor to the left or right (see Using Page Switches to Navigate Attention Track Knobs).
Adjusting Sends on the Knob Module

Sends can be edited using the Knob Module in default (per strip) or Expand mode.
Default Parameters are displayed four at a time (on strips with one Knob Module) or eight at a time (two Knob Modules).
Expand Mode Multiple parameters are “spilled” across one or more Knob Modules.
The following instructions explain default mode. For information on Expand mode (which supports all functions, not just plug-ins
and sends), see .
To edit sends using the Knob Module:

1 Assign a track with sends to the surface.
3 Press Sends on that Process Module strip or CSM. The sends appear on the Knob Module or CSM knobs.
Sends switch on the Process Module
4 Turn a knob to adjust the level of the corresponding send. In addition

• Press the knob In switch to mute (or unmute) the send.
• To adjust send pan, press the knob top, then press lit ► (Page >) or ◄ (< Page) until R Pan and L Pan appear on the bottom
encoders of the Knob Module.

To navigate to other sends:
1 Make sure you are viewing the top level of Sends view (slots a–d). If not, press Back until slots are shown.
2 Press the lit ► (Page >) or ◄ (< Page) switch to navigate to additional sends.
Function and Parameter View Options
You can optimize how inserts, sends and plug-in parameters are displayed, in Settings > Preferences (see Knobs).
Adjusting Sends on the S6 Process Module

To edit Sends using the Process Module:
1 Assign a track with Sends to the surface.
2 Hold down Back and press Sends on that Process Module strip. The first Send appears on the Process Module knob.
3 Turn the knob to adjust this send level. In addition:
• Press the knob In switch to mute (or unmute) the send.
4 Press the lit ► (Page >) or ◄ (< Page) switch to navigate to additional sends.
5 Press Back to exit this send.
Adjusting Sends on the Fader Module or CSM Faders

To control sends from a fader:
1 Press the Sends switch on a Process module or CSM so that Sends are displayed.
2 Press Flip on the Master Module.
For more information, see Flip to Faders.
Resetting Send Level

You can reset Send level to 0/unity by holding Opt/Win on a Fader Module and then touching the Send knob on the desired track.
In Pro Tools, this will reset the Send to 0/unity regardless of the state of the Sends Default to -inf setting (in Setup > Preferences,
Mixing).

Chapter 16: Automation and Mixing
This chapter shows you how to perform the following tasks using S4/S6:
• Using Automation
• Mixing with VCAs
• Surround Panning
• Dolby Atmos
Using Automation
You can set the track Automation mode from Fader Modules, from the Attention Track fader, or using a combination of Soft Keys
and track Select switches. Track meters indicate Trim automation and automation writing. On systems that include Display Mod-
ules, automation data can be shown along with waveforms.
The default Pro Tools appset provides track automation modes on the Master Module and Automation module Soft Keys.
Setting the Track Automation Mode

To set the track automation mode:
 On a Fader Module or CSM, press F on the desired strip repeatedly to cycle through the automation modes. While writing in
Latch mode, press F to Auto Match out.
– or –
 On the Master or Automation Module Soft Keys, hold the Soft Key for the desired mode then press a Fader Module/CSM F
switch (or Select switch) to set that track to that automation mode.
To toggle Trim Automation on and off for a track:
 On a Fader Module/CSM, press M.

– or –
 On the Master or Automation Module Soft Keys, hold the Soft Key for Trim and press a Fader Module Select switch.
Read
9 DX ADR1
Input Rec
M S Menu LG
Automation mode indicated in a strip display
Chapter 16: Automation and Mixing 132

This table lists automation mode LED indication for any knob or switch with automation LEDs.
0 = unlit
1 = lit
* = flashes
Automation Mode Red LED Green LED
Off 0 0
Read 0 1
Touch 1 0
Latch 1 0
Touch/Latch 1 0
Write 1 0
Preview 0 *
Off + Trim 0 1
Read + Trim 0 1
Touch + Trim 1 1
Latch + Trim 1 1
Touch/Latch + Trim 1 1
Write + Trim 1 1
The red LED flashes while writing automation. The green LED flashes in Preview mode.
Write Mode Locked Out from Fader Module F Key

When cycling through automation modes using the F key on Fader Modules/CSMs, Write mode is not included. You can still as-
sign Write mode from the surface by enabling the Soft Key for Write mode and pressing the strip F key.
This helps protect existing automation by requiring a more explicit gesture to enable Write mode.
Func Switch to Enable All Plug-In Automation

In addition:
• When a plug-in is spilled to encoders, press and hold Control-Option-Command (Mac) or Control-Alt-Start (Win) and touch
the knob for any parameter to toggle its individual automation enable state.
• When in Inserts view (top level), press and hold Control-Option-Command (Mac) or Control-Alt-Start (Win) and press the In
switch next to the desired plug-in knob top (such as the knob or slot showing EQ3-7Bnd) to toggle automation enable of all
controls in the corresponding plug-in on/off.
Toggling automation enable status off can cause automation data to be deleted (Pro Tools warns you).

Automation Trim Metering and Write Indication on Fader Strips
(Requires Pro Tools 11.3.1)
Strip meters on Fader Modules/CSMs (and the Attention Track meters on the Automation Module) show Trim automation and in-
dicate when automation is being written in any Write mode other than Trim.
Automation Trim Metering

• While writing an initial Trim pass, the Right meter lights the LED at 0 to indicate you are writing Trim automation.
• While editing an existing Trim pass, the Right meter lights LEDs above or below 0 to indicate the underlying Trim value.
On-screen in Pro Tools, this corresponds to the yellow (Trim) or blue (Composite) automation line.
In order for the meters to show Trim, the Pro Tools preference for Coalesce Trim Automation must be set to Manually.
Write Indication
Whenever a track is writing automation in any mode other than Trim, the Right meter lights the LED that corresponds to the un-
derlying automation level. For example, if in a Touch write mode the LED indicates where the fader will return when you release
it. If a track is the slave of a VCA, the lit LED corresponds to the blue automation line on-screen in Pro Tools.
Figure 20. Automation Trim meter when editing Trim data (left) and Write indication (right) in strip meters
Automation Breakpoint Data on Display Modules

(Systems with Display Modules Only)
Display Modules can show automation data along with waveforms. When enabled, automation can be shown for in-
dividual parameters on one or more strips. You can set a variable amount of opacity and control the left-to-right ori-
entation of displayed automation data.
At left, pan automation is shown on a Display Module strip.
To enable and configure automation data on a Display Module:

1 Go to Settings > Preferences, and scroll to the Display section.
2 Touch the Layout selector and choose any Waveform view.
3 Configure the following settings as desired:
Show Automation When enabled, automation breakpoint data can be shown on Display Modules and customized using the set-
tings for Reverse Automation Lanes, and Automation Opacity.
Reverse Automation Lanes Inverts the orientation of displayed automation data. (Pan is unaffected by this setting.)
Automation Opacity Adjusts the visibility of waveforms behind automation data. When off (0 percent), automation is shown as
a single thin line. Raising the percentage adds an increasingly opaque fill.

To show automation data on a Display Module strip:
1 Hold down Ctrl + Command/Alt on a Fader Module/CSM.
In the corresponding Display Module strip, automation data for the touched parameter appears.
To show automation data display on all strips:

1 Press and hold down Ctrl + Opt/Win+ Command/Alt on a Fader Module/CSM.
On-screen in Pro Tools, the Track View for that track (or all tracks) shows the corresponding automation data. For example, if you
touch a Process Module knob while it is assigned to Pan, on-screen in Pro Tools the corresponding track jumps to Pan view.
To exit automation display mode on individual strips:

1 Hold down Ctrl + Command/Alt on a Fader Module/CSM.
2 Press the strip Select switch on the Fader Module/CSM.
To exit automation display mode on all strips:

1 Hold down Ctrl + Opt/Win+ Command/Alt on a Fader Module/CSM.
2 Press a strip Select switch on the Fader Module/CSM.
You can also show (or hide) automation data on Display Modules from the computer keyboard by holding Control + Command
(Mac) or Ctrl + Win (Windows) and then tapping a control on S4/S6.
Switching On-Screen Pro Tools Track Views to Automation Data from the Surface
You can use S4/S6 to change on-screen Pro Tools track views to show automation.
To display automation data for a track in Pro Tools:

1 Hold down Control + Command (Mac) or Ctrl + Win (Windows) on a Fader Module/CSM.
The Track View for that track shows the corresponding automation data. For example, if you touch a an S6 Process Module knob
while it is assigned to Pan, on-screen in Pro Tools the corresponding track jumps to Pan view.
If the Display Module setting to Show Automation is enabled, automation also appears on the corresponding Display Module
strips. For more information, see Automation Breakpoint Data on Display Modules.

Mixing with VCAs
S4/S6 provides the following VCA features.
Adjusting VCA Slave Levels

When a VCA is banked to the surface, you can adjust level of its slaves from the S6 Knob Module, CSM knobs, or from the Master
Module Attention Track Knobs.
• From a strip, enable the Bus function on that VCA (press Bus on the S6 Process Module for that strip, or on S4 Focus a strip
then press Bus). Use the strip < Page > switches to navigate to other slave tracks, or press Exp on that strip to have slaves take
over the Knob Module (S6) or knobs (S4 CSM).
• From the Master Module, first Attention the VCA and make sure the Home screen is displayed. Tap Bus in the Function
Scroller to have all slaves appear on the Attention Track Knobs.
VCA Spill
(Pro Tools Only)
VCA Spill lets you quickly expand (or “spill”) VCA slave tracks to adjacent faders, or to spill zones.
Spill Zones must first be configured in Settings > Surface. For more information, see Configuring Spill Zones.
The M, S, and LG LED indicators on the Fader Module/CSM show whether the track is a Master (M) or Slave (S), and if it is in a
Group (LG). The Menu, Select, and Swap (S6)/Focus (S4), and switches above the M/S and LG indicators let you spill/unspill.
You can also spill VCAs automatically when they are attentioned. See Automatic Spill of Attentioned VCA.
Figure 21. Spill controls and indicators when Menu switch is pressed, showing a VCA slave (S indicator LED lit yellow)
To spill a VCA from a strip:

1 On the Fader Module or CSM for a VCA strip, press and hold Menu.
The strip display shows Zone L and Zone R below the S6 Select and Swap switches, or S4 Select and Focus switches (re-
quires that spill zones have been configured in Settings > Surface). The switches light yellow, and Spill L and Spill R appear
above the two switches on either side of Menu.
2 While still holding Menu, do any of the following:
• To spill the VCA to the left spill zone, press Select.
• To spill the VCA to the right spill zone, press Swap (S6) or Focus (S4).
• To spill the VCA to the strips to the left or right of the master VCA (standard VCA spill), press either of the switches adjacent
to Menu (above the M S indicators to spill to the left, or above LG to spill to the right).
When spilled, the Menu switch on the strip of the VCA master lights dark green, and the corresponding Spill switch
(L or R) on the Master Module also lights dark green.
On spilled slaves, Menu is light green if the option to light them is enabled (see Spill Zone Menu Key Mode for Lay-
outs, Workstations or Types).

3 To bank or nudge tracks within a spill zone, make sure the corresponding Spill (L or R) switch is lit white (press if necessary),
then use the Bank and Nudge switches on the Master Module.
4 To unspill a VCA, press Shift + L Spill or R Spill (whichever is lit dark green) on the Master Module, or press Menu on the
master VCA or any spilled member strip.
You can configure VCAs to spill automatically to zones or adjacent strips when the VCA is attentioned (see Automatic Spill
of Attentioned VCA).
To spill a VCA to a spill zone using the Master Module:

1 On the Master Module, press to enable L Spill or R Spill.
2 On the Master Module, press Type. (To spill a Track Type across as many strips as needed, disable L or R Spill and press Type.)
The Master Module soft keys display available choices for the enabled element (Layouts, track types, or workstations).
3 Press the soft key for VCAs.
The enabled L Spill or R Spill switch on the Master Module is pink. On channel strips, Menu switches within the enabled zone
light in the same color as the enabled L Spill or R Spill switch if the option to light them is enabled (see Spill Zone Menu Key
Mode for Layouts, Workstations or Types).
4 To bank or nudge tracks within a spill zone, make sure the corresponding L Spill or R Spill switch is lit white (press if neces-
sary), then use the Bank and Nudge switches on the Master Module.
Spill Zone banking commands are also available as Soft Keys in the default Pro Tools assignments (along with other Surface com-
mands). You can navigate spill zones by Banking from the Fader Module or CSM.
5 To unspill, press Shift + L Spill or R Spill on the Master Module, or press Menu on any strip in the spill zone when the Menu
keys are configured to unspill (see Spill Zone Menu Key Mode for Layouts, Workstations or Types).
Commands to collapse (unspill) the left and right spill zones are also available as Soft Keys.
VCA Unspill
When working with VCAs that include other VCAs as members you can use the Menu switch to unspill one level at a time, or to
completely unspill and exit VCA spill.
To unspill an individual VCA:
 Press a Menu switch once.
To unspill all VCA layers:
 Press and hold a Menu switch for longer than one second.

Surround Panning
You can pan in multichannel formats for surround using the Master Module touchscreen and Attention Track knobs. If your system
includes a Master Joystick Module, see Using the Master Joystick Module.
To pan in surround:
1 Attention a track that is assigned to a multichannel output path.
2 Make sure the Home screen is displayed.
3 Select Pan from the Function scroller.
• If the Auto Show Function Graph on Selection setting is enabled in the Home screen Local Options, the pan Function view
appears on the Home screen.
• If Auto Show Function Graph on Selection is not enabled, drag the Pan function block down to the Home screen to display
the pan Function view.
The pan Function view on the Home screen looks similar to the following.
Figure 22. Surround panner on the touchscreen when a stereo track is assigned to a multichannel output path.
4 To pan, do any of the following:

• Tap and drag any displayed dot to pan it within the sound field.
• Rotate the corresponding knobs.
• Tap a speaker icon to Snap to Speaker.
If your system includes one or more Display Modules, see also Panner Divergence and Position Display Mode.

Across the top of the panner view are the LFE display, controls to toggle stereo and inverse linking on/off, and a selector for stereo
control and visibility.
1 2 3 4 5 6
Pan displays and controls in the Master Module Pan function (stereo to 5.1 shown)
The numbers in the figure above identify each of the following elements.
Legend Element Description
1 LFE Shows the current LFE contribution, if any
2 Link When enabled (lit), links left and right channels of a stereo pair
3 Front/Rear Inverse When enabled (lit), applies inverse front/rear pan linking
4 Front Inverse When enabled (lit), applies inverse front pan linking
5 Rear Inverse When enabled (lit), applies inverse rear pan linking
Drop-down selector that determines what is shown in the surround panner and
6 Stereo Visibility
in the pan Function block. Choices include None, Left, Right, and Both
Stereo Link and Inverse Controls
Tap any of the Link or Inverse buttons to toggle them on/off. Link settings are only available when the attentioned track is stereo
assigned to a multi-channel output. (Note that Divergence settings can be linked, but do not follow any Inverse Link setting.)
Link Enable and Inverse Link controls can also be configured using knobs on the Master Module.
To access stereo link controls from the Master Module:

1 Attention a stereo or other multi-channel track, then tap to select the Pan function block.
2 Assign the Inv P, Inv R, Inv FR, and Link controls to the knobs (tap their column on-screen, then touch either set of knobs).
3 Press the In switch for the knob that corresponds to the desired linking control to toggle it on/off.
You can also access Link settings from fader strips (see Adjusting Link and Inverse Pan Control from Channel Strips).
Stereo Control and Visibility
The Stereo Control and Visibility selector lets you control what is shown in the surround panner and in the pan Function block. Tap
the selector and choose one of the following from the drop-down selector.
None When enabled, neither Divergence or pan lines (trajectory) are shown.
Left When enabled, left channel Divergence and pan lines are shown.
Right When enabled, right channel Divergence and pan lines are shown.
Both When enabled, both left and right channel Divergence and pan lines are shown.
Snap to Speaker
On the Master Module surround panner, tap a speaker to snap the panner to that speaker position. When panning stereo tracks, the
Stereo Control and Visibility controls determine which channel(s) will respond to tapping a speaker; the response of other channels
is determined by whether Link is enabled, and if so which Inverse Link settings are enabled, if any.

Adjusting Link and Inverse Pan Control from Channel Strips
You can control Pro Tools stereo pan Link and Inverse Link from S6 channel strips, and from the Master Module.
These controls are also available on the Master Joystick Module.
To access stereo link controls from a channel strip:

1 On S6, bank or nudge the surface to access a stereo or LCR track that is routed to a greater-than-stereo output.
2 Do any of the following to navigate to the desired parameter (Link, Inv P, Inv R, or Inv F/R). Not all parameters are available
in all track formats.
• On the Process Module, make sure Pan is shown in the strip display and then press the encoder < or > switches to navigate the
encoder to the desired parameter.
• Press the Pan switch in that track’s strip, then press the Knob Module < or > switches to navigate to the desired parameter.
• Press the Pan function switch, then press Exp in that strip to enable Pan Expand mode.
3 Press the encoder In switch for the desired parameter to toggle it on/off.
Accessing Left/Right Rear via L/R Front + Sel

When the L or R Front parameter is mapped to a knob, press that knob’s Sel switch to reassign the knob to the corresponding chan-
nel’s Rear parameter. For example, when L Front is displayed on a Knob Module, pressing that encoder’s Sel switch maps L Rear
to that encoder. Press the lit Sel switch again (it becomes unlit) to return the encoder to L Front.
Linking F/R
You can link the Front and Rear pan positions.
• When linked, Rear position follows Front position; if you pan that channel front-to-back while linked, it pans vertically. Au-
tomation is written to both front and rear L and R knobs.
• When unlinked, panning the same channel front-to-back will follow the trajectory between the current front position
(left-to-right) and the current rear position (left-to-right).
To link Front and Rear:

1 Attention a mono or stereo track assigned to a multichannel output.
2 Navigate the Home screen, Knob Module or Process Module to their Pan function for the attentioned track.
3 Press the In switch next to the encoder assigned to Front or Rear (if the track is mono) or L (or R) Front or Rear if stereo.
When linked (In switch lit), adjusting the L (or R) Front or Rear parameter pans the channel front-to-back vertically. Any offset
between front and rear is ignored.
On the touchscreen, the L (or R) Front or Rear knob also indicates F/R link status.
• When linked, the on-screen L (or R) Front or Rear knob lights solid blue.
• When not linked, the on-screen L (or R) Front or Rear knob lights with a blue outline.
L Front knob when Front/Rear are unlinked (shown at left) and linked (shown at right)

Dolby Atmos
(Requires Pro Tools | Ultimate 12.8 or Higher)
S4/S6 supports Dolby Atmos® busing, panning, and metering in Pro Tools, providing intuitive feedback and ergonomic control for
Dolby Atmos parameters directly from the Master Module, Master Joystick Module (MJM), and other S4/S6 modules.
Dolby Atmos Controls and Displays

The following figure and table highlight the unique Dolby Atmos-specific additions in the Pan function view on the Master Module
touchscreen. These and other parameters can be assigned to knobs on the Master Module, and to knobs on the MJM, Knob, and Pro-
cess Modules. The MJM provides additional ways to control parameters (see Using the Master Joystick Module). Object/Bus
toggling is also available in Soft Keys.
2 4
5
3
7 6
Default Dolby Atmos controls on the Master Module touchscreen, standard 2D view, showing a stereo-to-7.1.2 panner
The Dolby® format formerly known as 9.1 is now referred to as 7.1.2. To learn more about Dolby Atmos and its parameters, refer
to the information available from Dolby.
Item Description
Zones Selector and Sets the speaker Zone. Choices include All, F/S (front and side), F/R (front and rear), FC/R (front, center
1
Indicator and rear), Front, and Rear. The In switch next to the Zone knob toggles Speaker Snap on/off.
Sets the Height Mode. Choices include FreeForm (manual Height adjustment), Wedge, Sphere, and Ceil-
Height Mode Selec-
2 ing (automatic Height panning). The Height Mode pop-up menu also provides X (Height Mode off). For
tors and Indicator
Theater mode, see 7, below.
3 Size Increases or decreases the element size
4 Height When Freeform Height mode is active, rotating the Height knob determines position in the Z (height) axis.
Height Indicators When lit, indicate whether any Height mode is active. When the Ceiling Speakers are unlit (gray), indicates
5
(Ceiling Speakers) that no Height Mode is active.
For tracks assigned to an Object on the Dolby Atmos Renderer (only), toggles Atmos Speaker Snap on or
6 Speaker Snap off. This control is not available for tracks assigned only to a Pro Tools 7.1.2 bus or output. This setting is
also available via the Zone Mask In switch.
Enabling the 3D button places the panner in Theater mode, in which a three dimensional room is displayed
7 3D (Theater Mode) in the pan grid. The room view can be rotated manually from the touchscreen, or using controls in
Settings > User. 3D on/off and room rotation are stored in User Preferences.

Accessing Dolby Atmos Parameters
You can control and automate Dolby Atmos parameters from the Master Module, channel strips, and the Master Joystick Module.
The following sections show how to pan in Dolby Atmos from the Master Module in 2D or 3D / Theater Mode. Pan knobs, controls
and indicators are similar when adjusting Pan from channel strips. If your system includes an MJM, see also MJM Features for
Dolby Atmos.
To access Dolby Atmos parameters:

1 Attention a track that is routed to a Dolby Atmos bus in Pro Tools. If your system includes an MJM, the surround panner ap-
pears on one joystick if the track is mono, or both if the track is stereo.
2 For modules other than an MJM, enable the Pan function on the desired module by doing the following:
• On the Master Module, navigate to the Home screen and drag the Pan function block down to display Pan in the touchscreen.
• To use knobs and switches in a channel strip, press the S6 Process Module Pan switch in the strip for the desired track (on
S4, Focus the desired strip and press its Pan switch). Navigate the knobs to specific Pan parameters by pressing the lit
< or > switches on the Knob or Process Module or on the CSM.
Dolby Atmos Panning on the Master Module

Dolby Atmos on the Master Module is similar to standard panning, with the addition a few Dolby Atmos-specific parameters.
Panning in Dolby Atmos involves the following steps:

1 Configuring Dolby Atmos Renderer communication and Pro Tools bus/object assignment (see Pro Tools documentation).
2 Configuring Dolby Atmos Parameters (Room View, Zone Mask, Height Mode, Size and other settings) for each track.
To pan automatically in three dimensions:
 Enable Wedge, Sphere, or Ceiling Height Mode (see Selecting a Height Mode) then do the following:
• Drag the pan dot left or right to pan the element left-to-right, or use the Front knob.
• Drag the dot up (towards the top of the touchscreen) or down to pan to the front and rear, respectively, or use the F/R knob.
Height is automatically calculated based on the current Height Mode and pan location.
To control Height manually:
 Enable Freeform Height Mode and do the following:

• Press and hold Shift on the Master Module, then drag the dot up or down to increase or decrease Height, respectively. Or use
the Height knob to increase and decrease height. You can press/hold and Shift at any time to engage or disengage Height. To
resume touch panning to front, left, right, or rear, release Shift.
Manually Controlling Height From Knobs or the Touchscreen
On the touchscreen you can control Height via dragging by engaging Shift.
To adjust Height from the touchscreen:

1 Set the Height Mode to Freeform (see Selecting a Height Mode).
2 Press and hold Shift on the Master Module, then drag the pan dot up or down to increase or decrease Height, respectively.
You do not need to press Shift prior to panning; press/hold and Shift at any time to engage or disengage Height.
3 To resume touch panning to front, left, right, or rear, release Shift.

Indication of Pan Height
When any Height Mode is enabled in standard (2D) view, the current Height position is indicated by the size of the pan dot. The
larger the pan dot, the higher the position. (Note that Height is indicated differently in 3D / Theater Mode.)
A signal at maximum Height (large green pan dot, Left) and minimum Height (small blue pan dot, Right) in standard 2D Pan view
Bus and Object Indicators and Controls

The color of the pan dot indicates bus/object assignment and automation status.
Pan Dot Color Indication
Pan Dot Object/Bus Automation
Color Indication Mode
Bus Read
Green
Object Read
Orange
Any Any Write mode

Red
Any Off
Yellow
Object, but
Gray off/bypassed
Object/Bus Automation
The Pro Tools Object/Bus Automation control is available as a Soft Key.

• In the factory Soft Keys for S6 v3.6.1, Enable Object/Bus Automation is provided in the Automation 4 page (left bank of Au-
tomation Module Soft Keys).
• Enable Object/Bus Automation is also available in the Soft Key Editor for assigning to custom Soft Keys.
Enable Object/Bus Automation Soft Key in S6 v3.6.1
Enable Object/Bus Automation EUCON > Automation > Write Enable > Enable Object/Bus Auto

Configuring Dolby Atmos Parameters
(View Mode, Zones, Height Mode, Size, Height, and Speaker Snap)
Configure these Dolby Atmos settings as needed on each track.
Selecting the Room View Mode
The panner can be viewed in standard two dimensional mode, or in 3D/Theater mode. 3D/Theater mode on/off and rotation are
global settings that affect all tracks/panners, and are stored in (and recalled with) User Preferences.
To toggle View Mode on the Master Module:

• On the Master Module tap to enable the 3D button located below the panner grid. When lit, Theater mode is displayed.
• On the MJM press Setup below the two panner grids. When the Setup switch LED is lit, Theater mode is displayed.
Panning grid in standard 2D view (3D button not enabled, shown at left) and 3D/Theater mode enabled (shown at right)
The following sections explain Dolby Atmos controls common to both views. For unique 3D controls, see 3D / Theater Mode.
Selecting a Zone
You can select a Zone for each track, and for each side of unlinked stereo tracks.
To select a Zone from the Master Module for the currently attentioned track:
 Rotate the knob for Zone until the desired Zone is selected. Or tap and hold the Zone icon and select an available zone.
Zone icon and pop-up menu (right side of a stereo track shown)
Indication of Zone Status
The following table shows how Speaker icons indicate status in the Master Module and MJM panner grids.
Speaker Status Indication
Icon Description
Speaker icons light solid green when fully enabled.
Speaker icons are unlit (gray) when not enabled.
When a different Zone is enabled in Left versus Right sides of a stereo track, half of each speaker is green or
gray to indicate status for L versus R.
Center and Side speakers are dimmed relative to Center% and Side% settings, respectively.
When 3D/Theater mode is enabled, no speaker icons are shown.

Selecting a Height Mode
You can select the Height Mode for each track, and for each side of an unlinked stereo signal.
Dolby Atmos Height modes include “automatic” height panning modes (Wedge, Sphere, and Ceiling) and “manual” (FreeForm).
• In automatic modes pan height is derived automatically based on element position and size.
• In FreeForm mode you can manually control pan height. You can also toggle Height mode on/off.
To select a Height Mode from the Master Module:

• Rotate the knob for Height Mode until the desired mode is selected (such as Free Form, Wedge, Sphere, or Ceiling).
• Tap and hold the Height Mode icon below the panner grid, then select an available mode from the pop-up menu.
Height Mode icon and pop-up menu
2 If you want to turn Height mode off, do either of the following:

• Tap and hold the Height Mode icon below the desired panner grid and select X.
• Press the lit In switch next to the Height knob (not the Height Mode knob). When unlit, Height is off.
Indication of Height Mode
On the Master Module and MJM panner grids, the Height Mode icon indicates the current Height Mode.
Height Mode Indication
Icon Mode
FreeForm
Wedge
Sphere
Ceiling
Off
The Height (Ceiling Speakers) indicate Height Mode status as follows:

Speaker Status Indication
Icon Description
Ceiling Speaker icons light solid green when enabled and active.
Ceiling Speaker icons are unlit (gray) when not enabled/inactive.
When Height Mode is enabled on only one side (Left or Right) of an unlinked stereo track, half of each Ceiling
Speaker is green or gray to indicate active/inactive status for side.

Adjusting Size
You can adjust Size for each track, and for each side of unlinked stereo tracks, using knobs on any module in Pan view.
To adjust Size:
 Rotate the knob for Size.
Indication of Size
When Size is set to any value above 0/off, a transparent grid (or cube if in 3D/Theater mode) surrounds the pan dot. The grid/cube
gets larger as Size is increased, and smaller as it is decreased.
Size indicated on the touchscreen (Size = 50% for a channel panned full left/front, in standard 2D view)
Speaker Snap
You can toggle Dolby Atmos Speaker Snap on or off for tracks assigned to an Object.
To toggle Speaker Snap on or off:
 Do either of the following:

• Press the In switch next to the Zone Mask knob. When In is lit, Speaker Snap is on. When unlit, it is off.
• Tap and the Speaker Snap icon below the desired panner grid. When lit, Speaker Snap is on. When unlit, it is off.
Speaker Snap icon
Do not confuse Atmos Speaker Snap with the Pro Tools panner ability to click a speaker icon to “jump” the pan dot to a location.

3D / Theater Mode
3D/Theater mode provides a 3D room view that can be rotated. 3D/Theater mode can be enabled separately for the Master Module
and for the Master Joystick Module (if any). On/off and rotation are stored in (and recalled with) User Preferences.
To toggle View Mode:
 Tap the 3D button below the panner grid. When lit, the 3D room view is shown in the pan grid and Function scroller Pan block.
The on-screen 3D button does not change view mode on the MJM (even if Use 3D Panner on Joystick Module is enabled).
However, rotating any room view rotates all S6 3D room views (Master Module and all MJMs).
Indication of Height, Proximity, and Location in 3D/Theater Mode
Height Adjusting the Height value raises or lowers the Height plane. See 1 in the figure, below.
Proximity The size of the pan dot indicates proximity (whether the element is closer or further away relative to the current view).
The pan dot appears smallest when panned furthest away and largest when panned nearest (see 2 in the figure, below).
Location Pan lines appear on the Height plane to indicate Left/Right and Front/Rear location. See 3 in the figure, below.
Screen The Screen image provides a visual reference for the front room in all views. See 4 in the figure, below.
3D/Theater mode indication of Height (1), proximity (2), location (3), and screen/front reference (4)
Rotating the Room View
You can rotate the 3D room view by swiping, or using 3D Panner Preferences. Rotation is global for all 3D panners on all tracks
(not just the currently attentioned track), on the Master Module and all MJMs (if any). Pro Tools panner views are unaffected.
To rotate the room view manually from the pan grid:

1 Press and hold Shift on the Master Module (in the Navigation switch section).
The 3D button changes to the Rotate icon while Shift is held.
2 Continue holding down Shift and tap the Rotate icon so it becomes lit, then swipe Rotate icon (unlit) Rotate icon (lit)
the room view with one finger to rotate the view.
Once you release Shift you exit Rotation mode. To continue rotating, repeat the entire sequence (Shift + Rotate icon + swipe).
3D Panner Preferences
To configure 3D Panner Preferences:

1 Go to Settings > User and navigate the User screen to the 3D Panner section.
2 Configure the following as desired:
Use 3D Panner on Joystick Module Toggles MJM 3D room view on/off globally (all screens on all MJMs).
3D Panner Ceiling/Floor Rotation Rotates the 3D room view up and down on the Master Module and MJM (if enabled).
3D Panner Left/Right Rotation Rotates the MJM 3D room view left and right on the Master Module and MJM (if enabled).

The following figure shows the 3D Panner when Ceiling/Floor Rotation is set to 90.
1
4
3
3D/Theater mode rotated to “top down” room view and indication of Height (1), proximity (2), location (3), and screen/front reference (4)
To reset 3D view to its default view, set both Rotation sliders to 0.
Touch Panning in 3D/Theater Mode
Touch panning in 3D mode is similar to standard 2D, the only difference being the room view and Indication of Height, Proxim-
ity, and Location in 3D/Theater Mode.
 Enable Wedge, Sphere, or Ceiling Height Mode (see Selecting a Height Mode) then do the following:
• Drag the pan dot left or right to pan the element left-to-right, or use the Front knob.
• Drag the dot up (towards the top of the touchscreen) or down to pan to the front and rear, respectively, or use the F/R knob.
To control Height manually:

1 Enable FreeForm Height Mode.
2 Press and hold Shift on the Master Module, then drag the dot up or down to increase or decrease Height, respectively. Or use
the Height knob to increase and decrease height.
You can press/hold and Shift at any time to engage or disengage Height. To resume touch panning to front, left, right, or rear,
release Shift.

Chapter 17: Using the Master Joystick Module
This section explains the following Master Joystick Module (MJM) operations:
• Assigning Tracks to the Joysticks
• Assigning Tracks to the Joysticks
• Writing Automation with the Joysticks
• Constraining the Joysticks to X or Y
• Advanced Pan Parameters
• Assigning Other Parameters to the Joysticks
• Joysticks and Layouts
• MJM Features for Dolby Atmos
Chapter 17: Using the Master Joystick Module 149

Assigning Tracks to the Joysticks
To assign a track to the joysticks:
• On a Fader Module or CSM, press the Attention key for the desired track.
• On the Master Module, navigate the touchscreen to the Tracks page and make sure Attention is enabled, then touch a track
block in the track matrix or track scroller.
Figure 23. Attention tab in the Tracks screen
The attentioned track is assigned to the first (left) joystick. If the track has dual panners (such as with a Pro Tools stereo track)
the left and right channels of the track are assigned to the left and right joysticks, respectively.
2 To assign a different track to the first joystick, wait two or more seconds and then Attention the new track.
You can change the default timeout of two seconds by adjusting the Assign Right Joystick Timeout setting.
3 To assign a track to the second joystick, Attention that track within two seconds of assigning the first track.
The center screen shows the current pan position as a green dot. If the track is automation write-enabled, the dot is red.
Joystick assignments can be stored and recalled with Layouts (see Joysticks and Layouts).
4 To pan, move the corresponding joystick.

You can also use the encoders to control a single pan parameter at a time. Use the encoder Page switches (< and >) to navigate
the encoder to the desired parameter.

Channel Switch and Encoder Sections
Each joystick provides channel switch and encoder sections.
Channel switches include Attention, Solo, Mute, Record Enable, and automation switches (M and F), as well as a display, all
of which function just like those on Fader Modules. Unlike channel displays on Fader Modules, however, those on the MJM show
track Name but not values.
Each encoder section provides a dual-function (press/rotate) knob, with In, Sel, Back, and Page (< >) switches as found on Process
Modules. On the MJM, the encoder section controls let you adjust pan parameters only. The knobs and In switches have automation
indicator LEDs. You can navigate the encoders and displays to pan parameters using the Page switches.
Channel and encoder sections
While the MJM encoder controls access pan parameters only, you can assign the joysticks to adjust other types of parameters. See
Assigning Other Parameters to the Joysticks.
Remember Joystick Knobs by Track
A new setting, Remember Joystick Knobs by Track, is provided in the Knobs section of the Settings > User tab.
• When enabled, the assignment of pan parameters to MJM knobs is remembered and restored for each attentioned track.
• When not enabled, attentioning a new track to either joystick inherits the knob assignments of the previously attentioned track.
Locking Tracks to the Joysticks
You can lock joysticks to anchor them to their current track assignment, unaffected by banking, nudging, spilling and Layout recall.
To lock a strip on a Master Joystick Module:
 Press Attention + Menu in the track controls for that strip on the Master Joystick Module.

Writing Automation with the Joysticks
To automate pan or other parameters assigned to the joysticks:
1 Make sure the desired type of automation is enabled.
For example, in Pro Tools choose Window > Automation and make sure Pan or other function types are enabled for automation.
2 Put the track into an automation Write mode (such as Touch or Touch/Latch).
On the joystick display, the pan dot turns red.
Joystick screen while writing automation
3 Begin playback and move the joysticks.

The Automation indicator LEDs flash red while automation is written.
4 To punch out, press the track F switch on the Master Joystick or Fader Module.
Punching Automation In/Out with the In Switch
The In switch punches the joystick in, writing automation at its current location. Note that when a track is in a Touch write mode,
the green LED on the In switch lights indicating that it is simulating a touch. The system reacts as if you are holding a joystick, pre-
venting a normal punch out from the F key. To punch out, either touch the joystick, stop the transport, or press the In switch again.
In Touch automation mode the In switch punches the joystick out (if writing). To punch out of Latch mode, press the F switch.
Instant and Pickup Modes for Automation Takeover

By default, joysticks begin writing new automation instantly while in Write mode, as soon as they are touched while in Touch,
Latch, or Touch/Latch mode, or when they are punched in via their In switch. You can instead enable joystick Pickup Mode to en-
able “pass-through” writing, in which the joysticks only begin writing automation when they are moved onto (take over) the same
position as existing automation.
To enable Pickup mode:

1 On the MJM, press the Pickup Mode switch so that it lights white.
2 Make sure the desired automation type is enabled, and that the assigned track is in any automation write mode.
On the Joystick Module display, the pan dot turns red.
3 Begin playback, then touch the corresponding joystick.
As soon as you touch a joystick, the screen shows a semi-transparent white dot representing the current joystick position.
Pickup mode joystick indicator (white, at left) and existing pan position (red)

4 To begin writing automation, use the joystick to move the white dot so it is on top of the red dot.
Automation writing begins. The Automation indicator LEDs flash red while automation is written.
5 To punch out, press the F switch on the Joystick or Fader Module.
Constraining the Joysticks to X or Y

Both joysticks provide X and Y switches that toggle the corresponding axis on or off. These switches do not restrict physical move-
ment of the joysticks; they only determine how pan or other assigned parameters respond to the joystick movement.
X When lit, the assigned parameter responds to joystick movement along the X (horizontal) axis.
Y When lit, the assigned parameter responds to joystick movement along the Y (vertical) axis.
X and Y enabled
By enabling only one of these switches (X or Y), you can constrain pan moves to a single axis. For example, to pan an element from
side Left to side Right without affecting its front/rear location, disable Y. Moving the joystick left-to-right pans the track from side
to side only, while its front/rear position is unaffected by any vertical movement of the joystick, similar to panning left-to-right us-
ing a single knob.
When both switches are unlit, the joysticks have no affect on the assigned parameter.

Advanced Pan Parameters
The MJM lets you adjust Divergence, Center Percentage, and LFE, and configure stereo track pan Link settings.
Available pan parameters can vary depending on the audio application. Refer to the documentation from the manufacturer.
Adjusting Divergence, Center Percentage, and LFE

The MJM lets you adjust and automate advanced pan parameters including Divergence, Center Percentage, and LFE using the en-
coder sections next to either joystick.
To adjust Divergence, Center Percentage, or LFE from the MJM:

1 Attention a track to assign it to a joystick.
2 In the encoder section for that joystick, press a lit < or > (Page) switch to navigate to the desired parameter.
Figure 24. Encoder sections, < and > (Page) switches
3 Rotate the encoder to adjust the selected parameter.

When the attentioned track is stereo, the encoder display shows L or R along with the parameter name.
Parameter names are abbreviated as shown in the following table.

Parameter abbreviations in the Encoder display
Parameter Function Displayed on Joystick Module
LFE Adjusts track contribution to the LFE channel Above the joystick display
Cntr % Adjusts the Center Percentage value Dims or brightens the displayed Center speaker
F Div Adjusts the Front Divergence value
R Div Adjusts the Rear Divergence value Dark blue on the joystick display
F/R Div Adjusts the Front/Rear Divergence value
Parameters are displayed on the joystick display as shown in the following example image.
1 LFE: -50 dB
2
Figure 25. Advanced pan parameters on the joystick display: 1) LFE, 2) Center Percentage at 25%, and 3) Divergence with F Div at 75%
LFE, Center Percentage, and Divergence can also be adjusted from channel strips, and from the Master Module by selecting the
Pan function.

Linked and Inverse Panning
You can control Pro Tools stereo Link and Inverse pan settings using the MJM Link switches and encoders, from channel strip Pan
controls, and from the Master Module.
To configure panner link and inverse pan settings from the MJM:
1 Attention a stereo or LCR track to assign its left and right signals to the two joysticks.
• To use the dedicated Link switches, press any of the following so they become lit to enable their function.
1 2 3 4
Figure 26. Link and Inverse Pan switches
• To use the MJM encoders, navigate to the desired Link parameter by pressing either lit < or > (Page) switch until the desired
Link parameter is shown in the Encoder display. Then press the encoder In switch so it is lit (to enable) or unlit (not enabled).
1 – Pro Tools Stereo Link
The Link switch (1 in Figure 26) links or unlinks left and right channels of a stereo pair.
• When lit, channels are linked. When Link is enabled but no Inverse modes are enabled, both channels respond identically
when either joystick is moved. If any Inverse mode switches are enabled, linking behaves as described below.
• When unlit, channels are unlinked and can be independently positioned using their corresponding joystick. In addition, any
currently enabled Inverse pan modes are ignored.
2 – Front/Rear Inverse
When enabled and lit, the Inverse Front/Rear switch (2 in Figure 26) inverts front and rear pan control linking.
3 – Inverse Pan
When enabled and lit, Front (3 in Figure 26) inverts left and right pan control linkage across the front.
4 – Rear Inverse
When enabled and lit, Rear (4 in Figure 26) inverts left and right pan control linkage across the rear.
To adjust these parameters from channel strips or the Master Module, see Surround Panning.

Assigning Other Parameters to the Joysticks
(Func X Y)
The Func X-Y switches enable joystick Assign mode, which lets you assign parameters from the track currently attentioned on
each joystick to the X and Y planes.
• X is the horizontal axis, where moving left to right adjusts parameters from low to high, respectively.
• Y is the vertical axis, where moving from the bottom to the top adjusts parameters from low to high, respectively.
For example, you can use this capability to control plug-ins that have their own panners.
Parameter assignments to the joysticks are maintained for as long as the current session is open.
To assign parameters:
1 Press either Func X-Y switch.
If parameters have already been assigned to the corresponding joystick (left or right), the switch LED lights solid green and the
names of assigned parameters are shown above the joystick display.
If no parameters are assigned, it flashes green. Proceed to step 3.
2 On the MJM, press Shift + Func X-Y/Setup.
The Func X-Y switch LED flashes to indicate joystick Assign mode.
3 Touch any encoder on the attentioned track on a Process, Knob, Channel Strip, or Master Module to assign it to X.
The parameter name and value appears at the top of the display.
If only one function needs to be assigned to X, press Func X-Y again. The pan dot lights purple and Func X-Y lights solid green
and stops flashing.
4 To assign a second parameter to Y, touch another encoder on the attentioned track while Func X-Y is still flashing.
Parameter names and values are shown on the display temporarily replacing the speaker icons, the pan dot lights purple, and
Func X-Y lights solid green and stops.
5 Move the joystick to adjust the assigned parameters.

6 To return the joysticks to controlling track pan, press Func X-Y again (the LED becomes unlit).
7 Press Func X-Y again to return to controlling the assigned parameters.
You can also utilize the X and Y Enable switches while in joystick Assign mode. See Constraining the Joysticks to X or Y.

Joysticks and Layouts
In Layout Assign mode, the strip scroller shows the two joystick strips in their position relative to the rest of the surface, labeled
Joy 1 and Joy 2.
Figure 27. Joysticks in the Strip scroller of the Layouts screen
You can assign tracks to joystick strips just as you would normal strips, and track assignments are stored and recalled with Layouts.
When a Layout is first recalled, its assigned tracks appear on the Joysticks.
Figure 28. Joystick 1 (left) assigned but not stored in a Layout, and Joystick 2 (right) assigned and enabled to be stored (green highlight)
Attentioning different tracks after the recall puts those tracks on the joystick(s) as in banking mode.
Auto Select Joystick Strips when Storing Layouts

The new Tracks Local Option setting Auto Select Joystick Strips when Storing Layouts determines the initial state of the joystick
blocks when storing Layouts. The default setting is off.
This setting only affects the initial state of the Joystick strip blocks (whether enabled or not). You can tap to include or exclude them
while storying the Layout.
Figure 29. Joystick and Layout setting in Tracks Local Options
When not enabled Joy 1 and Joy 2 blocks are unlit (no green highlight) when storing a Layout, meaning their assignments will not
be stored and recalled with the current Layout. You can override this default state by tapping Joy 1 or Joy 2 so that they light green.
When enabled Joy 1 and Joy 2 blocks are automatically lit (green highlight) when storing a Layout, meaning their assignments
will be stored and recalled with the current Layout. You can override this state by tapping so they become unlit.

MJM Features for Dolby Atmos
(Requires Pro Tools | Ultimate 12.8 or Higher)
Pan and other Dolby Atmos parameters can be adjusted from the MJM using the joysticks, knobs, and switches. Height Adjust
mode lets you use one joystick to pan and the other to adjust Height.The panner grid on the MJM includes indicators for Height ,
Height Mode, Speaker Snap, and Zones. Both standard 2D and 3D/Theater mode views are available, with settings to control 3D
view and optimize track-to-joystick assignment in Settings > User.
To access Dolby Atmos parameters on the MJM:
 Attention a track that is routed to a Dolby Atmos bus in Pro Tools. The surround panner appears on one joystick if the track is
mono, or both if the track is stereo.
The following figure and table identify the primary Dolby Atmos indicators and controls on the MJM for a mono track.
1 2 3 4
5
6
7
MJM with a mono Dolby Atmos track on the left joystick, 2D view
Item Description
1 LFE Indicates the current LFE value.
2 Height Mode Indicates the current Height mode (FreeForm, Wedge, Sphere, or Ceiling, or X (off)).
3 Speaker Snap Indicates on/off status of Speaker Snap.
4 Zone Indicates the current Zone. Speakers around the grid enable or disable as appropriate for each mask.
Height Indicators
5 When lit, indicate that any Height mode is active. When unlit (gray), indicate that no Height Mode is active.
(Ceiling Speakers)
• Pressing Shift + Alt 1/Y leaves X/Y on the current joystick, enables Freeform Height mode (and enables
6 Shift Height mode if it was off) and maps the opposite joystick to Height.
• Pressing Shift + Mode/X cycles through Height modes.
• Toggles 3D/Theater mode on or off.

7 Setup • When 3D/Theater mode is enabled, pressing and holding Setup lets you rotate the room view using its
joystick.
The pan dot indicates bus/object assignment identically to the Master Module (see Bus and Object Indicators and Controls).

Dolby Atmos Panning on the Master Joystick Module
The MJM joysticks and knobs pan in Dolby Atmos similar to standard surround or stereo, with additional options for manually con-
trolling Height, engaging 3D/Theater mode, and rotating the room view as described in the following sections.
Panning in Dolby Atmos involves the following steps:

1 Configuring Pro Tools bus/object assignment and Dolby Atmos Renderer communication as described in your Pro Tools doc-
umentation.
1 Attentioning a track that is routed to a Dolby Atmos bus in Pro Tools, to assign that track to the MJM. (See also Assign Right
Joystick Timeout).
2 Configuring stereo Link settings if desired (Atmos parameters follow Link state but not Inverse settings).
3 Configuring Dolby Atmos Parameters from the Master Joystick Module for each track.

1 Enable Wedge, Sphere, or Ceiling mode (see Selecting a Height Mode from the MJM) then do the following:
• Move the joystick left or right (X axis) to pan left/right, or use the Front knob.
• Move the joystick up or down (Y axis) to pan front/rear, or use the F/R knob.
To adjust Height manually, see Manually Controlling Height from the MJM.
Manually Controlling Height from the MJM
You can control Height from MJM knobs, or using a joystick by enabling Height Adjust mode.
To control Height from an MJM knob:

1 Attention a Dolby Atmos track to assign it to a joystick.
2 Enable FreeForm Height mode by pressing that joystick’s Shift + Mode/X switches repeatedly until the
FreeForm icon
FreeForm icon is displayed above the MJM panner grid.
3 Press a lit < or > switch next to the that joystick’s knob to navigate the knob to Height.
Knob section for left joystick, assigned to Height
4 Rotate the knob to adjust Height.

5 Press the knob’s In switch to toggle Height on/off. When lit green, Height is on; when unlit Height is off.

To control Height from an MJM joystick:
1 Attention a Dolby Atmos track to assign it to a joystick.
2 On the MJM, press Shift + Alt 1/Y in the switches above the joystick assigned to the desired track (see 2 in the figure below).
The opposite joystick becomes a Height control (Z axis), with the current Height value displayed above. The attentioned joystick
continues to control X/Y pan. In addition:
• Freeform Height mode is automatically enabled for the track, and Height is also enabled if it was off.
• The knob below that joystick maps to Size.
MJM panner grid in Height Adjust mode; a mono track at front/center, Height at minimum (0) / joystick 2 all the way down
With stereo tracks you can engage Height mode from either set of joystick switches to put Height on either your right or left.
3 Enable or disable Pickup mode for the joystick now assigned to Height by pressing its Pickup Mode switch:
• When enabled, the Pickup Mode switch is lit white indicating the joystick is in Pickup (pass-through) mode. In this mode a
white circle appears in the Height panner grid representing the current physical position of the joystick. Height will not be
changed until you move the joystick so the white circle joins the green dot (the green dot represents the current Height value).
• When disabled, the Pickup Mode switch is unlit indicating Takeover mode. In this mode, Height is changed as soon as the
joystick is touched.
4 To increase Height move the Height joystick up. To decrease Height move it down.
In the MJM panner grid the pan dots become larger as Height is increased, and smaller as Height is decreased. The current Height
value 0–100 is shown above the MJM pan grid assigned to Height.
MJM panner grid in Height Adjust mode; the same mono track at front/center, but Height at maximum (100) / joystick 2 all the way up
5 To exit Height mode, press Shift + Alt 1 again or attention a new track.

Configuring Dolby Atmos Parameters from the Master Joystick Module
(View Mode, Zone, Height Mode, Size, Height, and Speaker Snap)
You can control and automate Dolby Atmos parameters using the joysticks, knobs, and switches on the MJM. The following in-
structions assume you have already attentioned a track that is assigned to a Dolby Atmos bus in Pro Tools.
Selecting the View Mode
The MJM panners can be viewed in standard 2D mode, or in 3D/Theater mode, separately from the Home screen Pan view on the
Master Module. MJM View mode, room rotation (if any) and other 3D settings are stored in and recalled with User Preferences.
To toggle View Mode on the MJM:
 Do either of the following:

• Press Setup below the two panner grids. When the Setup switch LED is lit, Theater mode is displayed on the MJM.
The MJM Setup switch does not change view mode on the Master Module.
\
LFE: -- >
MJM Setup switch, 3D/Theater mode enabled
• Go to Settings > User, and in the 3D Panner section enable or disable the Use 3D Panner on Joystick Module setting.
MJM 3D on/off is available as a Soft Key.

MJM 3D Soft Key in S6 v3.6.1
Use 3D Panner on Joystick

Surface > Surface Options > 3D Panner > Use 3D Panner Joystick Mdl
Module
Rotating the Room View from the MJM
You can rotate the 3D room view for “top down” or other alternate views using a joystick, or using 3D Panner Preferences. Ro-
tation is global, affecting 3D panner view on all tracks (not just the currently attentioned track) on the MJM and Master Module.
The 3D Panner Preferences section also provides a setting to optimize how tracks are assigned to pairs of joysticks.
To rotate the MJM 3D view using a joystick:
 Press and hold Setup, then move the corresponding joystick to rotate its room view.
To configure room view and other 3D Preferences:
 See 3D Panner Preferences.

Assign Right Joystick Timeout
The Assign Right Joystick Timeout setting determines the time window within which attentioning an additional track assigns that
track to the right joystick, letting you optimize how tracks can be assigned to the different joysticks on Master Joystick Modules.
In previous versions of S6 software the joystick timeout was fixed at two seconds. Attentioning two tracks within two seconds of
each other assigned the first attentioned track to the left joystick and the second track to the right joystick. Attentioning the second
track two or more seconds after attentioning the first track assigned that second attentioned track to the left joystick (replacing the
previously assigned track).
You can now specify the time range for joystick assignment to between 0 and 3 seconds in Settings > User.
• A setting of 0/Off means the right joystick will not be assigned to a different track than the left joystick.
• Any setting of 0.25 seconds or higher specifies the time window in which attentioning an additional track assigns that track
to the right joystick.
Settings > User, Joystick Strips section
Selecting a Zone from the MJM
To select a Zone from the MJM:

1 Press a lit < or > switch next to the channel encoders of the appropriate joystick until Zone Mask appears on a knob.
2 Rotate the knob to selected the desired Zone.
3 To toggle Speaker Snap on/off, press the In switch next to the Zone Mask knob.
Selecting a Height Mode from the MJM
To select a Height Mode from the MJM:

1 On the MJM switches above the joystick currently assigned to the attentioned track, press Shift + X/Mode to cycle through
available Height Modes (see 1 in the figure below). The current Height Mode is indicated above the MJM panner grid.
2
MJM with a mono Dolby Atmos track on the left joystick
2 If you want to turn Height off from the MJM, press a lit < or > switch to navigate the channel encoder to Height (not Height
Mode), then press the lit In switch next to the Height knob. When unlit, Height is off.

Adjusting Size from the MJM
You can adjust Size from the MJM using the channel knobs next to either joystick.
To adjust Size from the MJM:
 Press a lit < or > switch next to the channel encoders of the appropriate joystick until Size is displayed.
Or enable MJM Height mode. Size is automatically mapped to the channel knob when the MJM is in Height mode (see Manually
Controlling Height from the MJM).
When Size is set to any value above 0/off, a transparent grid surrounds the corresponding pan dot standard 2D view, or a transparent
cube in 3D/Theater mode. The greater the Size setting, the larger the grid/cube. For an example, see Indication of Size.
Toggling Speaker Snap On or Off
You can toggle Speaker Snap on or off for tracks assigned to an Object.
To toggle Speaker Snap on or off from the MJM:

1 Press the lit < or > switches next to the channel encoders of the appropriate joystick until Zone Mask appears on a knob.
2 Press the lit In switch next to the Zone Mask knob. When In is lit, Speaker Snap is on. When unlit, it is off.
Do not confuse Dolby Atmos Speaker Snap with the Pro Tools panner ability to click a speaker icon to “jump” the pan dot to a lo-
cation.

Chapter 18: Layouts
S4/S6 supports multi-workstation and multi-DAW track Layouts. Any tracks from multiple DAWs can be arranged on the surface
simultaneously. S6 M40-based systems support connection to up to eight connected workstations, while other S6 and all S4 sys-
tems support up to two connected workstations. Up to 96 unique Layouts can be stored and recalled from the touchscreen or Soft
Keys. Layout sets can be automatically saved and loaded to/from a designated application on a connected workstation, and manu-
ally saved and loaded to/from disk for transfer and archiving.
Layouts Mode versus Banking Mode Banking mode is the default, and lets you access all tracks from one DAW across the sur-
face. In contrast, Layout mode lets you arrange any tracks from any connected DAW on as many (or as few) strips as you want. You
can use spill zones to spill Layouts to the surface without affecting banked tracks outside the zone. For more information, see
Chapter 19, “Spill Zones.”
Check out the Avid Pro Tools | S6 Workflows on YouTube for in-depth explorations of how to use S4/S6, including Layouts,
Spill Zones, Expand Zones, and more. Check back frequently for updates to this ongoing series.
Accessing Layout Mode

To enable Layout mode to immediately begin assigning tracks:
1 In the Tracks screen, tap Assign.
On the Master Module, the Layout Mode switch LED lights blue. On the touchscreen, the Assign button becomes enabled and
Layout commands Insert, Delete Strip, and Clear Strip replace Record, Input, Solo, and Mute.
2 Select and assign tracks to Layouts (see Creating Layouts). After learning how to create standard Layouts, see the following:
• If your system includes Master Post Modules see Assigning Tracks to MPM Strips.
• If your system includes Master Meter Modules, see Using Master Display Meter Modules
Keep in mind that whenever the surface enters Layout mode, only tracks from the current or previously recalled layout appear
across the strips. If you want to work with tracks from a layout while maintaining access to other strips you can spill the layout
to a spill zone. For more information, see Spilling Layouts, Tracks, and Workstations.
To enable Layout mode without automatically enabling Assign mode:

• Press Shift + Layout Mode on the Master Module.
• Press Layout Mode on the Master Module, then press a Soft Key to recall the corresponding layout.
• Tap Recall on the screen and recall a layout from the touchscreen.
• Tap Load on the screen and load a saved set of Layouts.
The Layout Mode switch LED lights blue. On the touchscreen, Record, Input, Solo, and Mute commands remain available.
2 If you want to enable Layout Assign mode, tap Assign in the Tracks screen.
To exit Layout mode:
 Press Shift + Layout Mode.

The surface returns to showing all tracks from the currently focused workstation.
To exit Layout Mode after recalling a Layout from the Soft Keys:
 Press the Soft Key for the currently recalled Layout.

The User Preference setting Auto Close Surface Recall Soft Keys determines whether or not the Soft Keys return to their pre-
vious view after recalling a Layout. For more information, see .
Chapter 18: Layouts 164

To exit Layout Mode by spilling a Track Type:
 On the Master Module, press Type and then select a Track Type (such as All, Audio, or MIDI) by pressing the corresponding
Soft Key.
The surface switches to Banking mode with the selected Track Type on the strips.
Layout Screen Commands

Figure 30 shows the Tracks screen with Layout Assign enabled, and identifies its main sections and commands.
B
C
D
E
Figure 30. Tracks screen, Layouts Mode
A – Tracks Matrix of track blocks representing tracks in the current Track view (All, Audio, Aux, Master, Instrument, or VCA)
B – Track Commands When Assign is enabled in the Tracks screen, Layouts commands Insert Strip, Delete Strip, and Clear
Strip replace the Record, Input, Solo, and Mute buttons.
• When Assign is enabled and tracks are selected in the matrix, Select None appears.
• When Assign is enabled and either L Spill or R Spill is enabled on the Master Module, Spill Selected appears.
• When the Master Module Shift switch is held down, Assign changes to Assign Post, and Clear Strip changes to Clear All.
C – Strip Universe scroller Universe view of all strips.
D – Strip blocks Each block represents an individual strip on the surface.
E – Layouts Commands The following choices appear across the bottom of the Tracks screen at all times: Recall, Edit, Load,
Save, and Save As. When Layout Assign mode is enabled, the Store command becomes available. Layouts commands can be ac-
tivated by tapping them on the screen, or by pressing the corresponding switches directly below them.

Virtual Strips
You can specify the number of strips available for track assignment in Layouts from the Tracks Local Options screen.
• Adjusting the Number of Strips in Layout setting lets you include more tracks in Layouts than available physical strips.
• Adjusting the Number of Post Strips in Post Layout setting lets you include more tracks in Post Layouts than available phys-
ical strips on Master Post Modules.
Once you add virtual strips they are not removed or deleted; reducing the number of strips (or Post Strips) merely hides the previ-
ously available strips and they are no longer visible. They are not editable but by default are saved to Titles and sessions. You can
control whether hidden virtual strips are retained using the Store Hidden Virtual Strips in Layouts setting.
When a Layout that includes virtual strips is recalled, all surface banking controls are available to bank and nudge across the surface
or spill zone.
To configure virtual strips:

1 Navigate the touchscreen to the Tracks screen, and tap the Local Options (gear) icon.
2 In the Tracks Local Options screen, adjust the Number of Strips in Layout slider to the desired value between 8 and 256 strips.
Number of Strips in Layout and Number of Post Strips in Post Layouts settings in Tracks Local Options
The next time you enter Assign mode from the Tracks screen, the lower Strip scroller will show the number of strips you selected.
Drag the scroller left and right to navigate to strips outside of the current view.
You can change the Number of Virtual Strips setting at any time. For example, if the current session was saved on an S4 or S6 sys-
tem with 96 virtual strips and is then opened on a system with 64 virtual strips go to the Tracks screen Local Options and increase
the Number of Virtual Strips in Layout to 96 to access the addition strips 65–96 in Layouts.
Post Layouts
For systems that include one or more Master Post Modules, Post Layouts let you assign and recall tracks to MPM strips. Post Lay-
outs are managed separately from standard Layouts and Title files. This means that you can create, edit, save, and load Post Layouts
for the Master Post Module separately from standard track Layouts.
For more information, see Using the Master Post Module.
Meter Layouts
Up to two Display Modules can be designated as Master Meter Modules (MMM) to provide dedicated meter displays for important
session elements. When two MMMs are designated, both mirror each other.
You can configure MMMs to show meters, waveforms, or meters and waveforms for 8 to 32 tracks (up to four rows of 8 tracks
each). You can select MMM views separately from Display Module views, store MMM views in Meters Layouts, and link Meters
Layouts to Track Layouts.
For more information, see Using Master Display Meter Modules.

Creating Layouts
Layouts are created by enabling Assign mode, selecting tracks in the matrix, and assigning them to strips in the lower strip scroller.
You can also create a layout consisting of all tracks currently banked onto the surface. For more information, see Creating New
Layouts Based on Currently Banked Tracks.
To create a Layout:
1 Tap Assign in the Tracks screen to enable Layout Assign mode.
Insert, Delete Strip, and Clear Strip appear to the right.
Figure 31. Assign mode enabled in the Layouts screen
When Layouts mode is enabled and its Assign switch is active (referred to as Assign mode), only tracks from the current or most
recently recalled layout appear on the surface.
If you are creating the first Layout, the strip scroller across the bottom of the screen will be blank, as will strips on the surface.
Otherwise, tracks from the last recalled Layout (if any) are displayed.
• If you want to remove only specific tracks from the new layout tap Clear Strip to enable it, then tap the tracks you want to re-
move in the lower scroller. Tap Clear Strip again to disable it.
• If you want the new Layout to include completely different tracks press and hold Shift in the Navigation section of the Master
Module; Clear Strip becomes Clear All. While still holding Shift, tap Clear All to remove all tracks from the scroller.
2 Tap Track blocks in the upper track matrix to select the tracks you want in the Layout.
When tracks are selected in the Layouts screen their outlines are green as shown in Figure 32. Once any tracks are selected, a but-
ton Select None appears; tap it if you want to clear the current selection of tracks.
Figure 32. Three tracks selected to add to the Layout (green outline)
You can spill selected tracks to spill zones. For more information, see Spilling Selected Tracks to a Zone.
3 Tap a strip block at the bottom of the screen to place the currently selected track(s) starting on that strip.
On systems with Virtual Strips enabled, or with 16 or more fader strips, swipe the lower strip scroller, or the Strip Universe
scroller, to navigate to other strips beyond those shown.
Figure 33. Selected tracks mapped to strips 1–3

When you tap on a strip block, the currently selected tracks are placed on the surface starting on that strip, in the order in which
you selected them (not in their absolute track order). For example:
• If four tracks (1–4) are selected and you tap the first (left-most) strip block, the selected tracks are placed on strips 1–4.
• If four tracks (1–4) are selected and you tap the fifth strip block, the selected tracks are placed on strips 5–8.
• If you first select track 4, then select tracks 1, 2 and 3, when you tap a strip in the strip block track 4 will be placed on that strip,
followed by tracks 1, 2, and 3.
4 Repeat the previous steps to add and arrange other tracks in the Layout.
5 To include tracks from a different application or workstation, focus that application and then repeat the previous steps to add its
tracks to the Layout.
You can focus other workstations using the Soft Keys (letting you leave the touchscreen in Layouts view). For more information,
see
6 When you have selected and placed tracks onto strips, tap Store.
If you create or modify a Layout but press Recall before storing it, a new backup Layout can be created in the next available block
in the grid, or the current layout can be updated. For more information, see Saving Changed Layouts to New or Current.
The Layouts grid appears. In the Strip scroller, all strips (scroller at the bottom of the screen) are outlined in bright green as
shown in Figure 34, indicating they will be stored and recalled with the Layout. If your system includes a Master Joystick Mod-
ule, you can set a default state for their assignments in the Tracks Local Options screen (see ).
Figure 34. Layouts Store grid
7 In the lower Strips Scroller, tap to deselect the strip blocks for any strips you do not want stored in and recalled with the Layout.
• Tap All to highlight and select all strips.
• Tap None to clear all strip selections, then tap individual strip blocks as desired.

Strip blocks that are not selected will not be stored and, when the Layout is recalled, the corresponding strips remain on their pre-
viously displayed tracks. For example, in Figure 35 strips 1–4 are selected while strips 5–8 are not. Tracks have been placed on
strips 1, 2, and 3, but not on strip 4. When this Layout is recalled, strips 1–3 will show their assigned tracks, strip 4 will be blank,
and strips 5–8 will continue to display tracks from the previously recalled Layout (if any).
Figure 35. Four strips selected to be stored; three with tracks and one blank.
You can use Spill Zones to keep strips outside the zone in Banking mode (all tracks in the session) available while accessing tracks
stored in the Layout. For more information, see Chapter 19, “Spill Zones.”
8 Tap a block in the Store grid. The block highlights and is automatically numbered, and Store appears at the far right of the Lay-
outs Commands across the bottom of the screen. The Layout Name field also appears with a flashing cursor.
Figure 36. Layouts Store grid

• To store the Layout with only its assigned number for its name, tap Store.
• To enter a custom name for the Layout tap the Layout Name field, enter a name using the on-screen keyboard, then tap Enter.
10 Repeat to create additional Layouts.
To exit Layout Mode:
 Press Shift + Layout Mode. The system returns to Banking mode and displays tracks from the currently focused DAW.
Once Layouts are stored, they can be recalled from the touchscreen or the Soft Keys (see Recalling Layouts).

Inserting, Deleting, and Clearing Tracks from Layouts
You can insert and delete track assignments, as well as clear individual strips or all strips.
Inserting Tracks into a Layout
You can enable the Insert button in the Tracks Assign screen to select and insert a track onto a strip in the Strip Scroller. When the
Insert button is not enabled, assigning a track to an already occupied strip replaces the previous track (other strips are unaffected).
To insert tracks into a Layout:

1 Enable track Assign mode or Assign Post mode and recall the desired Layout.
2 Tap the Insert button to enable Insert Strip mode.
Insert track button
Onscreen, the Insert button lights to indicate it is enabled.

3 Tap to select one or more strips in the upper Track matrix.
4 In the lower strip scroller, tap the strip block where you want to insert the selected track(s).
5 The selected track(s) is assigned to the selected strip.
Any track previously assigned to that strip block, as well as all tracks to the right of the targeted strip block, are shuffled to the
right by the number of inserted tracks.
Deleting Tracks from a Layout
You can enable the Delete Strip button to be able to delete track assignments from the current Layout.
To delete tracks from Layouts:

2 Tap the Delete Strip button to enable Delete mode.
Delete Strip button
Onscreen, the Delete Strip button lights to indicate it is enabled.

3 In the lower strip scroller, tap to delete the strip(s) you want to delete from the Layout.
All strips to the right of the deleted strips shuffle to the left.
4 To exit Delete Strip mode, tap Delete again so it becomes unlit.
Clear Strip and Clear All

Use the Clear Strip command to remove individual track assignments from strips, without affecting any other assignments in the
current Layout. Use Clear All to remove all track assignments in the current Layout.
To clear individual track assignments:

2 Tap the Clear Strip button to enable Clear Strip mode.
Onscreen, the Clear Strip button lights to indicate it is enabled.

3 In the lower strip scroller, tap the strip(s) you want to clear.
The previously assigned track is cleared from the strip.
4 To exit Clear Strip mode, tap Clear Strip again so it becomes unlit.
To clear all track assignments:

2 In the Master Module Navigation switch section, press and hold the Shift switch.
On-screen, the Clear Strip button becomes Clear All.
Clear All button
When the Master Module Shift switch is held down, it is normal for the Assign button to also change and become Assign Post.
3 Tap Clear All.

All track assignments are cleared.
4 Release the Shift switch.
Creating New Layouts Based on Currently Banked Tracks

You can create Layouts consisting of all tracks currently banked to the surface. This feature is useful for quickly saving the current
state of the surface to a layout. For example, if you use Pro Tools Memory Locations and Windows Configurations to store and re-
call shown or hidden tracks, you can recall those Memory Locations and quickly store each arrangement of tracks as a layout.
To include or exclude hidden tracks, first configure S6 Hidden Track preferences to show hidden tracks in Banking and in Layout
mode (see ).
To create a new layout based on all currently banked tracks:

1 In the Tracks screen Local Options, enable Double Tap Assign to Copy Tracks from Banking Mode into Current Layout.
2 Make sure the surface is in Banking mode (the Layout Mode switch LED should be off).
3 Arrange all desired tracks onto fader strips by recalling a memory location, by banking or nudging (do not spill to either spill
zone: spilled tracks will be ignored).
Keep in mind that you can remove any unwanted tracks before storing the layout, as explained below.
4 In the Tracks screen, double-tap the Assign button quickly.

All tracks currently banked onto strips are mapped to strips in the strip scroller, and the system enters Layout Assign mode.
5 If desired, add or remove tracks, or enable/disable strips using the Track matrix and lower strip scroller.
6 Press Store.
• To create a new layout, tap to select an empty layout block. Enter a custom name for the layout if desired.
• To overwrite an existing layout, tap its layout block in the store grid.
8 Press Store to save the new layout.

Recalling Layouts
Layouts can be recalled from the touchscreen or from the Soft Keys. Track Layouts can be spilled into spill zones (see Spilling Se-
lected Tracks to a Zone). Track Layouts store and recall the knob function (such as EQ, Dyn, or Sends) assigned when the Layout
was stored (you can configure S6 to ignore stored functions if desired). Post Layouts can only be spilled to Master Post Modules.
Meter Layouts only affect Master Meter Modules, but can be linked to Track Layouts.
Tracks are stored in a Layout using a unique track ID to ensure tracks appear on the correct strips. If a Layout is recalled but S6 can't
match the track ID it will use track name, or (absolute) track number. By storing and matching track ID, name, and/or number you
can create Layouts in session templates that will persist in new sessions.
See also for information about optimizing how banking responds when recalling Layouts.
Recalling Layouts from the Touchscreen

To recall a Layout from the touchscreen:
1 Navigate to the Tracks screen.
• To recall a Track Layout, tap Recall.
• To recall a Post Layout, hold the Master Module Shift switch (the on-screen Assign switch becomes Assign Post) and tap
Assign Post, then tap Recall.
Figure 37. Layouts Recall grid (Track Layouts shown)
3 In the Layout Recall grid, tap to recall the desired Layout. The surface updates to match the Layout.
4 Tap Done to close the Layout Recall grid.
Recalling Layouts from Soft Keys

Track Layouts and Post Layouts can be recalled from the Master Module Soft Key banks. This lets you recall Layouts without hav-
ing to leave the current view on the Touchscreen. Post Layouts can also be recalled from the MPM Soft Keys bank.
To recall Track Layouts from the Master Module Soft Keys:

1 Create and store, or load Layouts into S6 (see Saving and Loading Layout Sets (Titles)).
2 Press Layout Mode on the Master Module. The Soft Keys on the Master Module display the currently available Track Layouts.
You can configure S6 to include or exclude the fader icons from Layouts Soft Keys. See .
3 Press the corresponding Soft Key switch to recall that Layout. The surface displays only tracks stored in the selected Layout.
4 To return the Soft Keys to their previous view, press the Soft Key Close at the bottom of the bank showing Layouts.
The Layout Recall Soft Keys can automatically close after selecting a Layout. See .

To recall Post Layouts from the Master Module Soft Keys:
1 Create and store, or load Post Layouts into S6 (see Saving and Loading Layout Sets (Titles)).
2 Navigate to the Tracks screen.
3 Press Layout Mode on the Master Module.
The Soft Keys on the Master Module display the currently available Track Layouts.
4 Hold the Master Module Shift switch (the on-screen Assign switch becomes Assign Post) and tap Assign Post so it remains
lit purple.
The Soft Keys on the Master Module display the currently available Post Layouts.
5 Press the corresponding Soft Key switch to recall that Post Layout.
The MPM(s) display the tracks stored in the selected Post Layout.
6 To return the Soft Keys to their previous view, press the Soft Key Close at the bottom of the bank showing Layouts.
To recall Meter Layouts from the Soft Keys:

• Navigate to the Home screen and press Meters.
• Or press Shift + Tracks on the Master Module.
2 Press the Layout Mode switch on the Master Module.
The Master Module Soft Keys show available Meter Layouts.
As previously described, you can also link Meter Layouts to standard Track Layouts so they recall together.
When recalling standard Layouts from the Soft Keys (Layout Mode), any Layouts that have linked Meter Layouts are indicated
with a unique icon:
Figure 38. Soft Key icon for a linked Meter Layout
To exit Layout Mode:
 Press Shift + Layout Mode. The system returns to Banking mode and displays tracks from the currently focused DAW.
Unlike standard Soft Keys, Layouts are not managed in the Soft Key Editor. Instead, they are automatically associated with special
banks of Soft Keys on the Master Module as soon as they are stored or loaded.

Spilling Selected Tracks to a Zone
You can spill tracks selected in the Track matrix to spill zones without having to create or recall a layout.
To spill tracks to a zone while in Layout mode:

1 Press either L Spill or R Spill on the Master Module (only one can be active at a time).
2 Tap Assign so it becomes enabled.
Whenever L or R Spill are active, pressing Assign enables the Assign switch but does not put the surface into Layout mode.
3 Tap to select tracks in the Track matrix. Selected tracks have a green outline.
On-screen, the Spill button appears next to other Track commands.
4 Tap the Spill button. Tracks are spilled to the enabled zone in the order they were selected (not their absolute track order).
5 To bank or nudge tracks within a spill zone, make sure the corresponding L Spill or R Spill switch on the Master Module is lit
white (press if necessary), then use the Bank and Nudge switches on the Master Module.
6 To unspill, do any of the following:
• Press Shift + L Spill or R Spill on the Master Module. (If L Spill or R Spill are lit white, for bank/nudge, press again so it is
lit blue to enable unspilling).
• Press Menu on any strip in the spill zone when the Menu keys are configured to unspill (see ).
• Recall a Layout when they are configured to collapse spill zones (see ).

Renaming, Rearranging, and Deleting Layouts in a Set
Once Layouts have been stored, they can be renamed, rearranged within the Layout grid, or deleted from the current Layout set.
For ways to add or remove tracks in Layouts, see Inserting, Deleting, and Clearing Tracks from Layouts.
To edit a Layout:
1 Press the Tracks switch, and make sure you are in Layout Mode.
2 Tap Edit (or press its corresponding switch).
• To rename a Layout, tap to select it in the grid, then double tap the Layout Name shown at the bottom of the screen. Enter a
new name, and then tap Done.
• To rearrange Layouts, drag any block to a new position. The block you tap or move is shown with an orange outline, while
the currently recalled Layout is outline in blue.
• To delete an individual Layout, tap its box in the grid momentarily until the box flashes, then drag it out of the grid.
• To delete all Layouts, tap Delete All then tap Delete to confirm (all Layouts will be deleted) or Cancel.
4 Tap Done to close the Layouts grid and return to the Layouts screen.
Saving Changed Layouts to New or Current

If you create or modify a Layout but press Recall before storing it as a new Layout, a backup Layout can be created in the next avail-
able block in the grid, or the current layout can be updated.
You can specify whether to save the new track arrangement to a new layout or to the currently loaded layout using the selector in
the Layouts section of Settings > Preferences.
Layouts settings in Settings > Preferences
To configure Layouts Auto-Save settings:

1 In Settings > Preferences, scroll to the Layouts section.
2 Tap the selector for Auto-Save Changed Layout on Recall Mode: and choose one of the following:
Off When enabled, no backup Layouts are created.
Save to New Layout Slot When enabled, backup Layouts are created in the next available block in the grid. Backup Layouts will
be automatically named and numbered, such as “Backup_01.” If there are no tracks assigned, no backup will be created.
Save to Current Layout Slot When enabled, the current (last recalled) layout is updated (no backup is created).

Saving and Loading Layout Sets (Titles)
Layouts can be saved and loaded to/from disk automatically, or manually. Use these features to load Layouts for specific sessions,
to transfer Layouts to other S6 systems, and for archiving. When saving or loading Layouts, all Layouts – including Post and Meter
Layouts, if any – are saved as a set into an S6 “Title” file (you cannot save individual Layouts). You can enable automatic loading
of each type of Layout in the Settings > System page (see ).
Titles can also store and load User Preferences. For more information, see .
Automatic Saving and Loading of Layout Sets by DAW

Layouts can be automatically saved and loaded to/from a designated application on a connected workstation. You can designate the
target application from the Workstation screen or from the Soft Keys. You can also disable automatic save/load by not designating
any application.
After designating a workstation, be sure to enable Layouts to and optimize settings.
To designate an application for layout save and load from the Workstation screen:
1 Navigate to the Workstation screen by doing either of the following:
• Press Settings, then scroll the Settings screen to the Workstation page.
• Press Shift + WS.
In previous versions of S6 software, pressing WS jumped to the Settings > Workstation screen. Beginning with version 2.0, press
Shift + WS to jump to the Workstations screen.
2 In the Applications list at the lower right of the screen, tap to select an application.
A small blue star appears next to the selected application.
Indication of designated DAW in Settings > Workstation
3 If designating the selected application will potentially overwrite current Layouts, a warning dialog appears.
• Press OK to load Layouts from the selected application (if any), replacing any Layouts currently loaded in S6.
• Press Cancel to cancel the operation (no Layouts are loaded).

To designate an application for layout save and load from the Soft Keys:
1 Press WS.
The Master Module Soft Keys list connected workstations in the left bank. Applications on the currently attentioned workstation
are listed in the right bank. If the Soft Keys are configured to only use one bank, press the Soft Key Next to access the Applica-
tions list. (For more information, see .)
2 Select a workstation in the left bank of Soft Keys, then select an application in the right bank.
A small blue star appears next to the selected application.
Indication of designated DAW in Soft Keys
3 If designating the selected application will potentially overwrite current Layouts, a warning dialog appears.
• Press OK to load Layouts from the selected application (if any), replacing any Layouts currently loaded.
• Press Cancel to cancel the operation (no Layouts are loaded).
To disable automatic saving and loading of Layouts, do either of the following:
 In the Settings > Workstation screen, tap the currently designated Application name so that the blue star disappears.
 In the Soft Keys, press the Soft Key for the currently designated Application name so that the blue star disappears.
Manually Loading and Saving Layout Sets

To save Layouts manually:
1 In the Layouts screen, tap Save. Or, tap Save As to store a new Title containing the current Layouts.
2 In the dialog that appears, tap in the File Name field to bring up the touch keyboard and enter a name for the Layout set. Close
the touch keyboard by touching Enter.
3 Tap Save. (Or tap Cancel to cancel the operation.)
To load Layouts manually:

1 In the Layouts screen, tap Load.
2 In the dialog that appears, tap to select the desired set of Layouts, then tap Open.

Chapter 19: Spill Zones
Spill Zones let you designate areas of the surface to spill VCAs, Layouts, tracks by type, and tracks by workstation. Up to two
non-overlapping spill zones can be defined. Spill zones provide access to session elements in consistent locations, and leave strips
outside the zone unaffected and available. Expand Knob Zones and Fader Zones provide similar capabilities for attention track
functions, with the additional capability to map parameters to faders.
QuickStart for Using Spill Zones

You can spill VCAs, Layouts, tracks, and workstations to spill zones by doing the following:
• Define up to two spill zones in Settings > Surface (see Configuring Spill Zones).
• VCAs can be spilled to a spill zone, or to as many adjacent strips as needed (standard VCA spill), directly from the Fader Mod-
ule/CSM strip for the VCA master using its Menu switch (see VCA Spill). You can also configure VCAs to spill automatically
to zones or to adjacent strips when the VCA is attentioned (see Auto Select Joystick Strips when Storing Layouts).
• Layouts, tracks, and workstations can be spilled to zones by first enabling the L Spill or R Spill switches on the Master Module,
enabling the Layout Mode, Type, or WS switches, then selecting the desired element to spill from the Soft Keys.
1 WS Layout
Mode
All 2
Tracks Type Flip
3
4 L Spill R Spill Clear
Clip
Mixer Close Clear

Solo
5
Home End
Display 1
Display 2
Settings
Sel
In Shift 6
Master Module switches for Spill Zones: 1) WS, 2) Layout Mode, 3) Type, 4) L and R Spill, 5) Nudge and Bank, and 6) Shift
• Once an element is spilled to a zone, the L Spill and R Spill switch LEDs light in colors matching the element that is spilled. Spill
can be indicated on strips by lit Menu switches in corresponding colors, and you can also set the strip Menu switches to unspill
(see Options for Spill).
Color indication of spilled elements
Color L Spill / R Spill LEDs Strip Menu LEDs (when enabled to light)
Dark Green VCA VCA Master
Light Green VCA slaves
Dark Blue Layouts Layouts
Pink Track Type Track Type
Light Blue Workstation Workstation
Chapter 19: Spill Zones 178

• Pressing an enabled Spill switch so it is lit white lets you use the Bank (<< and >>) and Nudge (< and >) switches to bank and
nudge tracks within the selected spill zone, without affecting tracks outside the zone.
Zones, Expand Zones, and more. Check back frequently for updates to this ongoing series.
Options for Spill

Several Preference settings let you customize the following aspects of spill zone operation.
• Choose how you want spilled elements to be justified within zones (see Bank and Spill Zone Justification Settings).
• Choose whether or not to have spill zone Menu switch LEDs light, and whether they let you unspill (see Spill Zone Menu Key
Mode for Layouts, Workstations or Types).
• Customize how many Master Module Soft Key banks are used for spill selection (see System Soft Key Display Mode).
• Choose whether or not Soft Keys automatically return to their previous view after selecting an element to spill (see Auto Close
Surface Recall Soft Keys).
• Choose whether recalling a Layout automatically collapses the currently enabled Spill Zone(s) (see Auto-Collapse Spill Zones
with Layout Recall).
Configuring Spill Zones

This section explains how to define spill zones on the surface. Zone assignments are automatically saved on the Master Module.
To configure Spill Zone parameters:

1 Go to Settings > Surface, then touch Config (or press its Main Menu switch).
Buttons for Surface, Expand, L Spill, and R Spill appear below the Diagnostics Info display.
Figure 39. Settings > Surface, Config screen

• To define the left spill zone, touch L Spill.
• To define the right spill zone, touch R Spill.
The console dims, and the touchscreen displays the current surface configuration. Commands for Undo, Done, Clear, and
Cancel appear along the bottom of the screen. Help text is shown in the Info area. If a previous zone was defined, the Attention
keys are lit on all strips in the existing zone.
3 Press any track Attention key to assign the beginning strip of the spill zone.
4 Press another Attention key to assign the end of the zone.
A purple bar appears below all strips between, and including, the selected beginning and end strips.
Figure 40. Strips 1 thru 6 defined as a spill zone

• Touch Undo if you press the wrong Attention key.
• Touch Clear to remove the spill zone.
• Touch Cancel to exit the spill zone configuration screen without changing the current spill zone definition (if any).
6 Touch Done to accept the spill zone.
7 Repeat for the other zone, if desired.
Spilling Layouts, Tracks, and Workstations

The following sections provide step-by-step instructions for spilling Layouts, tracks, and workstations to spill zones.
For information on spilling VCAs to spill zones (or to adjacent strips), see VCA Spill.
Spilling Layouts to a spill zone differs from simply recalling a Layout as follows:
• When a Layout is spilled to a zone, strips outside the zone are unaffected and remain on their currently banked tracks.
• When a Layout is recalled, the surface enters Layout mode in which only tracks that are in a Layout can appear on the surface.
Strips that are not included in the Layout will be blank, or continue to show tracks from the previously recalled Layout (depend-
ing on whether their strips were scoped for recall when the Layout was created).
You can also spill selected tracks to either zone while in Layout mode (see Spilling Selected Tracks to a Zone).
Tracks can be spilled by type (such as Audio, Aux, Instrument, or Masters) into spill zones, or across as many strips as needed.
Tracks from other workstations can be spilled to zones, without having to focus the parent workstation/application.
To spill a layout, track type or workstation to a spill zone:

1 On the Master Module, press to enable L Spill or R Spill.
2 Press one of the following switches on the Master Module:
• For Layouts, press Layout Mode.
• For Track types, press Type. (To spill a Track Type across as many strips as needed, disable L or R Spill and press Type.)
• For workstations, press WS.
The Master Module soft keys display available choices for the enabled element (Layouts, track types, or workstations).
3 Press a soft key to select and spill the corresponding Layout, Track type, or workstation to the enabled spill zone (left or right).
• When a layout is spilled the Layout Mode switch LED lights dark blue. The enabled L Spill or R Spill switch on the Master
Module also lights dark blue.
• When any track type (other than All) is spilled, the enabled L Spill or R Spill switch on the Master Module is pink.
• When a workstation is spilled, the enabled L Spill or R Spill switch on the Master Module is light blue (the same color as
when tracks are spilled).
On channel strips, Menu switches within the enabled zone light in the same color as the enabled L Spill or R Spill switch if the
option to light them is enabled (see Spill Zone Menu Key Mode for Layouts, Workstations or Types).
4 To bank or nudge tracks within a spill zone, make sure the corresponding L Spill or R Spill switch is lit white (press if neces-
sary), then use the Bank and Nudge switches on the Master Module.
Spill Zone banking commands are also available as Soft Keys in the default Pro Tools assignments (along with other Surface com-
mands). You can navigate spill zones by Banking from the Fader Module or CSM.
5 To unspill, press Shift + L Spill or R Spill on the Master Module, or press Menu on any strip in the spill zone when the Menu
keys are configured to unspill (see Spill Zone Menu Key Mode for Layouts, Workstations or Types).
Commands to collapse (unspill) the left and right spill zones are also available as Soft Keys.

Chapter 20: Expand
S4/S6 provides two ways to expand (or “spill”) plug-in and function parameters to controls on the surface, Strip Expand and At-
tention Expand Zones.
Strip Expand Spills parameters beyond the current strip, expanding (or “spilling”) EQ, dynamics, or other functions across mul-
tiple controls on Knob, Process, and/or Fader modules in the same chassis as the track (S6), or across the track’s CSM (S4).
Attention Expand Zones Spill parameters for the Attention Track to designated Attention Expand modules to provide expanded
control for Attention Track parameters in a consistent location. On S6, up to two Knob Modules and one Fader Module can be des-
ignated as Attention Expand Zones. S4 supports up to two optional Knob Modules as Attention Expand Zones.
Attention Expand Zones follow Home screen focus, and can be configured for primary and fallback function views.
• When a plug-in or function is expanded to an Attention Expand Knob Zone, the arrangement of parameters to knobs is pre-de-
termined, and consistent. You can substitute other parameters temporarily, but substitutions do not persist.
• When a plug-in or function is expanded to an Attention Expand Fader Zone, the arrangement of parameters to faders is de-
termined by your own custom mapping (you must first create custom maps of parameters to faders, as explained in the fol-
lowing sections).
• Attention Expand Knob Zones and Attention Expand Fader Zones can be toggled on and off independently to maximize pa-
rameter access and visibility.
Check out the Avid Pro Tools | S6 Workflows on YouTube for in-depth explorations of how to use S4/S6, including Layouts,
Spill Zones, Expand Zones, and more. Check back frequently for updates to this ongoing series.
To see how EQ and Dynamics parameters map to knobs in either Strip Expand or Attention Expand mode, see Appendix B, “EQ
and DYN Parameters in Expand Mode.”
Chapter 20: Expand 181

Strip Expand
Strip Expand mode spills parameters beyond the current strip, expanding (or “spilling”) EQ, dynamics, or other functions across
multiple controls on Knob, Process, and/or Fader modules in the same chassis as the track (S6) or the CSM (S4).
• When a plug-in or function is expanded to Expand Knobs, the arrangement of parameters to knobs is consistent and cannot
be changed. To see examples of where EQ and Dyn parameters are mapped, see EQ and DYN Parameters in Expand Mode.
• When a plug-in or function is expanded to Expand Faders, the arrangement of parameters to faders is determined by your
own custom mapping. You must first create or load custom maps as explained in the following sections.
Indication of Expand Mode on Display Modules Whenever any track is in a strip Expand mode, an orange outline appears
around the track name of the expanded track on its Display Module strip. When Expand mode is enabled on more than one strip,
the outline appears around the most recently expanded strip name.
Figure 41. Indication of Expand mode on a Display Module (track 7)
If the Display Module is in any Function view, the knobs are also outlined in orange. When Display Modules are set to display two
functions, both sets of knob functions are outlined. In addition, Display Modules in any Function view show EQ or Dynamics
graphs, or Pan, as follows:
• When EQ is expanded, the EQ graph appears on strip 3 (replacing the input and output Function display).
• When Dyn is expanded, the dynamics graph appears on strip 8.
• When Pan is expanded, pan appears on strip 8.
Expand Knobs
You can configure Expand Knobs to automatically follow selection of one or more functions (see Auto Expand Functions) or you
can enable Expand Knobs manually as described in the following instructions.
To enable Knob Expand mode on a strip:

1 Press Exp on the Process Module (S6) or CSM (S4).
Multiple strips can be in Expand mode simultaneously.
To put all strips into strip Expand mode simultaneously, press the All switch (on the Master Module) before
pressing Expand. The All switch is latching, so press it again to disable All mode (the switch becomes unlit).
The most recently selected S6 strip/function, or S4 Focus strip/function, is expanded. Selecting a different
function for an Expanded strip replaces the currently expanded function view.
Figure 42. EQ expanded to a Knob Module
When enabled, the Exp switch LED lights orange. Only the currently expanded function LED is lit on the Process Module or
CSM, letting you quickly identify what is being viewed.

• If multiple strips are in Expand mode the inactive Expand keys light yellow.
• When enabled in an S6 chassis with one or more Knob Modules, Expand mode takes over either or both Knob Modules de-
pending on the number and mapping of parameters in the current function.
• When enabled on a strip in an S6 chassis with only one Fader Module and one Process module (no Knob Modules), Expand
mode takes over the eight knobs of the Process Module.
2 If more parameters are available than there are controls, the < and > (Page) switches light on strip 8; press either to navigate to
other parameters.
3 To take a strip out of Expand mode, press its lit Exp switch.
Expand Faders
Expand Faders let you map parameters from plug-ins and other functions to faders on Fader Modules.
• Up to 16 parameters from each plug-in or function can be mapped to faders in any order. When secondary parameters exist
they appear on the strip Mute and/or Select switches. Multiple maps can be created to store and recall assignments for each
plug-in (such as one map for EQ3, another map for Dyn3, and so on) and function (one for pan, another for sends, and so on).
• Once maps have been created they can be recalled onto any Fader Module by enabling Fader Expand mode in any resident
strip, similar to standard Knob Module Expand. You can also configure Fader Zones to automatically expand when there is
a valid map for the selected plug-in or function.
Figure 43. EQ parameters mapped to faders in Expand Fader mode
Expand Faders Quickstart
To start using Expand Faders:

1 Select a plug-in or function on a strip, such as EQ.
2 On that same strip, press Attention + Expand (hold down the strip Attention switch (Fader Module) and press that strip’s
Exp switch (on the S6 Process Module, or S4 CSM)). Exp flashes blue.
3 On the corresponding Knob Module(s) or knob section on the CSM, tap a knob to select its parameter. The knob flashes.
4 On the Fader Module, tap a fader. The selected parameter maps to that fader. Repeat for up to 15 other parameters and faders.
To access faders 9–16 press the lit User 2 switch on that Fader Module. Press the lit User 1 switch to return to faders 1–8.
5 When finished, press the flashing (blue) Exp switch to store the map.
6 Repeat for other plug-ins or functions.
7 Once maps are created, you can recall them to any Fader Module by selecting a function on a Process Module, or by holding
the Exp switch on the desire strip for half a second.
8 Adjust mapped parameters by moving the corresponding fader. Use the strip Mute and/or Select switches to toggle secondary
parameters, if any. Parameter value is displayed when adjusting the fader (and ignores any Momentary Value Delay setting).
9 To exit Expand Fader mode, press the lit Exp switch so it becomes unlit.

Creating Expand Fader Maps
You can assign parameters from knobs to faders to create custom parameter maps. You can define one custom map per
plug-in/function per session. For example, a single session can include a custom map for the Dyn3 Compressor/Limiter plug-in,
and a map for BF-76. Each map can include up to eight parameters from a single plug-in or function. You must create at least one
parameter map in order to utilize Attention Expand Fader Zones.
Variants of the same plug-in or function (such as 1-band and 7-band EQ3) share a single map. Different formats/channel widths
(such as mono versus stereo) vary depending on the type of processing and manufacturer.
• EQ or Dynamics plug-ins can sometimes share a single map between mono, stereo, and other formats.
• Plug-ins from other categories (such as Delay) often require unique maps for each variant or width, but this varies with dif-
ferent plug-ins from different manufacturers.
Custom fader maps are stored in User Preferences (use Autoload from Titles and Sessions to manage fader maps).
To map parameters to Expand Fader Zones:

1 Select the desired plug-in or function (press the corresponding switch on the Process Module or CSM).
2 On the desired strip hold the Attention switch and then press Exp on the same strip (S6) or on the same CSM (S4).
The Exp switch flashes blue and the Clear switch lights red. The knobs above the strip enter Expand mode. Any previously
mapped parameters for the selected plug-in or function appear on the strips.
3 Tap a knob to select its current parameter. The knob flashes.
4 On the corresponding Fader Module (S6) or CSM (S4), touch the fader where you want to map the selected parameter.
The selected parameter is mapped to the fader on the selected strip. Secondary parameters, if any, map to the corresponding
Mute and/or Select switches. For example, when EQ3 Lo Frequency is mapped to a fader, Mute toggles the Lo band in/out.
1 3
5
2
Creating an Expand Fader map (S6 shown)
5 To clear the entire current mapping, press the lit (red) Clear switch on the attentioned strip. To reassign a parameter, repeat
steps 3 and 4. To clear an individual fader assignment, top an unlit knob (if any) then touch the fader you want to clear.
6 To access faders 9–16 press the lit User 2 switch. To return to faders 1–8 press the lit User 1 switch.
7 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to map parameters to other faders on that Fader Module.
8 To store the current mapping, press the flashing Exp switch. The Exp switch lights blue (stops flashing).
9 To exit Expand Fader mode, press the lit Exp switch so it becomes unlit.

Recalling an Expand Fader Map
Once maps have been created they can be recalled onto any Fader Module by enabling Fader Expand mode from any resident strip.
You can also configure Fader Zones to automatically expand when there is a valid map for the selected plug-in or function (see
Auto Expand Faders).
To access a stored map:

1 If the Exp switch on the desired strip is lit blue (solid, not flashing), select a Function that has previously been mapped.
2 If the Exp switch on the desired strip is not lit, do either of the following:
• Hold down the Exp switch on the desired strip for at least half a second. Any previously stored map is recalled.
• Press Attention + Exp on the desired strip. Any stored map is recalled, and the Exp switch flashes, indicating map edit mode.
3 To exit, press the lit Exp switch so it becomes unlit.
Expand Fader Maps 9–16 Banking
The User 1 and User 2 switches bank between the two sets of 8 strips while assigning parameters to faders or when a fader map
is recalled on a Fader Module. These switches light to indicate the available bank (press a lit User switch to bring the corresponding
bank to the faders).
User 2 switch lit in Expand Faders mode (press to access Expand Faders 9–16)
The modifier switches Shift, Ctrl, Opt/Win, and Cmd/Alt remain available on the Fader Module or CSM when in Expand mode.

Auto Expand Faders
Enabling the Auto Expand Faders setting lets you expand mapped parameters to faders with a single press of the Exp switch.
When not enabled, expanding parameters to faders requires you to hold down the Exp switch, or press Attention + Exp.
To configure Expand Fader to auto expand:

1 Go to Settings > User, and display the Strips section.
2 Enable the Auto Expand Faders setting.
Figure 44. Auto Expand Faders enabled in the Strips section of Settings > User
Merge Recalled Expand Faders with Current Faders
The Auto-Load preference Merge Recalled Expand Faders with Current Faders is available in Settings > System.
• When enabled, opening a session or loading a Title loads and merges only stored fader maps that are not already present on
the S6.
• When disabled, opening a session or loading a Title replaces all currently present fader maps with those stored in the session
or Title.
Auto-Load preference to Merge Recalled Expand Faders With Current Faders, in Settings > System
This setting is available as a Soft Key.

Merge Recalled Expand Faders command in Soft Keys in S6 v3.6.1
Merge Recalled Expand Fad-

Surface > General Option > Preferences >
ers with Current Faders

Saving and Transferring Expand Fader Maps
(Save, Load, Auto Load, and Transfer)
Expand Fader maps are stored in User Preferences along with most S6 settings and attributes, including User Settings, Layouts, and
Spill Zone states.
You can manually save User Preference files from the Settings > User page using the Save and Save As commands. These com-
mands let you name the file and choose a location on the Master Module. To archive or transfer your settings and fader maps, go
to Settings > About, press Logout, then in the File Explorer navigate to your saved file and transfer it via USB or to an available
network destination.
You can also have User Preferences, custom fader maps and other settings stored in sessions, and configure S6 to automatically
load some or all attributes from that session or project. To utilize session storage and automatic loading, first designate a worksta-
tion and application, then configure Auto Load settings in Settings > System.
• Designating a workstation and application tells S6 to store settings and attributes into sessions or projects on that workstation
and application.
• Auto Load settings tell S6 which attributes to load from those sessions or projects.
Store attributes in session/project templates (if your application supports them) to be able to access custom fader maps, Layouts,
and other attributes in future work.

Attention Expand Zones
On S6, up to two Knob Modules and one Fader Module can be designated as Attention Expand Zones. On S4, up to two Knob Mod-
ule can be designated as an Attention Expand Zone.
Attention Expand Zones provide expanded control for Attention Track parameters in a designated, consistent location. Attention
Expand Zones follow Home screen focus, and can be configured for primary and fallback function views.
• When a plug-in or function is expanded to an Attention Expand Knob Zone, the arrangement of parameters to knobs is pre-de-
termined, and consistent. You can substitute other parameters temporarily, but substitutions do not persist. M40 systems sup-
port up to two Knob Modules as Expand Zones (M10 systems support one Expand zone).
• When a plug-in or function is expanded to an Attention Expand Fader Zone, the arrangement of parameters to faders is de-
termined by your own custom mapping (you must first create custom maps of parameters to faders, as explained in Creating
Expand Fader Maps
• Attention Expand Knob Zones and Attention Expand Fader Zones can be toggled on (enabled) and off (disabled)
independently to maximize parameter access and visibility.
Configuring Modules as Attention Expand Zones

On S6, up to two Knob Modules can be designated as Attention Expand Knob Zone, and one Fader Module can be designated as
an Attention Expand Fader Zone. On S4, up to two Knob Module can be designated as Attention Expand Knob Zones.
To designate modules as Attention Expand Zones:

1 Go to the Settings > Surface page.
2 Press Config, then press Expand.
The choices Knob and Fader appear below the graphic of the current surface configuration. Any currently designated Expand
Zones are indicated by a purple triangle (if enabled) or gray triangle (if disabled) with a number 1 or 2.
Figure 45. Knob and Fader commands in Settings > Surface, Config Expand (S6 shown)

• To designate an Attention Expand Knob Zone, press Knob. The knobs on all available Knob Modules light, and the Assign
Expand Knob Module screen appears on the touchscreen.
• To designate an Attention Expand Fader Zone, press Fader. The LEDs on all available Fader Modules light, and the Assign
Expand Fader Module screen appears on the touchscreen.
Commands for Undo, Done, Clear, and Cancel appear along the bottom of the screen.

4 Follow the on-screen instructions to designate the corresponding type of module as an Expand Zone.
• Touch any knob on any lit Knob Module to assign that Knob Module as an Attention Expand Knob Zone. The touched Knob
Module becomes unlit. On-screen, its block in the Surface configuration displays an Attention icon with a number (1 or 2),
to indicate its current Expand Zone assignment.
• S6 only: Touch any fader on any lit Fader Module to assign that Fader Module as an Attention Expand Fader Zone. The
touched Fader Module becomes unlit. On-screen, its block in the Surface configuration displays an Attention icon.
Each currently designated Zone is indicated by a purple triangle when the zone is enabled, or gray triangle if disabled.
Figure 46. Settings > Surface, Config Expand showing Expand Zones designated and enabled (shown at left) and disabled (shown at right)
For more information on enabling Expand Zones, see Toggling Attention Expand Zones On or Off.

• Press Undo if you pressed the wrong module hardware.
• Press Clear to remove all Expand Knob Modules that are not fixed.
• Press Cancel to go exit the Expand configuration screen without changing the current surface arrangement.
6 Press Done to accept the new arrangement.
Before utilizing an Attention Expand Fader Zone, create Fader maps as described in Creating Expand Fader Maps.
Configuring Expand Zone Function Settings
The Home screen Local Options screen lets you select primary and backup functions for Attention Expand Knob Zones and, sep-
arately, for Attention Expand Fader Zones.
Expand Knob Function and Backup Function
These selectors let you configure functions to display on Attention Expand Knob Zones when a track is attentioned. Two pairs of
selectors are available to set primary and backup functions on each of up to two Knob Modules.
Figure 47. Settings for Expand Knob and Expand Fader Function settings in Home screen Local Options
To configure primary and backup functions for Attention Expand Knob Zones:
1 Navigate to the Home Screen, then tap its Local Options (gear) icon.
Two sets of selectors are provided, 1st and 2nd Expand Knob Function and Backup Function Selected on Attention Change,
which correspond to Knob Modules configured as Attention Expand Knob Zone 1 and 2 (if present) in Settings > Surface. The
left selector sets the primary function, and the selector to the right sets the backup function for the corresponding module.
S6 M10 systems support a single Knob Module designated as an Attention Expand Knob Zone.

2 Tap to display the first (left-most) drop down menu.
• To have the Expand Knobs stay focused on whichever function was most recently edited, choose Last Selected.
• To specify a function, select a function such as Pan, Bus, EQ, or Dynamics. Not all functions are available in all applications.
3 Repeat for the second (right-most) “backup” drop down menu. This lets you define a knob function to display whenever you at-
tention a track that does not contain the same function as the previously attentioned track.
Expand Fader Function and Backup Function
When a function is assigned as a Primary Expand Zone function, toggling the Attention Expand Fader Zone on assigns parameters
from that function to the faders using your custom map. If no map exists for that plug-in or function, the faders will be blank (see
Creating Expand Fader Maps).
To configure primary and backup functions for Attention Expand Fader Zones:
1 Navigate to the Home screen and press the Local Options (gear) icon.
2 Choose a function from the Expand Fader Function and Backup Function Selected on Attention Change selectors.
Using Attention Expand Zones

When modules are configured as Attention Expand Zones, their function assignment follows Home screen focus. Attentioning a
strip expands the (last) selected or backup function to the enabled Knob Module(s) and Fader Module.
Attention Expand Zones do not require use of the strip Exp (Expand) switch.
While expanded, you can assign a different function to the Knob or Fader Zones from the same track or a different track at any time.
Using Attention Expand Knobs
To use Attention Expand Knob Zones:

1 Make sure you have followed the instructions in Configuring Modules as Attention Expand Zones to designate at least one
Knob Module as an Attention Expand Knob Zone.
2 Configure Expand Knob Function and Backup Function.
3 Attention the desired track.
4 If necessary, enable the Attention Expand Knob Zone (see Toggling Attention Expand Zones On or Off).
5 Adjust parameters as needed.
• Rotate a knob to adjust its parameter. Secondary parameters (if any) can be toggled using the knob In and/or Sel switches.
• To bypass a currently expanded plug-in, press the Back switch in strip 8. When the Back switch LED is green, the insert is
active (not bypassed). When unlit, the insert is bypassed.
Figure 48. Attention Expand Knob Zone with expanded EQ3 7-band (plug-in bypass via column 8 Back switch)
6 To navigate the zone to a different plug-in, function, or track, see Changing Function Assignment or Attention Track.
7 To take the designated Attention Expand Knob Module out of Attention Expand mode, toggle the zone off.

Using Attention Expand Faders (S6 Only)
When a Fader Module is configured as an Attention Expand Fader Zone, function assignment follows Home screen focus. You can
specify primary and back-up functions, and change function assignment at any time.
To use Attention Expand Faders:

1 Make sure you have created a map for the desired plug-ins or functions (see Creating Expand Fader Maps).
2 Make sure you have followed the instructions in Configuring Modules as Attention Expand Zones.
3 Configure Expand Fader Function and Backup Function.
4 Attention a track. If necessary, enable the Attention Expand Fader Zone (see Toggling Attention Expand Zones On or Off).
Figure 49. Attention Expand Fader Zone with EQ3 7-band parameters mapped to the faders
5 To access faders 9–16 press the lit User 2 switch. To return to faders 1–8 press the lit User 1 switch.
6 To navigate the zone to a different plug-in, function, or track, see Changing Function Assignment or Attention Track.
7 To exit, toggle the Attention Expand Fader zone off.
Layouts Mode, Banking Mode, and Enabling Expand Faders

• When you enable Expand Faders while in Layout Mode, tracks from the Layout that were on the affected Fader Module are
hidden by the Expand Fader Zone (other tracks in the Layout beyond the zone, if any, remain in place and visible).
• When you enable Expand Faders while in standard Banking mode, tracks previously on the affected Fader Module and all sub-
sequent tracks are moved to the right, remaining visible.
Changing Function Assignment or Attention Track
While an Attention Expand Zone is enabled you can use the touchscreen to assign a different function from the currently atten-
tioned track to the Zone, or assign a function from a different track.
To assign a different function to an Attention Expand module:

1 If you want to assign a different function from the same track, skip to step 2.
If you want to access a function on a different track, navigate the touchscreen to the Tracks screen, attention the desired track,
and make sure the Home screen is displayed.
2 In the Home screen, tap to select a function in the Function scroller, then tap the desired knobs in the Attention Track screen.
• The bracket next to the tapped knobs flashes.
• On enabled Attention Expand Knob module(s), the Back switches lights purple.
• On the Attention Expand Fader module (if enabled), the Attention switches light purple.
3 Do the following:
• To assign the selected function to an Attention Expand Knob Zone, press any lit Back switch on that module.
• To assign the selected function to an Attention Expand Fader Zone, press any lit Attention switch on that module.

Toggling Attention Expand Zones On or Off
You can toggle Attention Expand Knob and Fader Zones on or off from the Home screen Local Options, and from Soft Keys.
• Being able to toggle Attention Expand Knob Zones on or off lets you quickly place Knob Modules into whichever mode
(Attention Expand or standard mode) best suits the current task, without having to reconfigure the Surface page.
• When the S6 Attention Expand Fader Zone is toggled off, the Fader Module continues to show volume, pan, or other track pa-
rameters when their corresponding Knob Module is in use as an Expand Knob Zone. When the Attention Expand Fader Zone
is toggled on you can adjust parameters from strips on the Attention Expand Fader Zone using you custom parameter maps.
To toggle Expand Zones on or off from the Home screen Local Options:
1 Navigate to the Home screen and press the Local Options (gear) icon.
2 Tap to enable or disable Enable Attention Expand Knob Zone, or Enable Attention Expand Fader Zone (S6 only).
To toggle Expand Zones on or off from the Soft Keys:

1 Make sure you have loaded the default (Factory) Pro Tools appset (for instructions, see Soft Keys).
2 On the Automation Module, make sure the right side Soft Key bank is showing the Extras page.
Figure 50. Automation Module Soft Keys showing Attention Expand Faders enabled and Attention Expand Knobs disabled
3 Press the corresponding Soft Key to toggle Enable Exp Fader or Enable Exp Knob.
When the Soft Key switch LEDs are lit, the zones are enabled. When unlit, the zones are disabled. Status is also shown in the
Config Expand screen of the Settings > Surface page.
Soft Keys to Toggle Expand Zones On and Off
Soft Keys to toggle Expand Zones on and off are included in the default Pro Tools appset, and are also are available in the Soft Keys
Editor as Surface commands if you want to assign them to custom switches or actions.
Expand Zone Soft Keys in S6 v3.6
Command Command Type Category 1 Category 2
Enable Attention Expand Knob Zones Surface > Attention Track Options > Enable Attention Expand Knob Zones
Enable Attention Expand Fader Zone Surface > Attention Track Options > Enable Attention Expand Fader Zone
Managing Expand Fader Zone Maps

Expand Fader maps are stored in User Preferences. You can configure the system to automatically load User Preferences, including
Expand Fader Maps, by enabling the User Preferences option in the Auto Load settings in Settings > System. To automatically
load only Expand Fader maps (without loading all User Preferences), enable the Expand Faders option in the Auto Load settings
and disable the User Prefs option.
For more information, see Autoload from Titles and Sessions.

Part V: Preferences
Chapter 21: User Preferences
User Preferences let you configure global S4/S6 settings for Banking, Strips, Layouts, Knobs, Soft Keys, Workstation (General),
Solo, and Display Modules, and custom speaker output and monitor names. Scroll the User Preferences screen down or up to access
different sections such as Surface, Workstations, and Display Modules.
User Preferences can be saved and loaded manually, and configured for automatic loading from Titles and sessions.
Saving and Loading User Preferences

User Preferences are automatically stored along with Layouts to Title files on the Master Module, and to session files on any des-
ignated workstation. You can enable automatic loading of User Preferences and other attributes from the Settings > System page
(see Autoload from Titles and Sessions). User Preferences can also be saved and loaded separately using the Save and Load
commands in the User Preferences screen. System settings persist and are not stored with, or affected by recall of, User settings.
To enable loading of User Preferences:

1 Navigate the touchscreen to the Settings screen, tap User, and configure the available settings as desired.
2 Tap the System tab at the top of the screen.
3 In the AutoLoad from Titles and Sessions section at the top of the screen, tap to enable User Preferences.
Settings > System, Autoload User Preferences enabled
To load User Preferences from a Title file:

1 Enable the System Auto-Load setting User Preferences.
2 On the Master Module, press Tracks.
3 Touch Load, select the desired Title and touch Open.
To configure automatic loading of User Preferences:

1 Enable the System Preference setting Autoload User Preferences from Titles and Sessions.
2 Designate a workstation application for automatic store/recall of Layouts by doing the following:
• On the Master Module press WS, then make sure the desired Workstation is selected in the Master Module Soft Keys. If nec-
essary, press its Soft Key to focus it.
• Press the Soft Key corresponding to the desired application (a blue star appears next to the designated application).
For complete instructions on designating workstations from the Soft Keys or from the Workstation screen, see Automatic Saving
and Loading of Layout Sets by DAW.
To save or load User Preferences manually:

1 Navigate to Settings > User.
• To save the current User Preference settings, touch Save and then name and save the file.
• To load a saved User Preferences file, touch Load, select the desired file, and touch Open.
Chapter 21: User Preferences 194

Location of Titles
By default, S6 Titles files are stored in C:\ProgramData\Avid\S6\Titles
If the ProgramData folder is hidden, do the following to show it:

1 Navigate the touchscreen to the Settings > About page and press Logout.
2 Select Administrator. When prompted enter the default password (password) or your custom password, if any.
3 Click the File Explorer tile and in Explorer, tap View, then tap Options.
4 In the Folder Options dialog, tap to select the View tab, then tap to enable Show Hidden folders, files, and drives.
Resetting User Preferences to Factory

The Settings > User page provides a Factory command to reset all User Settings to their factory defaults. To save a copy of any
custom User Settings use the Save command in Settings > User.
Surface
The Surface section contains Banking, Attention, Strips, Joystick Strips, Layouts, Knobs, Soft Keys, and 3D Panner settings.
Figure 51. Surface Banking section in Settings > User
Banking
The settings in the Banking section determine how the surface responds to banking commands.
Mode:
8 Strips The system banks by eight strips.
Whole Surface The system banks by the number of fader strips in the current S6 arrangement.
Auto-Bank to Track Mode
These settings let you define how banking follows channel selection. These settings apply to all Select methods (tapping to select
tracks in the Tracks matrix, pressing a channel Select switch, or selecting a DAW track on-screen).
Off Banking ignores channel selection.
If Not Visible on Surface Banking ignores track selection if that track is already on the surface. For example, on a 16 fader system
displaying tracks 1–16, selecting track 15 will not bank the surface but selecting track 17 (or any other off-bank track) will bank.
Always When enabled, the surface will always bank to the currently selected track.

Bank and Spill Zone Justification Settings
Bank Justification settings let you specify how selected tracks are justified on the surface. Separately, you can also set justification
for each Spill Zone.
To set bank justification:

1 Go to Settings > Preferences, and scroll to the Banking section at the top of the screen.
2 Tap the Bank Justification Mode selector and choose one of the following:
Left Tracks appear on strips starting with strip 1 (left-most strip), providing “end stop” banking.
Left of Master Module Tracks appear on strips starting with the strip closest to the left side of the Master Module.
Right of Master Module Tracks appear on strips starting with the strip closest to the right side of the Master Module.
Right Tracks appear on strips starting with the last (right-most) strip.
To set Spill Zone justification:

1 Go to Settings > Preferences, and scroll to the Banking section at the top of the screen.
2 To set justification for the left Spill Zone, tap the left-most selector under Spill Left and Spill Right Justification Mode and
choose Left or Right. (These provide identical functionality as the Bank Justification modes, except they apply only to zones.)
3 Repeat for the right Spill Zone.
For more information on configuring and using spill zones, see Chapter 19, “Spill Zones.”.
Attention
The Attention section provides Attention-related User Preferences in one location.
Figure 52. Attention section in Settings > User

Attention Most Recently Clicked DAW Area
(Requires Pro Tools 2019.5 or Later)
You can optimize how S4/S6 reacts to actions on-screen in your DAW using the Attention Most Recently Clicked DAW Area op-
tions in the Attention section of Settings > User.
Enable any available setting to control when a mouse click tells the surface to attention a track. For example, if Edit Window is en-
abled and you click in the time line or clicking/selecting a clip in your DAW, that track is automatically attentioned on S6. If Edit
Window is not enabled, clicking in the time line or clicking/selecting a clip will not attention that track. Similarly, if Pan Controls
is enabled clicking on a track Pan control or Output window attentions that track on S6 (and on the Master Joystick Module, if any).
Additional Information for Attention Triggers
Definitions for Attention Most Recently Clicked DAW Area Settings
Attention Setting Trigger Additional Information
Track Name Clicking a track name in Mix or Edit window
Fader Clicking a track volume fader in Mix window
• Clicking in a track/playlist lane in the timeline • When clicking, the attention trigger is only based
• Keyboard shortcuts that move the insertion or section on the initial mouse click location. If you define a
Edit Window between tracks (such as Command Focus “p” and “;”). See selection spanning multiple tracks, or bound an
“Edit Selection Move Up / Down” below. edit group, the attentioned track is based on the
first point of contact on the edit timeline.
• Clicking to open a plug-in window

Plug-Ins • Clicking anywhere in the plug-in window (including the
header with automation, Librarian and the Target icon)
• Clicking a pan knob or puck in the Mix window Note that clicking on a pan control n the I/O view of
Pan Controls • Clicking anywhere within a floating Pan window the Edit window will not trigger attention.
• Clicking on a pan puck in the I/O view of the Edit window
• Clicking to open a send window Note that clicking a send control in any Expanded
Send Controls • Clicking anywhere within an open send window (including Sends view will not trigger attention.
the window Target)
Using the computer keyboard or EUCON key commands to

Edit Selection Move move the edit cursor or a selection up or down. For example, In Pro Tools make sure to enable
Up / Down pressing “p” to move up or “;” to move down will attention the Link Track and Edit Selection
last track in which the cursor lands.
You can specify where you want clicked DAW controls to appear on S4/S6 by configuring Display Knobs from Most Recently
Clicked DAW Area.
When using a DAW that does not directly support these new features, the previously available “Attention most recently selected
track” setting remains available. When using a DAW that does directly support these new features, “Attention most recently se-
lected track” is not available.

Display Knobs from Most Recently Clicked DAW Area
Use this setting to specify where you want clicked DAW controls to appear on S4/S6 (such as only on the Master Module, on an
Expand Knob Module, or on both the Master and Expand Fader).
Beginning S6 19.7, S6 Expand Fader Modules use the Primary and Backup Functions when clicked DAW controls do not have a
corresponding knob type (such as clicking on Track Name or in the timeline). In addition to extending the usefulness of the Primary
and Backup Function settings, this also prevents Attention Expand Zones from going blank in certain attention-via-click scenarios.

1 Go to Settings > User and scroll to the Attention section.
This setting is also available in Home screen Settings.
2 Choose an S4/S6 element from the Display Knobs from Most Recently Clicked DAW Area selector.
Display Knobs from Most Recently Clicked DAW Area setting, in Settings > User
Attention Most Recently Selected Track
This setting lets you configure whether or not selecting a track by pressing its Select switch also attentions that track, and optimize
behavior for the focused workstation.
Off Selecting a track does not automatically attention that track.
On Selecting a track on any connected DAW automatically attentions that track. If Focus Workstation of Most Recently Atten-
tioned Track is also enabled, the host DAW becomes the focused DAW.
From Focused DAW Only Selecting a track on the focused DAW automatically attentions that track. Selecting a track on any other
connected DAW does not attention that track, which also does not change DAW focus if Focus Workstation of Most Recently At-
tentioned Track is enabled.
Select Most Recently Attentioned Track
Attentioning a track by pressing its Attention key also selects that track.
Attention Track of Most Recently Selected Function
When enabled, this setting links track attention with strip Function selection. Pressing the Function key on a Process Module for
any strip automatically attentions the corresponding track.
If the Tracks screen local option setting Show Home Screen on Attention is also enabled, pressing a Function key on a Process
Module also switches the touchscreen to the Home screen for the attentioned track.
Attention Track of Most Recently Selected Solo
When enabled, this setting links track attention with strip Solo selection. Soloing a track automatically attentions that track.
Pressing Clear Solo (to clear all currently soloed tracks) leaves the last soloed track attentioned.

Focus Workstation of Most Recently Selected Track
When enabled, this setting links workstation focus with track selection. Selecting a track focuses its workstation, switching the Soft
Keys and KVM (if any) accordingly. When not enabled, workstations must be focused from Settings > Workstation.
Show Home Screen on Strip Attention
When enabled, the Touchscreen displays the Home screen when any strip is Attentioned by pressing its Attention Key on a Fader
or Automation Module.
You can also specify a default function view and knob focus for the Home screen when a track is attentioned. See for more infor-
mation.
Automatic Spill of Attentioned VCA
These settings let you toggle Automatic VCA Spill on/off, and set VCAs to automatically spill to either spill zone, or to the left or
right of the Attention Track Fader when a VCA is attentioned.
Figure 53. VCA Auto Spill settings in Tracks Local Options
Off When Off is enabled, no auto-spill occurs (VCAs must be spilled manually; see ).
Spill Left of Attention Track Fader Attentioning a VCA automatically spills members to the left of the Attention Track Fader.
Spill Right of Attention Track Fader Attentioning a VCA automatically spills members to the right of the Attention Track Fader.
Spill Zone Left Attentioning a VCA automatically spills it to the left spill zone.
Spill Zone Right Attentioning a VCA automatically spills it to the right spill zone.
For more information, see Chapter 19, “Spill Zones.”

Strips
The Strips preference settings control the behavior of hardware strips on Fader Modules, optimize banking for locked strips, man-
age how Hidden Tracks are displayed, configure Auto Expand functions, and more.
Figure 54. Strips section in Settings > User
Channel Selection Mode
Channel Selection Mode provides choices for Sum and Intercancel functionality:
Sum Each selected track is added to the existing selection(s). Selecting a selected track deselects it.
Intercancel Each selected track replaces the previous selection. Selecting a selected track does not deselect it. In Intercancel
mode, you can select multiple tracks by touching and holding a track while touching others.

Solo Switch
Solo Switch provides choices for Sum and Intercancel functionality, as well as DAW Controlled.
Sum Each soloed track is added to the existing selection.
Intercancel Each soloed track replaces currently soloed track(s).
To have all connected DAW Solo switches operate globally in Sum or Intercancel modes, enable the corresponding Sum or Inter-
cancel setting.
DAW-Controlled When S6 is controlling multiple DAWs it can be desired to let each DAW determine whether track Solo
switches act in Sum or Intercancel mode. You can configure S6 to allow this by enabling the DAW Controlled setting for surface
Solo switches.
• When enabled, Solo status in each connected DAW follows the sum/intercancel setting within each DAW.
Show Track Number
When enabled, the track number assigned by the parent DAW is shown to the left of the Track name on strip OLEDs on Fader Mod-
ules, Track Name blocks Display Modules, and on the Master Module in the Meter and Track Scrollers.
Track and Workstation numbers are only shown in the Meter Scroller when the Home screen Local Option is disabled.
Show Workstation Number
Similar to Track Numbers, you can choose to have the Workstation number displayed to the left of the Track name on strip OLEDs
on Fader Modules, Track Name blocks Display Modules, and on the Master Module in the Meter and Track Scrollers.
Track and Workstation numbers are only shown in the Meter Scroller when the Home screen Local Option is disabled.
The Workstation number is derived from the order in which workstations are listed in the Connected column in the Settings >
Workstation page.
To show or hide Workstation number:

1 To to Settings > User, and navigate to the Strips section.
2 Tap to toggle the Workstation Number setting on or off.
When enabled, displays on Fader and Display Modules show Workstation number to the left of track number separated by a
vertical line (such as 1|1 for workstation 1/track 1, and 2|4 for workstation 2/track 4).
Read
Workstation 2, track 64 2|64 BG 16
Input Rec
Fader Module display for a track when Show Workstation Number is enabled

Show Fader Values
Values can temporarily replace track name on S6 Fader Modules and S4 CSMs when the fader is touched or adjusted.
Momentary Fader Value settings in S6 Settings > User
The length of time values are displayed is determined by the Show Fader Values setting and, if applicable, Fader Value Timeout
setting.
Settings for Momentary Fader Value
Setting Description
Off Displays always show track name (ignore Fader Value Timeout)
While Fader is Touched Shows value when fader is touched and reverts to track name when released
Shows value on touch, reverts to track name when the timer expires
Timed at Fader Touch,
• If the fader is released before the timer expires, the display reverts to name
Off at Release
• If the Fader Value Timeout slider is set to Off (full left), then values are not shown
Shows value on touch, reverts to track name when the timer expires
• If the fader is released before the Fader Value Timeout setting expires, the display stays on value until
Timed at Fader Touch
the timer expires then reverts to name
• If the Fader Value Timeout slider is set to Off (full left), then values are not shown
Shows the value while touched and continues to show value on release until the timer expires
Timed at Fader Release
• If the timer is set to OFF, shows value when fader is touched and reverts to track name when released
(default)
(equivalent to ‘While Fader is Touched” option)
Fader Value Timeout
The Fader Value Timeout setting lets you customize the length of time values are displayed when faders are touched between 0
and 5 seconds.
For Fader Module displays to follow the Fader Value Timeout setting, make sure to enable Show Timed Fader Values.
Bank Around Locked Strips
You can configure Bank Around Locked Strips separately for Banking mode and for Layouts mode.
• When enabled, locked strips maintain their presence in the corresponding mode (Banking or Layouts) while still being unaf-
fected by banking. When a strip is locked, a duplicate appears immediately to its right shuffling all subsequent strips to the
right by the number of locked strips. By default, Bank Around Locked Strips in Banking Mode is enabled.
When this setting is enabled, locking already locked strips creates multiple duplicate strips, providing multi-strip access to the
same track. This can be useful to simultaneously access parameters from different functions (such as EQ, send level, and reverb).
• When either of these settings is not enabled, locking does not shuffle other strips in the corresponding mode (Banking or Lay-
outs). By default, Bank Around Locked Strips in Layout Mode is disabled to help maintain consistent track-to-strip assign-
ments and locations in Layouts.

Indication of Hidden Tracks
These Preferences let you choose whether or not hidden tracks are shown in Banking, Layout, or VCA modes. When configured
to be shown, hidden track names are dimmed on the touchscreen, on Fader Modules, and on Display Modules.
To configure hidden track display:

1 Go to Settings > Preferences.
2 In the Strips section, enable the following settings as desired:
Show Hidden Tracks in Banking Mode When enabled, hidden tracks are visible in Banking mode and can be assigned to Lay-
outs (default is disabled).
Show Hidden Tracks in Layout Mode When enabled, hidden tracks stored in Layouts are visible when the layout is recalled (de-
fault is enabled).
In Layouts mode, hidden tracks are not shown in the track screen even when the preference to show hidden tracks is enabled.
Show Hidden Tracks in VCA Spill When enabled, hidden tracks are visible when their master VCA is spilled (default is enabled).
When enabled to be shown in Banking mode, hidden tracks on the Tracks and Home screens have dimmed track names in the Track
matrix, Meter scroller and Function scroller. Track Numbers (if enabled) are hidden. On Fader Modules, strip displays are dimmed.
When hidden tracks are shown, they are indicated on Display Modules and distinguishable from muted tracks as follows:
• If a track is active, shown, and unmuted, it appears fully lit (“1” in Figure 55).
• If the track is hidden but unmuted, track name (only) is dimmed, and no track number is shown (“2” in Figure 55).
• If the track is hidden and muted, the entire strip is dimmed, and no track number is shown (“3” in Figure 55).
• If a track is muted, the entire strip is dimmed, track name is dimmed slightly, and track number is shown (“4” in Figure 55).
• If a track is inactive, the “@” symbol appears before its group or input/output assignments.
1 2 3 4
Figure 55. Hidden tracks on Display Modules
Use Pro Tools Track Record Mode Colors

• When enabled, this setting sets all S6 indicators to follow Pro Tools track Record mode indication. For example, when Pro
Tools is in TrackPunch or DestructivePunch mode and tracks are enabled for punch recording, indicators flash blue and red.
• When not enabled, record indicators light (or flash) red only.
Auto-Collapse Spill Zones with Layout Recall
When enabled, recalling a Layout automatically collapses the currently enabled Spill Zone(s).
Make sure neither Spill Zone is selected (make sure neither L Spill or R Spill are lit white). If necessary, press L Spill and/or R
Spill so that their switch LEDs light in the color corresponding to what is spilled (dark green for VCAs, light blue for Track Types,
or dark blue for Layouts).

Spill Zone Menu Key Mode for Layouts, Workstations or Types
This settings lets you optimize how Menu switch LEDs behave when spilling Layouts, workstations, and track types.
LEDs Off When enabled, strip Menu switch LEDs do not light when elements are spilled.
LEDs On When enabled, strip Menu switch LEDs light in the same color as the element being spilled.
LEDs On and Collapse Spill When enabled, pressing a lit Menu switch while elements are spilled unspills.
For more information, see Spill Zones.
Auto Expand Functions
This setting lets you designate functions to automatically expand when they are selected. In use, enabling this setting saves you a
step of first enabling Exp (Expand) on a strip before selecting a function.
To use Auto Expand Functions:

1 Go to the Settings > User page, and scroll down to the Strips section.
2 In the Auto Expand Functions section, tap to select each function you want to configure for auto expand.
Auto Expand Function section in Settings > User
Not all functions apply to all DAWs. For example, HEAT only applies to Pro Tools, and Quick Controls to Cubase and Nuendo.
3 Bank the desired track to a strip on the surface.
Make sure the strip is not below either Knob Module designated as an Expand Zone.
4 On a Process Module or CSM, press a Function switch for a function you enabled to Auto Expand in the previous step.
In that strip on the Process Module or CSM, the Exp switch lights. On the corresponding Knob Module(s), parameters for the
selected function occupy as many encoders as required.
5 To expand a different function on that strip, press the switch for the desired function.
6 To exit, press the lit Exp switch on a strip or do the following:
• To collapse all currently expanded functions, press the Master Module All switch and then press any lit Exp switch.
• Press a Function switch for any function that is not enabled for Auto Expand.
Auto Expand Inserts Selection
The Inserts Selection option was recently added to the choices for Auto Expand. Enable this setting to have any insert Auto Ex-
pand when selected from the top level knob set on S6 Knob Modules or from the S4 upper Knob section.
With the ability to trigger Auto Expand from Inserts Selection you have more flexibility for when Expand mode is automatically
enabled. For example, by leaving the Auto Expand > EQ setting off you can use the EQ switch to list a track’s EQ plug-ins without
immediately entering Expand mode for the first, last edited, or designated cycle slot. With Inserts Selection enabled, you can then
directly expand the EQ plug-in you want. By comparison, when only Auto Expand > Inserts is enabled pressing the Ins switch
causes other strips to darken.

Auto Expand Faders
Enabling the Auto Expand Faders setting lets you Expand mapped parameters to faders with a single press of the strip Exp
switch. When not enabled, expanding parameters to faders requires you to hold down the Exp switch, or press Attention + Exp.
Assign Right Joystick Timeout

The Assign Right Joystick Timeout setting determines the time window within which attentioning an additional track assigns that
track to the right joystick, letting you optimize how tracks can be assigned to the different joysticks on Master Joystick Modules.
Settings > User, Joystick Strips section
You can specify the time range for joystick assignment to between 0 and 3 seconds in Settings > User.
• A setting of 0/Off means the right joystick will not be assigned to a different track than the left joystick.
• Any setting of 0.25 seconds or higher specifies the time window in which attentioning an additional track assigns that track
to the right joystick.
Layouts
Figure 56. Layouts in Settings > User
Ignore Functions on Layout Recall
By default, Layouts store and recall the current assignment of functions. You can defeat this behavior so functions are not changed
when recalling Layouts by enabling the Ignore Functions on Layout Recall setting.
• When disabled (the default setting), recalling a Layout reassigns controls to the functions assigned while the Layout was
saved.
• When enabled, recalling a Layout leaves the surface on its current function assignments and ignores any stored in the Layout.

Recall Layout Banking
(Layout Banked Position on Recall Mode)
The Layout Banked Position on Recall Mode setting controls if and how banking is stored and recalled along with Layouts.
Each available setting is described in the table, below.

• Layout Banking Position is the banking offset that is saved with each Layout.
• Surface Banking Position is where the surface is currently banked at the moment.
Options for Layout Banked Position on Recall Mode
Option Name Description
Layout banking value is ignored, surface banking position is reset to Home. Layout is recalled with-
Reset Banked Position to Home
out any merge changes.
Use Global Banked Position Layout banking value is ignored, surface banking position is not changed. Layout is recalled with-
(Do Not Bank) out any merge changes.
Update Global Banked Position to Surface banking position is updated to the stored Layout banking value. Layout is recalled without
Stored Position any merge changes.
Surface banking position is not changed. Layout is recalled to the banking position stored and
Merge Layout at Stored Position merged with the existing surface tracks. This can leave the existing tracks visible to the left or right
of the recalled layout tracks.
If the Layout being recalled fills the entire set of strips available and has no holes, the surface bank-
ing position is updated to the stored Layout banking value and the Layout tracks are recalled. If the
Update Global Position for Full Layout does not fill the entire set of strips available or has holes in the set of strips stored in the Lay-
Layouts, Merge for Partial out, the surface banking position is not changed, the Layout is recalled to the banking position
stored, and merged with the existing surface tracks. This can leave the existing tracks visible to the
left or right of the recalled Layout tracks, just like the "Merge Layout at Stored Position" option.
Auto Save Changed Layout on Recall Mode
This setting lets you optimize how Layouts are managed. If you create or modify a Layout but press Recall before storing it as a
new Layout, a backup Layout can be created in the next available block in the grid, or the current layout can be updated. You can
specify whether to save the new track arrangement to a new layout or to the currently loaded layout using the selector in the Layouts
section of Settings > User.
To configure Layouts Auto-Save settings:

1 In Settings > Preferences, scroll to the Layouts section.
2 Tap the selector for Auto-Save Changed Layout on Recall Mode: and choose one of the following:
Off When enabled, no backup Layouts are created.
Save to New Layout Slot When enabled, backup Layouts are created in the next available block in the grid. Backup Layouts will
be automatically named and numbered, such as “Backup_01.” If there are no tracks assigned, no backup will be created.
Save to Current Layout Slot When enabled, the current (last recalled) layout is updated (no backup is created).

Knobs
Settings in the Knobs section let you control how functions and parameters are displayed across Knob Modules, and set how pa-
rameter values respond to knob rotation.
Figure 57. Knobs section in Settings > User
Send/Insert/Input/Bus Knobs Reversed
The Sends/Inserts Knobs Reversed preference lets you configure Knob Modules to display sends and inserts, input source, and bus
(output) destinations in either of two ways, “a–j” or “j–a.”
• When enabled, function choices are displayed from the bottom knob, up (slot “a” appears on the knob closest to the operator,
“b” above it, and so on). This is the default setting.
• When disabled, function choices are displayed from the top knob, down (slot “a” appears on the knob furthest from the oper-
ator, with “b” below it, and so on).
Reverse Function Pages for 5-Knob Strips
This setting lets you configure Knob Module function views to display parameters in either their default order, or “reversed” from
their factory mapping. When enabled, EQ plug-in parameters start with low frequency parameters instead of high (or the opposite,
depending on the default mapping of that plug-in).
Remember Joystick Knobs by Track
This setting determines whether or not pan parameter assignments persist on Master Joystick Module encoders.
• When enabled, the assignment of pan parameters to Master Joystick Module knobs is maintained for each track when
attentioned.
• When not enabled, attentioning a new track to either joystick inherits the knob assignments of the previously attentioned track.

Knob Speed and Sensitivity
These settings let you optimize knob response. Two pairs of controls are available (Maximum Speed, and Sensitivity) to configure
response settings for function knobs and, separately, for pan knobs.
• Knob Maximum Speed and Knob Sensitivity configure the response for all function knobs other than pan.
• Pan Knob Maximum Speed and Pan Knob Sensitivity configure the response for knobs controlling pan, only.
Rotating any knob slowly adjusts parameters at the finest resolution available from the function/parameter. The following settings
determine response when knobs are twisted quickly. Recommended (default) settings are shown above each slider.
Maximum Speed Determines the range of a knob relative to the minimum to maximum values of the current parameter. At its
lowest setting (10), rotating a knob quickly requires approximately two complete rotations to go from minimum to maximum. At
its highest setting (100), parameters go from minimum to maximum value with a single rotation of the knob.
Sensitivity Determines how a knob reaches the current Max Speed setting. When set to its maximum setting (100), rotating a knob
slowly adjust parameters at the finest resolution available, and rotating quickly adjusts parameters as determined by the current
Max Speed setting. At its lowest setting (0), response speed is roughly relative to rotation speed, achieving Max Speed only when
turned very quickly.
Examples
 For “fine” control (a 1:1 relationship between knob rotation and parameter increments), rotate the knob slowly.
 To be able to cover an entire parameter range with one rotation of a knob, set Max Speed to its maximum setting (100). For ex-
ample, set Max Speed to its highest setting to be able to sweep an EQ filter from lowest to highest frequencies with one twist.
 To further optimize knob response, adjust Sensitivity to set the knob speed required to achieve the current maximum speed.
Because Knob and Pan Knob Speed and Sensitivity settings are stored in User Preferences your current settings will be overwrit-
ten when you open a previously saved session or Title and the setting for User Preferences is enabled in Settings > System.
If this occurs, reset the Speed and Sensitivity sliders to your preferred settings and then resave the session and/or Title.
Number of Knobs per Plug-in or Instrument Transmitted over EUCON
This setting helps optimize S6 performance for plug-ins with extremely large numbers of parameters. Available settings range from
100/minimum to 2000, or Unlimited/maximum, with a default setting of 1000. Settings lower than Unlimited do not affect DAW
performance or automation in any way, they only limit the amount of data being sent or received across EUCON. Limiting the
amount of data can improve performance.
Pro-Load All Knobs on Session Open (Speeds All Mode)
This setting provides an additional way to balance system response with session load times.
• When enabled, S6 loads all parameters over EUCON when the session or project is first opened. This makes session naviga-
tion immediately faster, especially if you use the All mode frequently, but sessions and projects can take longer to initially
open and load.
• When not enabled, S6 loads knob parameters as determined by the Number of Knobs per Plug-In or Instrument Transmitted
Over EUCON setting.

Soft Keys
These settings turn Soft Key switch LEDs on or off, choose how Workstation choices are displayed in the Soft Keys, and let you
set the workstation Soft Key pages to automatically close after selecting a workstation.
Figure 58. Soft Keys section in Settings > User
Soft Key LEDs Enabled
When selected, LEDs in Soft Key switches on the Master and Automation Module light when enabled/active. When unselected,
Soft Key LEDs remain unlit regardless of their active or inactive state.
System Soft Key Icons
This setting enables (or disables) the display of icons for Layouts and Workstation Soft Keys. This setting is enabled by default,
but you can disable it if you prefer to have only text (names) shown for Layout and Workstation Soft Keys. When enabled, Layout
and Workstation Soft Keys show the following icons: (For more information, see )
Soft Key icons for Workstations
Icon Indicates
Layouts
Workstation Mac
Workstation Windows
Workstation (generic)
Workstation error
System Soft Key Display Mode
These settings let you specify which Soft Key bank(s) to devote to system Soft Key functions including spilling and recalling Lay-
outs, tracks, and workstations, and whether to have spill/recall Soft Keys automatically close.
Both Master Module Soft Key Displays When enabled, both banks show choices for the currently enabled element, even when
the number of Layouts, tracks or workstations only requires one bank. Note that when spilling workstations, the left bank will show
connected workstations and the right bank will show available applications on the currently attentioned workstation.
Left Master Module Soft Key Display Only When enabled, only the left bank shows choices for the currently enabled element.
When spilling workstations, use the Previous and Next Soft Key bank switches to access applications.
Right Master Module Soft Key Display Only When enabled, only the right bank shows choices for the currently enabled ele-
ment. When spilling workstations, use the Previous and Next Soft Key bank switches to access applications.
Auto Close Surface Recall Soft Keys
When enabled, Soft Keys automatically close (return to their previous view) after a Layout, track type, or workstation is spilled.

3D Panner
These settings configure the Atmos panner.
Use 3D Panner on Joystick Module
Toggles MJM 3D room view on/off globally (all screens on all MJMs).
3D Panner Ceiling/Floor Rotation
Rotates the 3D room view up and down on the Master Module and MJM (if enabled).
3D Panner Left/Right Rotation
Rotates the MJM 3D room view left and right on the Master Module and MJM (if enabled).
Workstation
The Workstation settings include General and Solo settings.
Figure 59. Workstation, General section in Settings > User
General
These features may not be implemented by all audio applications, so consult your documentation.
Workstation Follows Knob Set Changes
The workstation displays the controls selected on the Knob or Process Module.
Open Windows on Knob Touch
Extends the Open Windows on Workstation When Editing Mode functionality to knobs assigned to individual parameters.
Open Windows on Workstation Attention

• When this setting is enabled plug-in, pan, or send window in your DAW will be opened when a track is attentioned according
to the current Attention Most Recently Clicked DAW Area settings.
• When this setting is not enabled (the default setting), windows will only open in the DAW when you explicitly attention a
track from your control surface.

Open Windows on Workstation When Editing Mode
Opens plug-in, pan, and/or send windows on the workstation when editing them on the surface.

1 Choose an option from the Open Windows on Workstation When Editing Mode selector:
• Off
• Plug-Ins Only
• Plug-Ins and Pan
• Plug-Ins and Sends
• Plug-Ins, Pan, and Sends
2 When Open Windows on Workstation When Editing is enabled for plug-ins, pan and/or sends, do any of the following:
Plug-Ins Pressing a knob to access a function (such as Inserts > EQ3, or EQ if that type of insert exists on the currently selected
track) opens the corresponding window on-screen and closes any previously opened window of the same types.
Pan and Sends Touch a knob assigned to Pan or Sends.
If any Soft Key assignments included the previous Open Plug-in on Workstation When Editing command they must be manually re-
named to the new command name.
Close Plug-ins on Workstation When No Longer Editing
Closes plug-in, pan, or send windows when another function is selected on S6.
Tip for Managing Pro Tools Windows
If you want certain plug-in, output/pan, or sends windows to remain visible at all times, use the Target feature in Pro Tools. For
windows such as essential metering plug-ins, turn the Target off to ensure it remains visible. Click on the Target to toggle it on/off,
or hold Shift on the computer keyboard while clicking to open a plug-in window to open it with the Target off. For example, using
the Control app hold down Shift on the computer keyboard (or the Soft Key for computer Shift) while tapping an Insert. On S3, hold
down Multi-Select/Shift (or Shift on the computer keyboard. The window opens with the Target off.
When the Target icon is unlit (grey), that window remains on-screen until you explicitly close that window.
Target, unlit/off
When the Target icon is lit red in a plug-in, output/pan or send window, that window is replaced when another similar element is
attentioned (such as a plug-in on a different track). By default, windows open with the Target on.
Target, lit/on
Post Module Sends Record with Arm
When this option is enabled, the Master Post Module sends a Transport Record Arm command each time you punch in on a track.

Solo
Solo modes are implemented differently by different audio applications. In Pro Tools, Solo Mode has the following three settings
which are selected by the Solo settings in the Workstations tab:
Figure 60. Workstation, Solo section in Settings > User
Solo In Place Soloing a track mutes all tracks except the soloed track(s).
After-Fader Listen Solo signal is derived after the fader (AFL).
Pre-Fader Listen Solo signal is derived before the fader (PFL).
Display Module
The Display Module section includes the Common, Display, and Master Meter Display sections.
Figure 61. Display Module section in Settings > User

Common
The following settings apply to all Display Modules (standard and Master Meters).
Automation on Display Modules
Display Modules and Master Meter Modules can show automation data along with waveforms. When enabled, automation can be
shown for individual parameters on one or more strips. You can set a variable amount of opacity and control the left-to-right ori-
entation of displayed automation data.
Show Automation When enabled, automation breakpoint data can be shown on Display Modules and customized using the set-
tings for Reverse Automation Lanes and Automation Opacity.
Reverse Automation Lanes Inverts the orientation of displayed automation data. (Pan is unaffected by this setting.)
Automation Opacity Adjusts the visibility of waveforms behind automation data. When off (0 percent), automation is shown as
a single thin line. Raising the percentage adds an increasingly opaque fill.
For more information, see .
Display
The following settings apply to standard Display Modules only.
Layout
Tap the Layout field to select a view for all standard Display Modules.
Figure 62. Display Module section in Settings > User
Display Modules have the following display layout options:

• Large Meters, Large Waveforms, Meters and Waveforms, Meters and Function, Waveforms and Function, Waveforms
and Dual Function, and Waveforms and Dual Function + Route.
See for examples of display Layouts.
When any Function display mode is enabled, Display Modules show different functions, graphs, and knobs/values depending on
the strip and its associated display state.
• When a function is selected that doesn't have a graph associated with it, up to eight encoder knobs are shown.
• When a selected function has a graph (such as EQ), it is displayed simultaneously.
• Group name, Group ID and color are shown. (To see all Group assignments for a track, press Grp on the Process Module.)
• When any of the Dual Function display modes is enabled, the Function view splits into an upper and lower view. The currently
selected function is shown above, and Pan below.
• When Waveforms and Dual Function + Route is enabled, each track’s I/O assignments are shown below the functions.
Touching or adjusting a knob temporarily displays the value for that knob, and reverts back as determined by the current setting of
the .
You can change the Display Module view from the surface for all tracks, or for individual tracks. See Changing Display Module
Views From the Surface.

Waveform Zoom
You can adjust the zoom of waveforms shown on Display Modules from 1 second up to 60 seconds. Waveform Zoom can be ad-
justed during playback. On the Master Module, the Display 1 switch zooms out by 10 seconds; Display 2 zooms in 10 seconds.
Panner Divergence and Position Display Mode
This setting lets you configure the display of divergence and pan position (trajectory lines) on Display Modules. The available set-
tings are the same as those available on the Master Module surround panner, but only affect Display Modules.
None When enabled, neither Divergence or pan lines are shown on Display Modules.
Left When enabled, left channel Divergence and pan lines are shown on Display Modules.
Right When enabled, right channel Divergence and pan lines are shown on Display Modules.
Both When enabled, both left and right channel Divergence and pan lines are shown on Display Modules.
Master Meter Display

The Master Meter Display setting in the Display Module section of Settings > User lets you control the following aspects of
MMMS (only):
Waveform Zoom Sets the size of displayed waveforms on Master Meter Display Modules.
For more information, see Using Master Display Meter Modules.

Chapter 22: System Preferences
S4/S6 System Preferences include General settings for (use) preferences, Surface brightness, GPIO, and language, as well as Work-
station (KVM) enable. System Preferences are local to the system and are not saved or loaded with User Preferences.
General
Autoload from Titles and Sessions

The Auto-Load From Titles and Sessions controls specify which elements of a project you want to be automatically loaded when
opening Titles and Sessions. These System preferences are saved on the S4/S6 system and are not affected by loading of User pref-
erences. For more information, see Saving and Loading User Preferences. The following table describes each available setting.
Figure 63. Auto-Load settings in Settings > System
Auto Load from Titles and Sessions
Setting Description
Loads the stored configuration of Settings > User settings, which includes Local Options for the Tracks,
User Preferences
Home, and Monitoring screens, as well as Expand Fader maps (if any)
Banking/Layout State Restores standard banking or Layouts mode, as stored in a Title, session, or project
Layouts and Meters Loads all standard and Meter Layouts stored in a Title, session or project
Restores Left and Right spill zones states, including track and function assignments as well as VCA spill (if
Spill Zone State
any), as stored in a Title, session, or project
Expand Faders Loads the custom parameter maps for Expand Fader Zones
Post Module State Restores any Link or Locked states on Master Post Modules
Post Layouts Loads all Post Layouts stored in a Title, session or project
Locked Strips State Restores all locked strip states (requires the matching workstation be connected)
Restores the surface to the same Layout banking state (including Spill Zones, if any) as when the session
Layout Banked Position
or project was closed
Merge Recalled Expand Faders with Current Faders

• When enabled, opening a session or loading a Title loads and merges only stored fader maps that are not already present on
the S4/S6
• When disabled, opening a session or loading a Title replaces all currently present fader maps with those stored in the ses-
sion/Title.
Chapter 22: System Preferences 215

Surface
System Surface settings include Brightness, GPIO, and Language.
Brightness
These settings globally manage the brightness of various S6 components, and can help save energy.
Figure 64. Surface Brightness section in Settings > Preferences,
Auto
When selected, light sensors at the top of the Master Module measure ambient illumination to set appropriate brightness levels
for the OLED, LED, Display Module, and touchscreen.
Touchscreen
Touch and drag the slider to set the desired brightness.
OLED, LED, Display Module
Touch and drag the slider to set their desired brightness.
Console Timeout
Touch and drag the slider to set the desired time for displays to sleep when the system is inactive.
Activate Screening Mode
You can enable Screening mode to temporarily darken the S4/S6 surface. When enabled, all knobs, OLEDs and screens (including
Display Modules, if any) darken. On the Master Module touchscreen, the S4/S6 logo appears to indicate Screening mode.
Faders stay in their current position and continue to control DAW channel levels, but do not move in response to existing automa-
tion (if any).
To exit Screening mode, tap anywhere on the Master Module touchscreen.
Screening mode can also be activated and deactivated using Soft Keys. If you have any previously created soft keys for Screening
mode that also included the Faders Off command, edit those soft key assignments to instead use the Disable Faders command. Dis-
able Faders is also available as a Surface soft key (Surface Options > Strips > Disable Faders), and it allows faders to more re-
liably exit Screening mode.

Strips
The setting in this section lets you optimize fader behavior in Screening mode.
Disable Faders
The setting Disable Faders is provided to be used in soft key definitions for Screening mode.
Figure 65. Strips settings in Settings > System
The Disable Faders setting replaces the previous Faders Off command in the soft key for Screening Mode (dark mode) to ensure
faders come back online when exiting Screening mode.
GPIO
The settings in this section let you configure General Purpose inputs and outputs.
Figure 66. GPIO settings in Settings > System
For more information, see GPIO.
Language
You can specify the language in which track names, memory locations and dynamic Soft Key names (such as Soft Keys for mem-
ory locations or groups) are displayed using the new Language setting in Settings > Preferences.
Figure 67. Language section in Settings > Preferences.
Tap to display the choices for language, then tap again to make a selection. After changing the Language setting, you must restart
the Master Module.

Workstation
The Workstation settings let you enable workstation alerts and KVM switch support.
Figure 68. Workstation settings in Settings > System
General
Show Workstation Alerts
S4/S6 can alert you to network errors, should they occur. These alert messages can help identify network problems (without having
to look through log files) and give you the opportunity to minimize any possible problems by restarting the S4/S6.
Workstation Alerts are disabled by default, but you can enable them in the Workstation section of Settings > System. When en-
abled, any Workstation Alert messages appear only once and can be easily dismissed, letting you decide whether you want to con-
tinue or restart.
KVM Switch
When enabled, a dedicated KVM tab appears across the top of the Settings screen, providing controls for serial and Ethernet KVM
switches. You can also name sources and destinations, and route up to two devices (for example, to manage two displays).
ThinkLogic KVM Support S4/S6 fully supports Ethernet KVM switches by ThinkLogic. These are configured the same way
other KVM switches are enabled in S4/S6 (Settings > System, KVM Switch “Support Enabled”, as described above).
For product information and configuration instructions, visit the ThinkLogic website:
https://www.thinklogical.com/
When a supported KVM switch is connected to the Master Module COM port (9-pin male), a single display can follow S4/S6 work-
station focus, or be selected independently.
Figure 69. COM port for serial KVM connection (original Master Module shown)
If your KVM does not respond, contact Avid Customer Service for help with specific settings that may be required.

To configure KVM:
1 Navigate the touchscreen to Settings > System.
2 Scroll to the Workstation section and under KVM Switch tap Support Enabled to enable it (a check mark appears).
KVM Switch enabled
When KVM support is enabled, an additional tab (KVM) appears across the top of the touchscreen.
3 Tap the KVM tab at the top of the Settings screen to display the KVM Settings page.
4 Select your KVM switch type (Serial, or IHSE (Ethernet)) from the KVM Settings > Mode selector at the bottom of the page.
S4/S6 supports serial KVM switches from Geffen, and Guntermann and Drunck, and Ethernet controlled switches from IHSE.
KVM mode selector
5 The upper part of the page displays settings for the chosen type of switch.
KVM settings for Serial (left) and Ethernet (right)
To configure a serial KVM switch:
 Enter the serial settings specific to your device. Refer to the documentation from the manufacturer (the default settings will work
for most models).

To configure an Ethernet KVM switch:
1 Tap the IP field and type the IP address using the on-screen keyboard.
To determine the switch IP address, refer to the documentation from the manufacturer.
Once a valid IP address has been entered and S6 is able to connect to the Ethernet controlled KVM switch, the Inputs and Out-
puts lists populate with available devices.
2 Drag a source from the Workstation Inputs list and drop it on the desired slot (workstation) in the KVM Assignments list.
3 Drag one or more destinations from the Terminal Outputs list to the same KVM Assignment slot.
To update the lists of available sources and destinations:
 Tap the Sync button.
KVM Source and Destination Assignment and Naming

Use the KVM page to assign and name sources and destinations. Each KVM assignment can include one source (Workstation In-
put) and up to two destinations (Terminal Outputs).
To manage KVM(s):
1 Make sure you KVM Switch “Support Enabled” is enabled in Settings > System, then go to Settings > KVM.
The KVM page shows current KVM Assignments in the upper right, Workstation Inputs (sources) and Terminal Outputs (des-
tinations).
2 To assign input, drag and drop a Workstation Input to a slot in the KVM Assignments column.
3 To assign output, drag and drop up to two Terminal Outputs to a slot in the KVM Assignment column.
Assigning input and outputs

4 To rename, double-click a Workstation Input name or Terminal Output name and enter a new name.
Renaming elements in System > KVM
To reset all inputs and outputs to their defaults, press the Clear Names switch (along the bottom of the KVM page).

Part VI: S4/S6 Modules
Chapter 23: S4/S6 Master Modules
Each S4/S6 system has master and channel modules. This section describes the following master modules:
• Master Module
• Automation Module
• Master Joystick Module
• Master Post Module
Chapter 23: S4/S6 Master Modules 223

Master Module
The upper part the Master Module features a 12.1-inch touchscreen with eight adjacent knobs that control virtual knobs on the
screen. The upper part of the Master Module can be tilted to achieve the best viewing angle. The lower part of the Master Module
has two Soft Keys sections, dedicated monitoring controls, and a section to control global system parameters and settings.
10
Sel Sel
In In
Sel Sel
1
In In
2 2
Sel Sel
In In
Sel Sel
In In
Home Swap Config
3 3
WS Layout
Mode
All 7 Mon A
4 L Spill R Spill Clear

Clip
Coms
Setup
9
5 5
Solo
Home End Setup

Display 1
Mon
Insert
Display 2
Alt 1
Spkrs
Sel
Settings
Alt 2
8
11 In
Config
Shift
6
Spkrs
Setup
Main Dim Cut

Spkrs
Figure 70. Master Module controls and displays
1 - Home Screen
2 - Attention Track Knobs
3 - Home (left) and Back (right) switches
4 - Navigation switches
5 - Soft Keys
6 - Soft Keys Navigation switches
7 - Main Menu switches
8 - Studio/Talk controls
9 - Monitoring controls
10 - Talkback mic input
11 - Assignable Knob
Home Screen
This section identifies the different elements of the Home screen.
For operational information, see
4
Figure 71. Home screen with Meter Scroller (1), Attention Track Editor (2), Track Scroller (3), and Home Screen Local Options icon (4)

Attention Track Knobs
Eight touch-sensitive, dual-function Attention Track Knobs surround the touchscreen. They control Attention Track function pa-
rameters in the Home screen and monitor levels in the Monitoring screen. In addition to rotating, the knob can also be pressed in
certain contexts to enter a plug-in or send.
Sel
1 2
In
Attention Track Knob (2) with Sel and In switches (1)
The knob and In switch each have two automation LEDs (red and green).
For more information, see . For more information about automation status indication, see Using the Transport and Jog/Shut-
tle Controls
Home and Back Switches

The Master Module switch labeled “2” in Figure 72 is called the Back switch.
Home Displays the Home screen. Becomes active whenever another screen is displayed.
Back Changes the Attention Track Knobs from plug-in editing to plug-in selection. Becomes active when editing a plug-in on a
track with two or more plug-ins.
For example, if you are editing EQ in the Function Editor on a track that also has a reverb plug-in inserted, pressing the Back
switch assigns the top two left Attention Track Knobs to EQ and Reverb plug-in selection; the Back switch is unlit. Pressing a
plug-in knob assigns the first eight parameters to the Attention Track Knobs and the Back switch lights.
Sel Sel
In In
1 2
Home Swap Config
Tracks Monitoring Settings
Figure 72. Home (1) and Back (2) switches
Swap and Config become page switches (along with Home and Back) for the Attention Track Knobs when the Automation Mod-
ule Shift switch is held down. (For more information, see .)

Navigation Switches
WS Layout All
Mode
Tracks Type Flip

Clip
Mixer Close Clear

Solo
Home End
Display 1
Display 2
Settings
Sel
In Shift
C fi
Figure 73. Navigation switches
WS Lets you select workstations to spill from the Soft Keys, and designate the Layouts Auto-Save application on the current work-
station. Shift + WS displays the Workstation screen (see ).
Layout Mode .lets you recall and select Layouts to spill from the Soft Keys. Shift + Layout Mode enables Layout Mode (see
Chapter 18, “Layouts.”)
All Enables All mode, in which pressing any strip Function switch on any Process Module enables that function on all strips. For
example, with All mode enabled pressing Exp (Expand) on any strip places all strips into Expand mode.
Tracks Jumps to Tracks screen.
Type Lets you select track types (such as Audio, Aux, VCA, and Master) to spill from the Soft Keys.
Flip Flips knob parameters to the faders (see Flip to Faders).
Clear Clip Clears Clip (over) indicators from the meters.
◄/Mixer Nudges the surface (or currently enabled spill zone) left. Shift + ◄/Mixer opens and closes the audio application’s
Mixer window unless the Edit window is closed, in which case the Edit window opens first.
►/Close Nudges the surface (or currently enabled spill zone) right. Shift + ►/Close closes the audio application’s front window.
Clear Solo Clears all soloed channels.
◄◄/Home Banks the surface (or currently enabled spill zone) left. Shift + ◄◄/Home banks the surface so track 1 appears on
fader strip 1 (left-justified).
►►/ End Banks the surface (or currently enabled spill zone) right. Shift + ►►/ End banks the surface so the last track appears
on the last strip (right-justified).
See also Nudging and Banking
Display 1 Zooms all Display Module Waveform views out by 10 seconds.Shift + Display 1 selects the previous Display Module
view across all Display Modules.
Display 2 Zooms all Display Module Waveform views in by 10 seconds. Shift + Display 2 selects the next Display Module view
across all Display Modules.
Settings Jumps to Preferences screens.
Shift Holding this Shift key accesses secondary functions on Master Module switches as described throughout this guide, and en-
ables the touchscreen Page switches (see ).
The Tracks, Display 1, Display 2, and Settings switches replaced the App, Clear Mute, Do to All, and Do to Selected
switches found on original series Master Modules.

Soft Keys
The Master Module provides two Soft Keys sections, each with twelve Soft Keys surrounding its own high resolution TFT display.
Soft Keys navigation switches at the bottom let you move to additional Soft Keys pages.
Soft Keys section
Each Soft Keys section has its own Soft Keys pages that can be customized in the Soft Key Editor (see ).
Main Menu Switches

Home Swap Config
Tracks Monitoring Settings
WS Layout All Mon A

Mode
Figure 74. Main Menu switches
These context-sensitive switches light when active. The function of any active switch is displayed on the touchscreen directly
above that switch.
Assignable Knob Section
Display 2
3
Settings
Sel 1
2
In Shift
Assignable knob section with knob (1), knob automation LEDs (2), and OLED display (3)
Using the Assignable Knob

(Requires Apple Logic Pro X 10.1.1, Steinberg Nuendo 7 or Cubase 8.1)
The Assignable Knob on the Master Module (to the left of the Soft Keys) can control knob or switch parameters in Logic Pro X,
Nuendo, or Cubase. A single Assignable Knob assignment is available for each connected application. When a different application
is attentioned, the Assignable Knob becomes available to be assigned in that application if no previous assignment exists. Returning
to the original application restores the knob assignment.
Locking the Assignable Knob to a parameter in one application does not maintain focus on that application’s parameter if you
focus S6 on a different application. Knob assignment is unique to each application.

Once assigned, you can lock the knob to that control, letting you move to and adjust other parameters on-screen in the same appli-
cation while retaining control of the chosen parameter from the knob. The Assignable Knob can be unlocked with a single press of
the knob, making it available to be re-assigned to a different parameter.
Pan Pan
Sel Sel
In In
Figure 75. Assignable Knob assigned to pan, locked (shown at left) and unlocked (shown at right)
To assign the Assignable Knob:

1 Do the following, as appropriate:
• In Logic Pro X, click once on the desired control on-screen.
• In Steinberg Nuendo or Cubase, hover the cursor over the desired control on-screen.
2 Press the Assignable Knob to assign and lock it to the control you targeted in step 1. While locked, the knob remains assigned
to the parameter regardless of where you move the cursor on-screen.
3 To assign the knob to a different parameter, press the knob top again so it is unlocked, then repeat the previous steps to re-assign.
Monitoring
Studio/Talk Controls and Display
The Studio/Talk section provides controls for control room monitoring, speaker selection, and talkback. It includes one touch-sen-
sitive knob, an OLED, and the following switches. The knob can be assigned to a Pro Tools Master Fader (see Enable EUCON
Monitor).
The Monitor section can be locked so the current application retains monitor control when focusing on another application.
Mon
Insert 11.00
+ Main
Alt 1
Spkrs
Alt 2
Spkrs
Setup
Main Dim Cut

Spkrs
Studio/Talk controls and display
Setup Accesses the Studio/Talk Setup to select the source for the Studio/Talk feed, select a folddown matrix, solo speakers, and
set the dim and talkback mic levels.
The following switches let you select Studio/Talk speakers:
Alt 1 Spkrs Selects Alt 1 Speakers.
Alt 2 Spkrs Selects Alt 2 Speakers.
Main Spkrs Selects Main Speakers.
Dim Dims the Studio/Talk level by the current Dim amount. While Dim is engaged, the Studio/Talk knob sets the dim amount.
Cut Cuts (mutes) the Studio/Talk level entirely.
Mon Insert This control is not implemented.

Monitor Select Controls and Display
The Monitor Select section includes two touch-sensitive knobs, an OLED, source select switches, and two Setup switches. The
upper knob controls the monitor level; the lower knob is not implemented.
Mon A -3.00
+ CR L/R In
Mon B
Coms
1
Setup
Talk
2
Setup
Figure 76. Monitor Select Controls
Setup (1) The Master Module automatically locks to the first focused EUCON monitoring application (such as XMON or DAD-
man). When locked to a monitoring application, the Setup switch in the Master Module Monitor Select section lights yellow.
When lit (yellow) the current application retains monitor control when focusing on another application or workstation.
To lock to a different monitoring application:

1 Unlock the current monitoring application by pressing the lit Setup (1) switch in the Monitor Select section so it becomes unlit.
2 Focus the desired monitoring application. The Master Module locks to the application.
Setup (2) Displays the Monitoring screen (see Monitoring Screen).
Mon A Selects Monitor A.
Mon B Selects Monitor B.
Coms Dims the Studio/Talk output (according to the Dim level) and activates the Listenback sources. When Coms is lit, Listen-
back is on. When unlit, Listenback is off. When a Listenback source is connected via XMON, you can manually enable and disable
Listenback, adjust levels, and configure Auto Listenback if desired.
To control Listenback:
1 Make sure your Listenback mics or sources are patched to the Listenback inputs on XMON.
XMON Talkback/Listenback (TB/LB/Util) DB-25 pinouts
Signal Name Hot (+) Cold (–) Ground (shield)
Talkback 2 Mic Input 24 12 25
Listen Mic 1 Input 10 23 11
Listen Mic 2 Input 21 9 22
AFL Input 1 20 7 8
AFL Input 2 6 18 19
Mini Speaker Out (L) 4 17 5
Mini Speaker Out (R) 15 3 16
Talkback/Slate Out 1 14 2
GND 13
SHIELD GND connector housing
2 Make sure XMON is the focused S6 monitoring application.

To toggle Listenback on or off from the Monitor Select section:
 Press the Coms switch in the Master Module Monitor Select section.
When Coms is lit, Listenback is on. When unlit, Listenback is off.
To adjust Listenback level:

1 Navigate to the Monitoring screen by pressing the Setup (2) switch in the Monitor Control section (or navigate to the Home
screen and then press the Monitoring menu switch).
Listenback 1 and 2 are mapped to a single encoder on the Master Module.
2 Focus the desired Listenback input (1 or 2) by pressing the Listenback encoder In switch.
When In is unlit, Listenback 1 is focused; when lit, Listenback 2 is focused.
3 To adjust the focused Listenback level, rotate the Listenback knob.
Listenback can be configured for auto on/off (based on the state of the transport), and for momentary or latched switch behavior.
For more information, see Monitoring Screen Local Options.
Talk Dims the Studio/Talk output (according to the Dim Level) and activates the Talkback Mic channels. Some audio applications
provide momentary and latch functionality for this switch.
Talkback can be configured for auto on/off (based on the state of the transport), and to drive or follow GPI. For more information,
see Monitoring Screen Local Options.
Talkback In
Talkback In XLR connector on top panel of Master Module
One XLR F (female) input is provided on the top panel, above and to the right of the touchscreen, to connect a Talkback micro-
phone. The placement of this input is optimized for a gooseneck mic.
This signal from Talkback In passes directly through to the Talkback Out connector on the back of the Master Module.

Automation Module
This section identifies the hardware features on the Automation Module.
2 2
5
1
3 3
8
4
Automation Module
1 - Attention Track Fader
2 - Soft Keys Sections
3 - Soft Key Navigation Switches
4 - Jog/Shuttle Wheel
5 - Synchronizer Soft Keys
6 - Time Code and Locate Display
7 - Transport Controls
8 - Numeric Keypad
9 - Setup Switch
Attention Track Fader

The Attention Track Fader provides a fader strip with the same controls and displays as those on the Fader Module, but it is dedicated
to the Attention Track. The colored key at the bottom of the fader denotes track color but does not inherit the Modifier attribute if
that track was attentioned from the Fader Module.
See for a complete description of the fader strip’s controls and displays.

Soft Keys Sections
The Automation Module provides two Soft Keys sections, each with twelve Soft Keys surrounding its own high resolution TFT dis-
play. Soft Keys navigation switches (below the displays) let you display different Soft Keys pages.
Figure 77. Soft Keys section
Each Soft Keys section has its own pages that can be customized in the Soft Key Editor (see ).
Jog/Shuttle Wheel
The Jog/Shuttle Wheel can be assigned to several functions by enabling one of the mode switches. The wheel and its surrounding
switches provide jog/shuttle, zoom, and edit functions as implemented by the manufacturer of your DAW. For Pro Tools, see Us-
ing the Transport and Jog/Shuttle Controls. For other DAWs, consult the documentation provided by the manufacturer.
Wheel switches can be customized using the Soft Key Editor. For more information, see
Figure 78. Jog Wheel, mode switches, and Shift key (1)
Shift
Hold down Shift (“1” in Figure 78) to access the secondary (upper) Jog/Shuttle Wheel functions.
Locate Displays and Controls

The Automation Module Locate controls include the Time Code and Locate Display, and Locate Soft Keys.
Time Code Display
This display shows the absolute time code at the current transport location.
Figure 79. Time Code and Locate display

Locate Switches
Figure 80. Locate Soft Keys
The switches in the Locate section provide locate and editing functions, as implemented by the manufacturer of your DAW. For
Pro Tools, see Edit Commands on the Locate Switches. For other DAWs, consult the documentation provided by the manu-
facturer.
You can define your own functions for these switches using the Soft Key Editor. For more information, see For other DAWs, con-
sult the documentation from the manufacturer.
Numeric Keypad
These switches mimic the functionality of the numeric keypad on the computer keyboard to store (Enter) and recall memory loca-
tions, enter numeric values, and control the transport (when the Pro Tools preference for Numeric Transport mode is enabled). See
also .
Numeric Keypad switches can be customized using the Soft Key Editor. For more information, see For other DAWs, consult the
documentation from the manufacturer.
Figure 81. Numeric Keypad

Transport Controls
Figure 82. Transport controls
These switches provide transport functions as implemented by the manufacturer of your DAW.
For Pro Tools, see Using the Transport and Jog/Shuttle Controls. For other DAWs, consult the documentation provided by the
manufacturer.
Transport switches can be customized in the Soft Key Editor. For more information, see Soft Keys.
Setup
When the Setup switch above and to the right of the Transport section is enabled, the Transport locks to the focused application
on the attentioned workstation.

Master Joystick Module
This section identifies the controls and displays on the Master Joystick Module.
2
4 3 3 4
Mute
100
L F/RDiv
1
5 5
Joystick Module top panel
1 – Joysticks
Two touch-sensitive joysticks, each with In and Sel switches. The In switches have automation indicator LEDs.
2 – Panner Display
One 3.2-inch (8.1 cm) wide TFT display, to show pan location, divergence, and other parameters. The Setup switch below the dis-
play is not yet implemented.
3 – Panning Mode Switches

Two banks of eight switches each. Each switch is labeled with its primary function in white, and its Shift function above in purple.
Mode, Alt 1, Alt 2, and Link are not implemented.
4 – Channel Switch Sections

Each section provides channel Attention, Solo, Mute, and Record Enable, automation switches (M and F), and a display. The
Joystick and Fader Module displays are similar, but the Joystick display shows track Name (not values).
5 – Encoder Sections
Each encoder section shows Pan functions only, and provides a dual-function knob that can be rotated and pressed. Each encoder
also has In, Sel, Config (Back), and Page (< >) switches. The knobs and In switches have automation indicator LEDs.

Master Post Module
This section identifies the controls and displays on the Master Joystick Module. For information on using the Master Joystick Mod-
ule to adjust pan and other parameters, see Using the Master Post Module.
Link
Fold
3 4 Solo Solo Solo Solo Solo Solo Solo Solo Solo Solo
5
Auto
Mute Mute Mute Mute Mute Mute Mute Mute Mute Mute Main Dim Cut Match
Speaker Control
Ready Ready Ready Ready Ready Ready Ready Ready Ready Ready
Speakers
< > Master FLY BG’s FX DLX MX Atmos Music Spots Main
2 1
Rec On
Rec Off
6
Input
Sum All On
PB
Layouts Src 1-10 Fold
Master Post Module top panel
Master Post Module Main Sections

The Master Post Module provides five primary sections of controls and displays.
1 – Strips
10 identical channel strips, each with the following controls and displays (listed from the top down): Link, Solo, Mute, Ready,
OLED, Record paddle, Input Monitor toggle, Track Color indicator
2 – Bank (< and >)

Bank left (<) and right (>) switches, to bank the MPM strips only.
3 – Attention
Accesses secondary functions for MPM Link switches.
4 – Link
Enables Link mode to select tracks for linked (ganged) control, and lets you lock strip 1.
5 – Monitoring
Switches for selecting monitor outputs (Alt 1, Alt 2, Main), modes (such as Dim and Cut), and other essential monitoring functions.
These switches can be customized and re-assigned to other functions in the Soft Key Editor.
6 – Soft Keys
One bank of Soft Keys with 15 customizable assignments. Default assignments are provided in the Factory appset. MPM Soft Key
assignments are saved and loaded with other S6 Soft Key sets.

Chapter 24: Channel Modules
Each S4/S6 system has master and channel modules. This chapter describes the channel modules that comprise the console fader
strips: S6 Fader, Process, and Knob Modules, S4 Channel Strip Modules, and Display Modules.
See Chapter 23, “S4/S6 Master Modules” to learn about the master section of the console.
Fader Module
(S6 Only)
The Fader Module has eight fader strips. Each strip has a fader and meters, Attention key, Select, Record, Input, Solo, Mute,
and automation punch switches, an OLED display, and a Track Color / Modifier key.
Fader Module
Chapter 24: Channel Modules 238

Fader Strip
The main entities of the fader strip are identified in Figure 83 and explained in the following sections.
3
4
Figure 83. Fader strip
1 - Select switch
2 - OLED, Record and input switches
3 - Solo and mute switches
4 - Automation mode and punch switches
5 - Attention key
6 - Fader
7 - Meters
8 - Track Color / Modifier key

Select and Swap Switches
Select Toggles the selection status of the track and lights when active. Also lets you spill a VCA to the left spill zone when the
Menu switch is held down.
See Selecting Tracks, and Position to learn about track selection and modes.
Swap Lets you spill a VCA to the right spill zone when the Menu switch is held down.
OLED
Displays the track name, workstation number (optional), track number (optional), automation mode, and record and input indica-
tors. When Flip mode is enabled, the OLED shows the name of the parameter currently assigned (flipped) to the fader.
1 2
Input (1) and Record (2) switches, OLED (3)
Track numbers can be shown or hidden using the Show Track Numbers preference setting. See Strips.
Input and Record Switches
Input Toggles the Input Monitor status of the track.
Rec Toggles the record enable status of the track.
For more information on status indication of track input and record, see Select, Assign, Record, Solo, Input, and Mute
Menu
Puts the Input and record switches into VCA Spill mode. When Menu is held down:
• The Input switch becomes Spill Left (as shown in the OLED).
• The Record switch becomes Spill Right (as shown in the OLED).
• The Select switch becomes Spill to Left Zone.
• The Swap switch becomes Spill to Right Zone.
For more information, see Mixing with VCAs.
Mute and Solo Switches
Mute Mutes the track and lights when active.
Solo Solos the track and lights when active.
Solo (1) and Mute (2) switches
Solo selection can inter cancel or sum. Solo Switch

Master, Slave, and Link Indicators
These indicators identify VCA masters and slaves (when spilled). For more information, see Mixing with VCAs.
M S Menu LG
1 3
2
Solo
Master (1) Slave (2) and Link Group (3) indicators
Master Indicates the track is a VCA Master.
Slave Indicates the track is assigned to and controlled by a VCA Master.
Link Group Indicates the track is a member of a link group.
Automation Mode and Punch Switches
Solo
1 M
Mute
2 F 3
M (1) and F (2) Automation Punch (2) switches with Automation Status indicators (3)
F Punches the track out of automation writing when in Latch mode. Pressing F repeatedly cycles through automation modes. The
switch lights red when writing automation.
M Pressing M toggles Trim automation on or off for the currently selected Automation mode. The switch lights red when writing
trim automation.
Automation Indicator LEDs The LEDs to the right of F indicate its automation status. The automation LEDs to the right of M are
not implemented.
To learn how these LEDs indicate automation status, see “Using the Transport and Jog/Shuttle Controls” on page 99
Attention Key
The Attention key is directly above the meters, and lights when active.
To assign a track to the Attention Track Fader on the Automation Module:

1 Press the Attention key on the desired track’s Fader Module strip.
Attention key (1) and Fader (2) with meter
You can configure the Attention keys to automatically display the Home screen using the Show Home Screen on Strip Attention
preference setting. Other settings let you link track Select and Attention keys. For more information, see Strips.

Fader and Meter
Each strip features a motorized, touch-sensitive 100-mm fader with a dual, 30-segment meter to its left.
Track Color / Modifier Key
The Track Color / Modifier key at the bottom of the fader strip lights in the color of its assigned track. The key’s Modifier function
remains fixed on the Fader Module, even when tracks (and their colors) change. In fact, they remain active when the strip is empty.
The Attention Track Fader does not inherit the Modifier attribute from its Fader Module track.
These keys modify and execute Pro Tools commands with defined keyboard shortcuts (see Pro Tools Commands Using the
Track Color / Modifier Keys for a list of commands).
If there is a dialog window open on the Pro Tools DAW, the OK and Cancel switches on the Fader Modules flash. When the dialog
is on the currently focused workstation they flash green; when on a workstation that is not focused, the switches flash orange. Press
OK to confirm or Cancel to cancel the dialog.
When using Expand Faders, the User 1 and User 2 switches bank between Expand Faders 1–8 and 9–16.
Process Module
(S6 Only)
The Process Module lets you assign functions to the Knob Module, toggle them in and out, and control parameters from its knob
section. The Process Module provides eight strips, each with a knob section, function switches, and other controls.
The default knob parameter is Pan but you can reassign it to any other parameter. This is especially useful if your configuration does
not include a Knob Module.
See “Editing a Plug-in Using the S6 Process Module” on page 128.
Process Module

Process Module Strip
Each strip provides the following controls and displays.
Figure 84. Process Module strip
1 - Function select switches
2 - Knob section
3 - Navigation switches
Clear (Reset to Default)
You can quickly reset faders, individual parameters, functions, Expand Fader maps, or entire tracks to their default values using the
Clear switch, located at the top of each strip on the Process Module.
To clear:
1 Press Clear on the desired strip. Its LED flashes red, and switches for all functions available to be reset are lit.
2 While Clear is engaged (flashing) do any of the following:
• To reset a fader unity (0 dB on the strip), press F on the Fader Module or touch the fader.
• To reset an individual parameter, press its knob top.
• To reset a function, press the desired function switch in that strip (such as EQ, Dyn, or Pan). Not all functions support Clear.
• To reset an entire strip, press the strip Select switch on the Fader Module.
The parameter or function resets and the Clear switch stops flashing and remains unlit.

Func
Dyn, or Insert function. To protect automation data, pressing the Func switch only enables (it does not toggle automation off).
Expand
Expand mode maps parameters beyond the current strip, expanding (or “spilling”) EQ, dynamics, or other functions across multiple
controls on S6 Knob Module(s) or Process Modules (when no Knob Module is present in that chassis), to knobs on S4 CSMs, or
to Fader Modules. For complete instructions for using strip Expand and Attention Expand Zones, see Expand.
Function Select Switches
The function select switches let you assign different functions to the Knob Module. One function can be selected at a time, and its
function select switch lights. The Ins, Dyn, EQ, and User functions each have an In switch. Pressing the Func switch on a CPM
toggles the automation enable of all controls in the currently focused EQ, Dyn, or Insert function on/off.
Input
To assign the Input function to the Knob Module:
 Press Input.
Inserts, Dynamics, EQ, and User (Instrument)
To toggle Ins, Dyn, EQ, and User in and out:
 Press In next to the desired function select switch. The In switch next to Ins, Dyn, EQ, and User lights when active.
To access Inserts on the Knob Module:
 Press Ins.
To access Dynamics on the Knob Module:
 Press Dyn. When more than one Dynamics plug-in is on a track, double-press its Dyn switch to cycle through each plug-in.
To access EQ on the Knob Module:
 Press EQ. When more than one EQ plug-in is on a track, double-press its EQ switch to cycle through each plug-in.
To access Instrument plug-ins on the Knob Module:
 Press User.
If you press an EQ or Dynamics Function select switch for a track without these plug-ins already inserted, some audio applications
can insert a default plug-in automatically. In Pro Tools, you can select EQ and Dynamics defaults in Setup > Preferences > Mixing.
HEAT
To access HEAT controls:
 Press and hold Ins.
Sends, Pan, Edit, Grp, Bus
To access Sends on the Knob Module:
 Press Sends.
To access Pan on the Knob Module:
 Press Pan.

To access Edit functions:
 Press Edit on any strip assigned to an audio track. (See Chapter 14, “Editing”.)
To access Groups on the Knob Module:
 Press Grp.
To access Buses (outputs) on the Knob Module:
 Press Bus.
Knob Section
Each strip has one knob section with a dual-function, continuous knob, In and Sel switches, and an OLED. The knob lights when
active and, in certain contexts, it can be pushed. The OLED shows the track name and number and the parameter value.
3 2
OLED (1), knob (2), and In and Sel switches (3) for the knob
In Toggles a parameter in and out, or between two values; it lights when active. The behavior depends on the audio application, and
not every parameter includes In switch functionality.
Sel Toggles the knob function or a secondary parameter value. For example, Sel can toggle between Q and Frequency for an EQ
plug-in, or pre- and post-fader for a send.
Automation Indicators
The knob and In switch each have red and green LEDs that indicate automation status.
For more information, see Using Automation.
Knob Navigation Switches
At the bottom of the Process Module are knob navigation switches.
1 2
3
Figure 85. ◄ (1), Back (2), and ► (3) navigation switches
◄ ► These switches navigate between function parameters. They light when available.
Back Navigates up one level and helps assign a new function for the knob. It lights when available.
The Config function (◄ and ► held down together) is not implemented.
For more information, see Editing a Plug-in Using the S6 Process Module.

Knob Module
The Knob Module provides eight strips, each with four identical knob sections and one set of navigation switches. The side panel
provides power and Ethernet connectors.The Knob Module lets you adjust function parameters and select them for editing.
Knob Module
Knob Module Strip

Each strip has four knob sections, each with a dual-function continuous knob, In and Sel switches, and an OLED display.
2
Knob Module sections (1) and navigation switches (2)

Knob Section
Each Knob Module strip has four knob sections, each with a dual-function, continuous knob, In and Sel switches, and an OLED. The
knob lights when active and, in certain contexts, it can also be pushed. The OLED shows track name and number, and parameter value.
3 2
OLED (1), knob (2), and In and Sel switches (3) for the knob
In Toggles a parameter in and out, or between two values; it lights when active. The behavior depends on the audio application, and
not every parameter includes In switch functionality.
Sel Toggles the knob function or a secondary parameter value. For example, Sel can toggle between Q and Frequency for an EQ
plug-in, or pre- and post-fader for a send.
Automation Indicators
The knob and In switch each have red and green LEDs that indicate automation status (see Using Automation).
Knob Navigation Switches
At the bottom of the Knob Module are the navigation switches.
1 2
3
Figure 86. ◄ (1), Back (2), and ► (3) navigation switches
◄ ► These switches navigate between groups of four function parameters. They light when available.
Back Navigates up one level. It lights when available.
The Config function (◄ and ► held down together) is not implemented.
See “Editing a Plug-in Using the S6 Knob Module or S4 CSM Knob Section” on page 126.

(S4 Only)
Channel Strip Modules (CSMs) provide the fader strips for S4 systems. Each CSM provides eight fader strips with a lower fader
section and upper knob section, and central function select section.
Knob section
Function Select
Fader section
CSMs provide the same functionality on S4 as Fader, Process, and Knob Modules on S6. The primary differences are:
• The CSM provides a single set of Function Select switches for the eight fader strips (unlike the S6 Process Module which pro-
vides Function switches for each fader strip). Function Select switches include EQ, Dyn, Exp, and more.
• The CSM fader Focus switch determines the fader strip to which the Function Select switches apply. Focus is only available
on the S4 CSM, not on S6 Fader Modules.
Function Switches
The Function switches select the function displayed on the Knobs. They operate similarly to the Function switches on S6 Process
Modules, except that on the CSM they apply to either the currently Focused strip, or all strips on that module if no strip is focused.
Function switches
The Function Select switches Shift and X are not yet implemented.

Focus
At the top of each CSM fader strip is a Focus switch. When a strip is focused (its Focus switch is lit) the central Function Select
section on the same CSM lets you choose a function to display in the Knob section for that strip. You can also have the Knob section
display the same function for all strips, or Expand a function to have the entire Knob section provide parameters for that function
for the currently focused strip. Note that the Focus switch is associated with the fader strip, not any track assigned to the strip.
Select Focus
Touch/Ltch
4 DX ADR4
Input Rec
Focus switch (shown lit)

Display Module
The Display Module has a TFT display and mounting bracket. The underside of the Display Module has power and Ethernet con-
nectors.
When configured as standard Display Modules, each displays eight tracks. Display Modules can also be configured as Master Me-
ter Modules (MMMs). For more information on MMMs, see Using Master Display Meter Modules. The following sections de-
scribe standard Display Modules.
Different display Layouts are available, including Large Meters, Large Waveforms, Meters and Waveforms, Meters and Func-
tion, Waveforms and Function, Waveforms and Dual Function, and Waveforms and Dual Function + Route.
See Display Module to set the global display layout. You can also configure views for strips individually (see Changing Dis-
play Module Views From the Surface).
Each display layout shows the track name, input, and automation status at the bottom. For Large Waveforms and Waveforms and
Function, a single meter displays the track’s maximum channel level. When in any Waveform view, automation breakpoint data
can be shown. Group name and ID are shown while in any function view. All other display Layouts can show 7.1-channel meters.
Pan display for multichannel tracks can be optimized in User settings (see Panner Divergence and Position Display Mode).
The USB connectors are used to service and unclaim a Display Module from an S6 system. Do not insert a USB drive for any other
reason unless instructed to do so by an Avid technician.
Examples of available display Layouts are shown in Figure 87 and Figure 88, Figure 89 and Figure 90, and Figure 91. These fig-
ures may not show certain display elements that are available in the most recent version of S6 software.
Figure 87. Large Meters

Figure 88. Large Waveforms
Figure 89. Meters and Waveforms

Figure 90. Meters and Function
Figure 91. Waveforms and Function

Variable Waveform Zoom
When set to any Waveform view, the zoom resolution of all standard Display Modules can be set between 1 second and 60 seconds
in the Settings > Preferences screen. For more information, see Waveform Zoom.
Zoom resolution of waveforms can be set separately for Master Meter Modules (see Configuring MMM Display Settings).
Gain Reduction Meters and Bouncing Ball Dynamics Graph

(Pro Tools Only)
High resolution Gain Reduction Meters are displayed on Display Modules and the Master Module Home page. Lower resolution
Gain Reduction Meters (green) are displayed on the Fader Module between the two Level Meters. S6 gain reduction meters follow
the metering preference setting in the DAW, letting you choose to see compression, expansion, or a sum of both.
In Pro Tools, choose Setup > Preferences, and click to go the Metering tab. Gain Reduction settings are in the Display section.
Dynamics Graphs with bouncing level ball can be displayed on Display and Master Modules by enabling any of the Function
views. (Not all dynamics plug-ins support graphs or bouncing level ball.)

Part VII: Appendix
Appendix A: GPIO
GPI (General Purpose Interface) is an interface protocol to interconnect machines to perform various functions. The 25-pin D-Sub
connector on the back panel of the Master Module (see Figure 94) provides 8 channels of GPI input and 8 channels of GPI output.
The inputs are opto-isolated, and the outputs are relays. Switches used for GPI input must be momentary (not latching).
Basic (legacy) S4/S6 lets you define GPI inputs and outputs to control Talkback, Monitoring, and basic Transport commands.
Advanced GPIO are also provided in the Soft Key Editor for greater flexibility and options, and include Fader Start and Glide.
See also “Auto Talkback” on page 51.
To enable basic (legacy) GPI:

1 Navigate to Settings > Preferences.
2 In the GPIO section, enable any of the following:
• Talkback Enabled
• Monitoring Enabled (Dim, Cut)
• Transport Enabled (Stop, Play, Record)
Basic (legacy)
Fader Start and

Glide
Figure 92. GPIO settings in Settings > Preferences
Advanced GPI and Fader Glide

On S4/S6, GPIO are provided in the Soft Key Editor for greater flexibility and options, and include Fader Glide.
• The Master Module GPIO page of the Soft Key Editor lets you assign specific GPI inputs (1–8) to trigger S4/S6 Soft Keys,
and assign S4/S6 Soft Keys to trigger specific GPI outputs (1–8).
• Fader Glide lets a GPI input, or any surface Soft Key, trigger a specific fader to glide to a designated level at a prescribed rate.
You can specify Fader Glide to apply to only the attentioned strip or to any specific fader strip, all strips in a “bucket” (8-fader
chassis), strips in all buckets or any strip on the surface. Fader Glide provides a single set of settings (affecting any/all enabled
Fader Glide strips) for Fader Start Glide Time, and Fader Start Target.
You can apply these GPIO capabilities to be able to have different commands on different GPIs, to have a greater number of S6
commands trigger or be triggered by GPIO such as monitoring commands or FF/Rewind, and to achieve fader start GPI output to
turn on Record lights, turn off AC, and similar.
Note that the legacy GPIO functions (Talkback, Monitoring Cut/Dim, and Transport Play/Stop/Record) are still available but will
be automatically disabled if a GPIO Soft Key is defined that includes the same function. To restore the previous functionality you
must first disable any and all GPIO Soft Keys assigned to that same function.
Appendix A: GPIO 255

Soft Key Color Indication
Soft Key color lets you quickly see what type of Soft Key is actually turning on a GPO.
• If a GPO surface Soft Key is activating a GPO and it is applied to a Soft Key that can show color it will light that Soft Key
purple.
• If the GPO surface Soft Key is not actually the Soft Key that is turning on the GPO, but the same GPO is being activated by
some other Soft Key that is applied directly to the GPO, then the surface Soft Key will light with the color applied by the
appset.
• If any Soft Key is applied to a GPIO or if one of the latching/momentary GPO surface Soft Keys are applied to any other Soft
Key, then the default hard-coded GPIO functionality (Transport, Monitor and Talkback) will be disabled until the GPIO soft
keys are no longer applied by any Soft Key area.
To configure GPIO:
1 Navigate to Settings > Soft Keys.
2 From the Module Selector, choose Master Module GPIO.
Selecting the Master Module GPIO in the Soft Key Editor
3 Select a GPIO input (1–8) or output (1–8), then assign EUCON or Surface commands as you would for other Soft Key defi-
nitions.
• Momentary and latching GPIO commands are available from their Surfaces > GPIO sub-menus.
• Soft Key Options for Delay and Multi-DAW can be configured for GPIO Soft Keys. (Feedback cannot be changed.)
• Key and Page commands are only available for GPIO inputs.
Soft Key Editor, Master Module GPIO showing a simple Talkback example.

To configure Fader Glide:
1 Navigate to Settings > System.
2 In the GPIO section, configure Fader Start Glide Time and Fader Start Target.
Fader Start Glide Time (0.0–3.0 seconds) determines the amount of time the fader will take to travel to the designated Fader
Start Target level (-inf/off to +12 dB).
GPIO section in Settings > System
Example GPI Circuits

Switches and LEDs from the S4/S6 surface can control and be remote controlled via the 25 pin D-Sub connector on the back of the
Master Module. For connector pinouts, see Table 1 on page 258.
10
GPOx
5
3 10K
4 GPO_Common GPOx >>
From Processor 1
2 1 2
>> OUT
Relay GPO_Common >>
74LS04
GPO
Example circuit for GPO

VCC VCC_Opto
10K 470
To Processor
1
3
OPTOISOLATOR
GPIx GPIx >>

2
4
GND_COMMON GND_Common >>
GPI
Example circuit for GPI
Figure 93. Example GPI output and input diagrams

Connector Pinout
Table 1. 25-pin D-Sub, Female
Pin Description Function
1 Ground
14 GPI 1 Talkback
2 GPI 2 Dim
15 GPI 3 Cut
3 GPI 4 Stop
16 GPI 5 Play
4 GPI 6 Record
17 GPI 7
5 GPI 8
18 GPO 1 - A
Talkback
6 GPO 1 - B
19 GPO 2 - A
Dim
7 GPO 2 - B
20 GPO 3 - A
Cut
8 GPO 3 - B
21 GPO 4 - A
Stop
9 GPO 4 - B
22 GPO 5 - A
Play
10 GPO 5 - B
23 GPO 6 - A
Record
11 GPO 6 - B
24 GPO 7 - A
12 GPO 7 - B
25 GPO 8 - A
13 GPO 8 - B
shell Ground
Relay model: NEC UB2-12NU
Figure 94. GPIO port on the back of the Master Module

Appendix B: EQ and DYN Parameters in Expand Mode
(Requires Pro Tools 11.3.1 or later)
The tables, below, show how EQ and DYN parameters map to Knob or Process Modules in Expand mode. All EQ and DYN
plug-ins map to the same knobs when EQ or DYN functions are expanded.
Manufacturer-specific parameter mappings are still accessed from the Inserts knob set. These will typically have more controls
than the unified layouts used in Expand mode. Not all parameters are available in all plug-ins.
The following tables show the location of EQ and Dynamics parameters on Knob Modules when in Expand Mode.
EQ Parameter Layout in Expand Mode, Knob Module
Sel Sel Sel Sel Sel Sel Sel Sel
Knob Knob Knob Knob Knob Knob Knob Knob
In In In In In In In In
HPF LPF
Slope Slope
HPF LPF LF LMF MF HMF HF

Q Q Q Q Q Q Q
Type Type Type Type Type Type Type
HPF LPF Input LF LMF MF HMF HF

Freq Freq Freq Freq Freq Freq Freq Freq
Type Type Type Type Type Type Type
HPF LPF Out- LF LMF MF HMF HF

In/Out In/Out put Gain Gain Gain Gain Gain
HPF LPF Gain LF LMF MF HMF HF
In/Out In/Out In/Out In/Out In/Out In/Out In/Out
DYN Parameter Layout in Expand Mode, Knob Module

Sel Sel Sel Sel Sel Sel Sel Sel
Knob Knob Knob Knob Knob Knob Knob Knob
In In In In In In In In
C/L C/L
Rel Depth E/G E/G
Ext Key
Rel Range
C/L E/G E/G HPF LPF**

Attack Attack Hold Type * Type
Key
Listen
C/L C/L Input E/G E/G HPF LPF**

Ratio Knee Gain Ratio Knee Freq * Freq
C/L C/L E/G E/G E/G HPF* Q LPF**Q

Thresh Makeup Output Thresh Hyster- or Slope or Slope
Gain Gain esis HPF LPF
In/Out In/Out
*HPF filter may be labeled “LF” (Low Filter) in the plug-in.
** LPF filter may be labeled “HF” (High Filter) in the plug-in.
Appendix B: EQ and DYN Parameters in Expand Mode 259

Appendix C: Touchscreen Basics
This chapter explains the gestures interpreted by the touchscreen.
Tap and Release

• Tap the screen briefly and release without moving to select an object, activate its primary function, or toggle a parameter
value between its two states. This is equivalent to a single mouse click.
Double Tap
• To enter a name for an on-screen item (such as a Layout or a Soft Key), double tap quickly in the Name field.
Touch, Hold, and Drag

•Touch an object, hold briefly, then drag it to another location.
Swipe
Touch and drag quickly left/right/up/down to do the following:
•Scroll the current page
•Move between different Settings pages
•Scroll between parameters in the Function Editor
•Scroll in the Track Matrix, Track Scroller, Meter Scroller, and Function Scroller
Stop Scrolling
•Tap the touchscreen once and release to stop scrolling.
Touch and Hold, then Touch

• Touch and hold an object, then touch others to add to a selection.
This makes it easy to select, record enable, mute, and solo multiple tracks in the Track Matrix View, even when Intercancel is se-
lected in Track Selector Options (see “Track Selector Options” on page 45).
Appendix C: Touchscreen Basics 260

Two-Finger Stretch
•Touch the screen with two fingers, then move them farther apart.
This expands a collapsed Inserts function in the Function Scroller (if
it has two or more plug-ins).
Two-Finger Pinch
•Touch the screen with two fingers, then move them closer together.
This collapses expanded plug-in inserts into the Inserts function in
the Function Scroller (if it had two or more plug-ins).
Appendix C: Touchscreen Basics 261

Appendix D: Troubleshooting and Utility Mode
This section provides information for calibrating S4/S6 elements, troubleshooting, and using Utility Test Mode for Modules.
Diagnosing Module Status

Specific switch LEDs indicate the power and connection status for each module while the Master Module starts up. See LED In-
dication of Module Power and Connection Status on System Startup.
Fader Calibration
Fader Calibration is available in the Settings > Surface page to calibrate and align faders.
To calibrate faders:
1 Go to Settings > Surface, and touch Config.
2 In the image of the current surface configuration, tap to select a Fader Module.
3 Tap the Fader button along the bottom of the screen, then follow the on-screen instructions to calibrate each fader.
4 Repeat for additional Fader Modules.
5 When finished, tap Done (or tap Cancel to exit).
3
Fader Calibration controls in Settings > Surface, Config (S6 shown)
Appendix D: Troubleshooting and Utility Mode 262

LED Calibration and Brightness Control
You can customize the brightness of LEDs on a per-module basis, to match the brightness of elements on modules of varying ages
or revisions. Presets are provided for the most common settings, and you can copy and paste settings among modules.
To control the brightness of all OLEDs, LEDs, and Display Modules, use the Brightness controls in the Settings > System page.
To calibrate module LEDs:

2 In the image of your surface arrangement, tap to se-
lect a module.
The selected module is outlined in orange, and
across the bottom of the screen the command LED
appears.
3 Press LED. The LED Calibration screen appears.
4 Do the following:
• To adjust brightness for small switch LEDs (such
as Back, < and >), adjust the Mono Gamma
slider.
• To adjust brightness for larger switches (such as
Function switches on Process Modules), adjust
the Switch Red/Green/Blue Gamma sliders.
• To adjust brightness for knobs, adjust the Knob
Red/Green/Blue Gamma sliders.
• Load one of the LED Presets.
• Copy and Paste LED Settings.
5 To save your settings for the currently selected
module, press Done.
LED Calibration settings are stored on the Master
Module.
6 To close without changing any settings, do any of
the following:
• Press Cancel.
• Tap to select a different module in the arrange-
ment.
• Navigating to any other view on the MTM. Settings > Surface, LED Calibration (S6 shown)
7 Tap to select another module and repeat the previ-
ous steps.

LED Presets
Presets are provided so that you can quickly match brightness on systems that include both old and new revisions of S4/S6 modules.
To use LED Presets, first identify the revision of each module by viewing its Part Number in the Settings > Surface page, then load
the appropriate Preset. The most common use of Presets is to configure new modules to match the brightness of older modules, as
explained in the following instructions.
To determine module revision:

1 If you are already in the LED Calibration screen, press Done. Otherwise, go to the Setting > Surface page.
2 In the image of your surface arrangement, tap to select a module.
The Part Number for the currently selected module is shown in the lower section of the screen. Note the last two numbers.
• If the Part Number ends in -00, -01, -02, or -03, the module is an early (older) revision.
• If the Part Number ends in -13 or -23, the module is a later (newer) revision.
3 Repeat the previous step to determine the revision of all other modules in your system.
To use an LED Calibration Preset:

1 In the image of your surface arrangement, tap to select a “new” module.
The selected module is outlined in orange, and across the bottom of the screen the command LED appears.
2 Press LED. The LED Calibration screen appears.
3 Press New.
Brightness settings are loaded that approximately match those of earlier modules.
4 Adjust individual brightness parameters as appropriate (module brightness changes as sliders are adjusted).
5 To save the current settings, press Done. (See also Copy and Paste LED Settings).
LED Calibration settings are stored on the Master Module.
6 To close without changing any settings, do any of the following:
• Press Cancel.
• Tap to select a different module in the arrangement.
• Navigating to any other view on the MTM.
7 Tap to select another module and repeat the previous steps.
Copy and Paste LED Settings
To Copy and Paste LED Calibration settings among modules.

2 In the image of your surface arrangement, tap to select a module.
3 Press LED.
4 Adjust individual brightness parameters as appropriate (module brightness changes as sliders are adjusted).
5 Press Copy.
6 If you adjusted any settings, press Done to save those settings for the currently selected module.
7 In the image of your surface arrangement, tap to select a different module.
8 Press LED.
9 To paste copied settings, press Paste.
10 Press Done to save those settings for the currently selected module.
11 LED Calibration settings are stored on the Master Module.

Calibrating the Joysticks
Calibrate the joysticks on the Master Joystick Module to optimize their response. You can calibrate the joysticks at any time.
To calibrate the joysticks:

1 Navigate the Touchscreen to Settings > Surface.
2 In the image of your surface arrangement, tap to select a Master Joystick Module.
The commands LED, Joystick, Reboot, and Graphs appear along the bottom of the screen.
3 Tap Joystick (or press the switch directly below it) along the bottom of the screen.
4 Follow the instructions on-screen to calibrate the joysticks:
• Move each joystick through their entire range until the displayed values stop changing.
Joystick Calibration screen in Settings > Surface, Config
5 Press Done to accept the new calibration, or press Cancel to exit without changing the calibration settings.
\
To calibrate the MJM LEDs, see .

Calibrating the Master Module Touchscreen
The touchscreen on the Master Module can occasionally display “false touches” (such as a circle appearing when you are not touch-
ing the screen). A touchscreen calibration tool can be run to correct certain false touches. If the false touches prevent you from per-
forming any of the following steps, a USB Keyboard and Mouse can be connected to the Master Module to interface with the op-
erating system.
The exact steps for screen calibration differ slightly depending on the age of your Master Module.
Touchscreen Calibration on Early Versions of the S6 Master Modules

1 Log out of S6 by doing the following:
• Press Settings on the Master Module (dedicated switch or on the touchscreen).
• Press About on the touchscreen.
• Press Logout on the touchscreen.
2 Press Administrator, type in “password” and press Return, then press File Explorer.
3 In the left column of the Explorer window press Computer.
4 Open the Primary (C:) drive by double-tapping on it.
5 Open Program Files.
6 Open Touch Panel Calibration Tool.
7 Open WDT8650_PTool_2008 - The application will take a moment to appear.
8 Press Start - Do not touch the screen during calibration.
9 An error message will appear: “Access to the path ‘C:\Program Files\Touch Panel Calibration Tool\ptool_testlog.txt’ is de-
nied.” This is expected. Press OK.
10 Close the application.

11 Press on the right edge of the touchscreen and swipe from right to left to expand the Windows 8 side bar.
12 Press Start, press Administrator in the top right corner of the screen, press Sign out, then press Avid S6 User.
Touchscreen Calibration on Newer Versions of the Master Modules

1 Download the S6 Touchscreen Calibration Tool from the following location:
http://akmedia.digidesign.com/support/compressed/S6_New_Touchscreen_Calibration_83675.zip
2 Decompress the .ZIP file and copy the folder to a USB flash drive.
3 Insert the USB flash drive into an available port on the back of the Master Module.
4 Log out of S6 by doing the following:
• Press Settings on the Master Module (dedicated switch or on the touchscreen).
• Press About on the touchscreen.
• Press Logout on the touchscreen.
5 Press Administrator, type in “password” and press Return, then press File Explorer.
6 In the left column of the explorer window press Computer.
7 Open the USB drive by double tapping on it.
8 Run the Calibration Tool and follow the directions on-screen.
9 Swipe inwards from the right side of the screen, then press Start.
10 Press Administrator, press Sign out, then press Avid S6 User to use the S6 again.

Utility Test Mode for Modules
If you want to run diagnostic test on any module you can enable Utility Test mode on that module. Note that after running Utility
Test mode on a module, the module will have to be rebooted from the Surface page on the Master Module.
To enable Utility Test mode on a module:
1 Make sure the modules are fully powered up and initialized.

2 Hold down the two switches listed below for several seconds until each of the OLEDs on that module display the Avid logo.
Accessing Utility Test Mode
Module Switches to Hold
Automation Module Select + Swap (Attention Track)
Upper Knob Section Test: Sel (channel 1) + Sel (channel 2) in top row
Lower Fader Section Test: Select + Swap (channel 1)
Display Module See “Display Module Test Mode” on page 267.
Fader Module Select + Swap (channel 1)
Knob Module Select (channel 1) + Select (channel 2)
Master Joystick Module Select + Swap (upper left)
Master Module Sel + In (next to top knob on left side of Touchscreen)
Master Post Module Attention + Link (upper left)
Process Module Clear + Func (channel 1)
3 Release the switches and the OLEDs display tests available on that module. For example, a Fader Module will display Main in
channel 1, with System, Fader, LED, OLED, Switch, Vegas, and Exit displayed in channels 2–8.
The specific tests available on each module may differ from those listed in this guide.
Available tests are indicated by the switch directly below each test flashing blue. To exit, press the flashing switch for Exit.
4 Press the flashing blue switch below the desired test to see choices for that mode. For example, entering Fader test mode lets you
choose Sine, Step, Group, or Triang. OLED test mode offers Vegas.
5 Press the flashing switch below the desired test.
6 To end the test and return to the previous page of choices, press the flashing switch to Exit.
7 After performing a Utility Test on any module, reboot each module by doing the following:
• Navigate the Touchscreen to the Surface page, then tap the tested module(s) on-screen to select it.
• Tap Reboot (at the bottom of the screen). After rebooting modules, touch the banner display to dismiss the alert dialog.
Display Module Test Mode

Display Modules provide a test mode to evaluate display integrity. Test mode can be run on a Display Module while it is connected
to your surface (you do not need to disconnect, unclaim, or power down).
To use Test Mode on a Display Module:
1 Connect a USB keyboard (Windows-compatible recommended) to the USB port on the bottom of the Display Module.
2 On the USB keyboard, press Ctrl + Alt + Shift + V.
An image moves across the screen.
3 To exit, press Ctrl + Alt + Shift + V again (or power cycle the Display Module).
4 Disconnect the USB keyboard from the Display Module.

Technical Support (USA) Product Information
Visit the Online Support Center For company and product information,
at www.avid.com/support visit us on the web at www.avid.com

S4 S6 Guide v19.9 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

S4 S6 Guide v19.9 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

S4 S6 Guide v19.9 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Avid S4/S6 Guide

Software Version 19.9

For a current and complete list of Avid trademarks visit: http://www.avid.com/legal/trademarks-and-other-notices

Guide Part Number 9329-66057-00 REV A 09/19

Chapter 1. Introduction to Avid | S6 and S4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Part II Getting Started

Chapter 2. First Time Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Part III Touchscreen

Chapter 3. Master Module Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Chapter 4. Home Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Chapter 5. Tracks Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Chapter 6. Monitoring Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Chapter 8. Soft Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Chapter 9. Using the S4 Channel Strip Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Part IV Using S4/S6

Chapter 10. Common Tasks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Chapter 11. Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Chapter 12. Using the Master Post Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Chapter 13. Using Master Display Meter Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Chapter 14. Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Chapter 16. Automation and Mixing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Chapter 17. Using the Master Joystick Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Chapter 18. Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Chapter 19. Spill Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Chapter 20. Expand. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Chapter 21. User Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Chapter 22. System Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Chapter 23. S4/S6 Master Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Chapter 24. Channel Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Part VII Appendix

Appendix A. GPIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Appendix B. EQ and DYN Parameters in Expand Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Appendix C. Touchscreen Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Appendix D. Troubleshooting and Utility Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Chapter 1: Introduction to Avid | S6 and S4 1

Master Joystick Module

Master Post Module

Channel Strip Module

Chapter 1: Introduction to Avid | S6 and S4 2

Figure 2. 32-strip S6 M40 arrangement with Display Modules

Chapter 1: Introduction to Avid | S6 and S4 3

Frames and Hardware Options

Chapter 1: Introduction to Avid | S6 and S4 4

Activation and Registration

About This Guide

Conventions Used in This Guide

The following symbols are used to highlight important information:

Shortcuts show you useful keyboard or mouse shortcuts.

How to Use this PDF Guide

Chapter 1: Introduction to Avid | S6 and S4 5

Account Activation, Product Registration, and License Activation

Support and Downloads

For S6 support, troubleshooting, and downloads, visit:

Training and Education

Products and Developers

News and Events

Chapter 1: Introduction to Avid | S6 and S4 6

Before connecting any workstations to S4/S6, you must do the following:

Starting Up the System for the First Time